00Cover Imacs 36 Refguide
imacs-36-refguide imacs-36-refguide
User Manual: imacs-36-refguide
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 454
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
IMACS Integrated Multiple Access Communications Server Reference Guide Publication 000-001949 Revision 3.6.0 October 1997 Premisys Communications Trademarks: Premisys is a registered trademark of Premisys Communications, Inc. ESS is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies SLC is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies FCC Registration number: 1H5SNG-73866-DD-E (multiplexer) 1H5SNG-73866-DD-E (integral CSU) B468NR-68618-DM-E (internal modem) Canadian Certification number: Canadian DOC Load number: 1932 5217 A 5 Ringer Equivalence number (REN): 0.8B 0.2A (multiplexer) (internal modem) Approvals: UL listed to UL# 1459 Second Edition, Number 9K09 CSA listed to C22.2 No. 950-M89 COPYRIGHT © 1992-1997 Premisys Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Premisys Communications, 48664 Milmont Drive, Fremont, California, 94538, (510) 353-7600, FAX (510) 353-7601. Premisys makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Further, Premisys Communications reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Premisys Communications to notify any person of such revision or changes. Important Safety Instructions: 1. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in this Reference Guide. 2. This product is intended to be used with a three-wire grounding type plug - a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter. Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the AC receptacle for the presence of earth ground. If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem. If a three-wire grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment. 3. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered. 4. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons could step or walk on the power cord. 5. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 6. Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site, are the responsibility of the customer. 7. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance. 8. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings. If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products. 9. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) protection must be used when handling circuit card assemblies and all other electronic parts covered in this manual. WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class "A" Digital Device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with this Reference Guide, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case, the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirement that no modifications will be made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Premisys Communications. Table of Contents Section 1 - Preface Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-1 How to Use this Reference Guide ................................................................................................................... 1-A-1 T1/E1 Operations............................................................................................................................................ 1-A-2 Page Layout.................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-2 Special Instructions......................................................................................................................................... 1-A-3 Redundant Power Supplies.............................................................................................................................. 1-A-3 Operator Services Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 1-A-4 Safety Precautions .......................................................................................................................................... 1-A-4 Grounding................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-4 Power Source.............................................................................................................................................. 1-A-4 Fusing......................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-4 Panel and Cover Removal........................................................................................................................... 1-A-4 Regulatory Compliance Information ............................................................................................................... 1-A-5 FCC Part 68 Information............................................................................................................................. 1-A-5 CE Marking ................................................................................................................................................ 1-A-7 Country-Specific Regulatory Compliance Information.................................................................................... 1-A-7 Canada........................................................................................................................................................ 1-A-7 Canadian DOC Information..................................................................................................................... 1-A-7 Japan........................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-8 Class A ITE Notification......................................................................................................................... 1-A-8 Europe ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-A-8 European Telecommunication Approvals ................................................................................................ 1-A-8 United Kingdom ......................................................................................................................................... 1-A-8 UK Approval Number ............................................................................................................................. 1-A-8 UK Compliance Statements..................................................................................................................... 1-A-8 Germany ................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-10 German Approval Number .................................................................................................................... 1-A-10 Safety Warning ..................................................................................................................................... 1-A-10 Customer Service.......................................................................................................................................... 1-A-11 Service...................................................................................................................................................... 1-A-11 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................................ 1-A-11 Section 2 - System Information System Slot Map Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 2-A-1 Two-Sided Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 2-A-1 Front-Loading Unit......................................................................................................................................... 2-A-3 Front-Loading Chassis—Power Supplies on Top......................................................................................... 2-A-6 Installation Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 2-B-1 Design Plan .................................................................................................................................................... 2-B-1 (10-97) i Table of Contents Reference Guide v3.6 Site Selection and Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 2-B-1 Installation Checklist ...................................................................................................................................... 2-B-2 Unpacking and Mounting the Chassis ............................................................................................................. 2-B-5 Two-Sided Chassis...................................................................................................................................... 2-B-5 Front-Loading Chassis (Power Supplies on Side) ........................................................................................ 2-B-6 Front-Loading Chassis (Power Supplies on Top)......................................................................................... 2-B-7 Mounting the Chassis...................................................................................................................................... 2-B-8 Power Supply and Ringing Generator System ................................................................................................. 2-B-9 System Power ............................................................................................................................................. 2-B-9 -48VDC Talk Battery.................................................................................................................................. 2-B-9 Ringing Generators ..................................................................................................................................... 2-B-9 US/Europe Jumper .................................................................................................................................... 2-B-10 Chassis Grounding........................................................................................................................................ 2-B-11 Grounding Six-Digit Chassis..................................................................................................................... 2-B-12 Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Side.................................................................................... 2-B-13 Two-Sided Chassis................................................................................................................................ 2-B-13 Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Top..................................................................................... 2-B-13 Grounding Four-Digit Chassis................................................................................................................... 2-B-14 Installing the AC Power Supply (8901)......................................................................................................... 2-B-14 Installing the DC Power Supply (8902 or 8907) ............................................................................................ 2-B-15 External Power Connector ............................................................................................................................ 2-B-16 8916 Chassis Power Connector ................................................................................................................. 2-B-16 891620 Chassis Power Connector ............................................................................................................. 2-B-16 891822/891823 Chassis Power Connector................................................................................................. 2-B-17 891920 Chassis Power Connector ............................................................................................................. 2-B-17 Installing the 115VAC to -48VDC Converter (8903, 8905 and 8908)............................................................ 2-B-18 Installing the Ringing Generator (8904 or 8906) ........................................................................................... 2-B-20 To install the 8904 Ringing Generator: ..................................................................................................... 2-B-21 To Install the 8906 Ringing Generator: ..................................................................................................... 2-B-22 Connecting AC Power .................................................................................................................................. 2-B-23 Using Amphenol Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 2-B-23 Basic Operations Terminal Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 2-C-1 Logging On .................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-1 Registration .................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-3 Main Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-4 Introduction to Screens ................................................................................................................................... 2-C-5 Status Screen .................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-6 Configuring the Cards..................................................................................................................................... 2-C-7 Alarms............................................................................................................................................................ 2-C-8 Filters ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-9 Report....................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-11 Log ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-11 Ignore ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-11 Modifiers ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-11 ACO ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-11 Alarm Handling ............................................................................................................................................ 2-C-11 Reinitializing the System .............................................................................................................................. 2-C-13 CPU Card ................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-13 Test and Debug Screen ................................................................................................................................. 2-C-14 ZIP............................................................................................................................................................ 2-C-14 DEBUG .................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-15 ii (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Table of Contents REG.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-15 BACKUP.................................................................................................................................................. 2-C-17 Backup Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 2-C-18 RESTORE ................................................................................................................................................ 2-C-19 Restore Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 2-C-19 MAIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-C-20 System Operations Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 2-D-1 Assigning the Timeslot Map ........................................................................................................................... 2-D-1 Assigning Timeslots from a User Card............................................................................................................ 2-D-2 Bus-Connect Model .................................................................................................................................... 2-D-2 E&M Card .................................................................................................................................................. 2-D-3 HSU Card ................................................................................................................................................... 2-D-4 Cross-Connect Model.................................................................................................................................. 2-D-5 Using the Configuration Option ...................................................................................................................... 2-D-5 Cross-Connecting WAN Timeslots ................................................................................................................. 2-D-8 Using the Test Option for Voice Cross-Connects .......................................................................................... 2-D-22 Broadcast...................................................................................................................................................... 2-D-26 WAN Link to WAN Link.......................................................................................................................... 2-D-32 Test Access Digroups (TADS) ...................................................................................................................... 2-D-33 Monitor Circuit ......................................................................................................................................... 2-D-34 Split Circuit .............................................................................................................................................. 2-D-36 Release ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-D-37 Terminate and Leave Access..................................................................................................................... 2-D-38 Signaling and Companding Conversion in Bus-Connect Systems.................................................................. 2-D-40 Checking the Timeslot Map.......................................................................................................................... 2-D-42 Recording the Configuration on Paper .......................................................................................................... 2-D-44 Redundant Operations Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................2-E-1 Power System ..................................................................................................................................................2-E-1 CPU Card ........................................................................................................................................................2-E-2 WAN Card.......................................................................................................................................................2-E-3 Enhanced Bus-Connect WAN Redundancy..................................................................................................2-E-4 Cross-Connect WAN Redundancy ...............................................................................................................2-E-6 ADPCM Card ..................................................................................................................................................2-E-8 Section 3 - CPU Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-1 8800 CPU Card........................................................................................................................................... 3-A-1 8801 CPU Card........................................................................................................................................... 3-A-1 8804 CPU Card........................................................................................................................................... 3-A-1 CPU Card Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 3-A-2 Changing Passwords ....................................................................................................................................... 3-A-3 Entering Values in Fields ............................................................................................................................ 3-A-3 Printing Alarms Remotely .............................................................................................................................. 3-A-4 TCP/IP Network Management ........................................................................................................................ 3-A-8 Network Statistics......................................................................................................................................... 3-A-12 SLIP ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-13 (10-97) iii Table of Contents Reference Guide v3.6 FDL .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-13 IP.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-A-14 ICMP ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-A-15 TCP .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-16 UDP.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-18 TELNET................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-18 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-18 Routing......................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-19 IP NET ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-21 SubNetMask ............................................................................................................................................. 3-A-21 Slot/Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 3-A-21 Adding Routes .......................................................................................................................................... 3-A-22 Delete a Route .......................................................................................................................................... 3-A-22 Get Information ........................................................................................................................................ 3-A-22 Section 4 - ADPCM Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 4-A-1 ADPCM Card Settings.................................................................................................................................... 4-A-1 Section 5 - WAN Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 5-A-1 811 DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module ................................................................................................................. 5-A-1 812 CSU Plug-in Module ............................................................................................................................ 5-A-1 820 HDSL E1 Plug-in Module .................................................................................................................... 5-A-1 8000 Single T1/E1 Link Card ..................................................................................................................... 5-A-1 8010 Dual T1/E1 Link Card........................................................................................................................ 5-A-1 8014 Dual T1/E1 Link Card (with Relays) .................................................................................................. 5-A-2 8011 HDSL E1 WAN Card......................................................................................................................... 5-A-2 Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module (811) Rev E1+........................................................................... 5-A-3 Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module (811) Rev A1-D1 ...................................................................... 5-A-4 Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module 811-F ........................................................................................ 5-A-5 Setting Jumpers for Balanced/Unbalanced E1 Operation................................................................................. 5-A-6 Balanced Operation..................................................................................................................................... 5-A-6 Unbalanced Operation................................................................................................................................. 5-A-6 Installing CSU, DSX/CEPT Modules (811, 812, 820) ..................................................................................... 5-A-7 WAN Card Settings for CSU/DSX.................................................................................................................. 5-A-7 Cross-Connect (XCON) ............................................................................................................................ 5-A-18 Performance Monitoring ........................................................................................................................... 5-A-19 Far End Statistics ...................................................................................................................................... 5-A-21 Test........................................................................................................................................................... 5-A-22 WAN Card Settings for HDSL E1................................................................................................................. 5-A-25 HDSL Performance Monitoring Screen......................................................................................................... 5-A-32 iv (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Table of Contents Section 6 - Interface Cards and External Alarm Cards Interface Cards Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 6-A-1 8920 Interface Card .................................................................................................................................... 6-A-1 8921 Interface Card .................................................................................................................................... 6-A-2 Interface Card (8925)...................................................................................................................................... 6-A-3 Interface Card (8926)...................................................................................................................................... 6-A-4 Interface Card (8927)...................................................................................................................................... 6-A-5 Interface Card Ports and Functions ................................................................................................................. 6-A-6 Internal Modem .......................................................................................................................................... 6-A-7 Logging On Remotely................................................................................................................................. 6-A-7 Using the Node Port........................................................................................................................................ 6-A-8 Interface Card Settings.................................................................................................................................... 6-A-9 Signaling Conversion Tables ........................................................................................................................ 6-A-11 Remote Terminal System (RTS) ................................................................................................................... 6-A-12 Identification ............................................................................................................................................ 6-A-12 Network Priorities..................................................................................................................................... 6-A-13 Intra-Network Communications ................................................................................................................ 6-A-13 Terminal Security ..................................................................................................................................... 6-A-13 Changing the 8927 from Balanced to Unbalanced......................................................................................... 6-A-14 External Alarm Cards Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 6-B-1 8401 External Alarm Card .......................................................................................................................... 6-B-1 8402 External Alarm Card .......................................................................................................................... 6-B-1 External Alarm Card Screens (8401 and 8402) ............................................................................................... 6-B-3 8403 External Alarm Card .............................................................................................................................. 6-B-5 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 6-B-5 Alarm Sensors ................................................................................................................................................ 6-B-6 Alarm Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 6-B-8 Voice............................................................................................................................................................ 6-B-10 Features ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-B-13 Onboard Buzzer ........................................................................................................................................ 6-B-13 US/Euro Jumper........................................................................................................................................ 6-B-13 Voltage Control Switches.......................................................................................................................... 6-B-14 Alarm Sensor Jumpers .............................................................................................................................. 6-B-14 Section 7 - Voice Cards E & M Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 8118 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 8119 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 UL Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 8104 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 8108 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 UL Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-1 (10-97) v Table of Contents Reference Guide v3.6 8112 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-2 8113 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-2 8114 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-2 8115 E&M Card ......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-2 E&M Card Settings......................................................................................................................................... 7-A-3 Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-A-9 FXS Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8129 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 UL Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8122 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8123 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8124 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8125 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 8128 FXS Card ........................................................................................................................................... 7-B-1 FXS Card Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 7-B-2 Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-B-8 FXO Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8139 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 UL Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8132 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8133 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8134 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8135 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 8138 FXO Card........................................................................................................................................... 7-C-1 FXO Card Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 7-C-2 Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-C-7 Setting Jumpers on the FXO Card................................................................................................................. 7-C-12 FXS Coin Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 7-D-1 8149 FXS Coin Card................................................................................................................................... 7-D-1 FXS Coin Card Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-D-1 External Card Connectors and Pinouts ........................................................................................................ 7-D-1 Card Jumper/Switch Settings ...................................................................................................................... 7-D-1 Installing the FXS Coin Card ...................................................................................................................... 7-D-1 FXS Coin Card User Screens and Settings ...................................................................................................... 7-D-2 Main Screen................................................................................................................................................ 7-D-2 Test Screen ................................................................................................................................................. 7-D-7 FXO Coin Card Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................7-E-1 8159 FXO Coin Card ...................................................................................................................................7-E-1 FXO Coin Card Settings ..................................................................................................................................7-E-1 External Card Connectors and Pinouts .........................................................................................................7-E-1 Card Jumper/Switch Settings .......................................................................................................................7-E-1 Installing the FXO Coin Card.......................................................................................................................7-E-2 vi (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Table of Contents FXO Coin Card User Screens and Settings.......................................................................................................7-E-3 Main Screen.................................................................................................................................................7-E-3 Test Screen ..................................................................................................................................................7-E-8 Section 8 - Data Cards High Speed Unit (HSU) Cards Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 8-A-1 8202 High-Speed Unit Card ........................................................................................................................ 8-A-1 8203 High Speed Unit Card ........................................................................................................................ 8-A-1 8212 High-Speed Unit Card ........................................................................................................................ 8-A-1 8214 High-Speed Unit Card V.35 Trunk / User........................................................................................... 8-A-1 8215 High-Speed Unit Card ........................................................................................................................ 8-A-1 HSU Card Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 8-A-1 Test .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-A-10 Setting On-board Option Switches ................................................................................................................ 8-A-14 Setting Switches on the 8215 HSU Card ................................................................................................... 8-A-14 Using the 1251, 1252 and 1253 Personality Modules .................................................................................... 8-A-15 RS232 Personality Module Description..................................................................................................... 8-A-16 RS232-E Personality Module Description ................................................................................................. 8-A-16 Sub-Rate Unit (SRU) Cards Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 8-B-1 8220 Sub-Rate Data Card............................................................................................................................ 8-B-1 SRU Card Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 8-B-1 Examples........................................................................................................................................................ 8-B-9 Test .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-B-12 Office Channel Unit-Data Port (OCU-DP) Cards Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 8-C-1 8249 OCU-DP Card .................................................................................................................................... 8-C-1 8247 OCU-DP Card .................................................................................................................................... 8-C-1 845 OCU-DP Child Card ............................................................................................................................ 8-C-1 8248 OCU-DP Card .................................................................................................................................... 8-C-1 OCU-DP Card Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-C-2 Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-C-8 OCU-DP Error Correction and Performance Monitoring............................................................................... 8-C-11 Frame Relay Assembler-Disassembler (FRAD) Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 8-D-1 8231 FRAD Card ........................................................................................................................................ 8-D-1 8231 FRAD Card Main Screen ....................................................................................................................... 8-D-1 8231 FRAD Card Performance Screen............................................................................................................ 8-D-6 DS0 Data Port (DS0-DP) Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................8-E-1 DS0-DP Card Settings .....................................................................................................................................8-E-1 UL Statement ...........................................................................................................................................8-E-1 (10-97) vii Table of Contents Reference Guide v3.6 Bit-7 Redundant (B7R) Card Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................8-F-1 8228 Bit-7-Redundant (B7R) Card...............................................................................................................8-F-1 B7R Card Settings ...........................................................................................................................................8-F-2 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Card Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 8-G-1 8260 BRI Card............................................................................................................................................ 8-G-1 8261 BRI Card............................................................................................................................................ 8-G-1 8262 BRI Card............................................................................................................................................ 8-G-1 UL Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 8-G-1 BRI Circuit Applications ................................................................................................................................ 8-G-2 8260 and 8261 BRI Card Settings ................................................................................................................... 8-G-3 The Sealing Current Screen ............................................................................................................................ 8-G-9 Conversion ................................................................................................................................................... 8-G-10 Embedded Operations Channel ..................................................................................................................... 8-G-13 Remote NTU Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 8-G-13 NTU Test...................................................................................................................................................... 8-G-17 NTU Status................................................................................................................................................... 8-G-19 BRI (8260/8261) Test ................................................................................................................................... 8-G-21 Performance Monitoring (8260/8261) ........................................................................................................... 8-G-25 8262 BRI Card Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-G-28 8262 BRI Card Main Screen Parameter Options........................................................................................ 8-G-28 Conversion ................................................................................................................................................... 8-G-33 Test .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-G-33 Setting Terminal Type Jumpers on the 8261 ................................................................................................. 8-G-37 Setting Sealing Current Jumpers on the 8261 ................................................................................................ 8-G-38 Setting Jumpers on the 8262 ......................................................................................................................... 8-G-39 Section 9 - Pinouts Pinouts Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 9-A-1 Interface Cards (8920 and 8921) ..................................................................................................................... 9-A-1 WAN Link Connector................................................................................................................................. 9-A-4 1183 Adapter (600 Chassis) ........................................................................................................................ 9-A-6 1184 Adapter (800 Chassis) ........................................................................................................................ 9-A-6 RS232 Management Port ............................................................................................................................ 9-A-7 RJ11C Modem Port..................................................................................................................................... 9-A-8 RS485 Node Port ........................................................................................................................................ 9-A-8 RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port....................................................................................................... 9-A-9 Interface Card (8925).................................................................................................................................... 9-A-10 RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port..................................................................................................... 9-A-10 WAN Link Connectors ............................................................................................................................. 9-A-11 Interface Card (8926).................................................................................................................................... 9-A-12 Interface Card (8927).................................................................................................................................... 9-A-13 External Alarm Card (8401 and 8402) .......................................................................................................... 9-A-14 External Alarm Card (8403).......................................................................................................................... 9-A-15 E&M Card (8108)......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-19 E&M Card (8115)......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-21 viii (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Table of Contents E&M Card (8118)......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-22 E&M Card (8119)......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-24 FXS Card (8124 and 8125) ........................................................................................................................... 9-A-26 FXS Card (8128 and 8129) ........................................................................................................................... 9-A-27 FXO Card (8134 and 8135)........................................................................................................................... 9-A-28 FXO Card (8138 and 8139)........................................................................................................................... 9-A-29 FXS Coin Card (8149) .................................................................................................................................. 9-A-30 FXO Coin Card (8159) ................................................................................................................................. 9-A-31 HSU Card (8202) RS530............................................................................................................................... 9-A-32 RS530 Channel Connectors....................................................................................................................... 9-A-32 HSU Card (8203).......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-34 DB-25 Channel Connectors....................................................................................................................... 9-A-34 HSU Card (8212) V.35 ................................................................................................................................. 9-A-36 V.35 Channel Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 9-A-36 HSU Card (8214) V.35 ................................................................................................................................. 9-A-38 Homologation Notification ....................................................................................................................... 9-A-38 DB-25/V.35 Channel Connectors .............................................................................................................. 9-A-39 HSU Card (8215) RS530 / V.35.................................................................................................................... 9-A-40 RS530/V.35 Channel Connectors .............................................................................................................. 9-A-40 SRU Card (8220) .......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-42 OCU-DP Card (8247) ................................................................................................................................... 9-A-43 OCU-DP Card (8248) ................................................................................................................................... 9-A-44 OCU-DP Card (8249) ................................................................................................................................... 9-A-45 DS0-DP Card (8254)..................................................................................................................................... 9-A-46 FRAD Card (8231) ....................................................................................................................................... 9-A-48 B7R Card (8228) .......................................................................................................................................... 9-A-49 BRI Card (8260, 8261, and 8262) ................................................................................................................. 9-A-50 Section 10 - Additional Information Error Messages Glossary (10-97) ix Table of Contents x Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Introduction Premisys Communications' Integrated Multiple Access Communications Server (IMACS) allows you to take advantage of the sophisticated network services available from long-distance companies, telephone companies, specialized carriers and PTTs. By using these new services, you can increase the capabilities of your private network and simultaneously reduce costs. This Reference Guide will help you put the IMACS to work in your networking environment. The IMACS takes the place of many network access devices, including: • CSUs • DSUs • Channel banks • Drop-and-insert multiplexers • Digital cross-connect systems By taking over the functions of all these network access devices, a single IMACS system allows linking a wide range of voice and data equipment over the network, among them: • LAN bridges and routers • PBXs (analog or digital) and key systems • Fax machines • Terminals and computers • Telephones • Modems • Video CODECs How to Use this Reference Guide This Reference Guide is arranged to assist the technician in unpacking, assembling, configuring, and running the integrated access system. The Reference Guide is divided into Sections. Some Sections are further subdivided into Chapters. Section 1 contains the Preface (this chapter). Section 2, System Operations, consists of five chapters: System Slot Map, Installation, Basic Operations, System Operations, and Redundant Operations. Section 2 answers most “what-goes-where” questions. Other sections give more detailed descriptions of the procedures involved in configuring and running the IMACS. The System Slot Map chapter describes the chassis and details the placement of individual components. (10-97) Page 1-A-1 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface The Installation chapter elaborates upon the previous section and shows various installation techniques. It also discusses each of the power supplies, converters, and ringing generators, and provides methods of installing them in the system. The Basic Operations chapter is an overview that allows users to launch and test the system and assign values to the alarm warnings. The System Operations chapter discusses how users define the timeslot map for the individual nodes. The Redundant Operations chapter deals with power, CPU, WAN, and ADPCM card redundancy features. Section 3 contains detailed information on the CPU card. Section 4 discusses the ADPCM Server Card, which is the only Server card supported in this release. Section 5 covers all WAN Cards and their functionalities, including CSU, DSX, HDSL, and CEPT. Section 6 discusses the Interface and External Alarm cards. Section 7 presents the Voice Cards. Currently, these include E&M, FXS, and FXO cards, as well as FXS and FXO Coin cards. Section 8 describes the Data Cards. Data cards compatible with this release include the HSU, SRU, OCU-DP, FRAD, DS0-DP, B7R, and BRI cards. Section 9 shows Pinouts for all applicable cards. It shows the wiring specifications for each of the cards. Section 10 contains a list of error messages and their meanings, as well as a glossary of frequently encountered terms. T1/E1 Operations The IMACS can handle either T1 or E1 operations alone or simultaneously. For consistency, most of the screenshots in this documentation reflect T1 operation. The only chapters that specifically address E1 operation are: Ø Ø Ø Ø System Operations Basic Operations Redundant Operations WAN Card Page Layout This Reference Guide was designed to adhere to conventional documentation standards. The header on each page contains the Revision and Chapter names. The footer of each page has the version, date of publication, and page number. The page number consists of the section number, chapter letter, and page. Page 1-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Special Instructions The following recommendations are to be performed by a qualified service person ONLY. 1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. 2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 5. E&M wiring must be confined to inside plant ONLY. 6. Never attempt to remove the power panel without first disconnecting input power cables. 7. Never attempt to operate this system when the power panel screws are removed. They provide the safety ground for the system. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Reference Guide, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Redundant Power Supplies The following information applies only to systems with redundant power supplies (see Redundant Operations chapter). The redundant power supply does not share the power load with other equipment. 1. An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply conductors, is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system. Bare, covered or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. The equipment grounding conductor is to be connected to ground at the service equipment. 2. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment. (10-97) Page 1-A-3 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Operator Services Requirements This equipment is capable of giving users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be in violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules. Safety Precautions The equipment is designed and manufactured in compliance with Safety Standard EN60950. However, the following precautions should be observed to ensure personal safety during installation or service, and prevent damage to the equipment or equipment to be connected. Grounding The equipment can be grounded through the power cord as well as the terminal marked . For detailed information on grounding procedures, please see the Grounding section in the Installation chapter. Power Source AC: 120 Volts @ 2.0 amps / 240 Volts @ 1 amp, 50/60 Hz DC: +24 Volts @ 3.0 amps / -48 Volts @ 1.5 amps Additionally, the DC source must provide a means of disconnecting power from the supply, and the supply voltage must be provided from an isolated source complying with SELV requirements of EN60950. Fusing To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse with the specified type and rating for the equipment. Panel and Cover Removal Removal of covers and panels should only be attempted by qualified service or operations persons. Never attempt to operate the equipment with power panel fasteners removed, or removal of power panel cover without first disconnecting input power. Page 1-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Part 68 Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear panel of the equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Tables Preface-1, -2 and -3 show the Ringer-Jack configuration information necessary for FCC registration. The equipment has FCC Registration Number 1H5SNG-73866-DD-E. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C, RJ21X, RJ2EX, RJ2FX, RJ2GX and RJ2HX. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. This equipment is hearing-aid compatible. The following information is required for registration with the FCC and is placed on the rear panel of each unit: “This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.” “Complies with Part 68 FCC Rules FCC Registration Number: 1H5SNG-73866-DD-E Ringer Equivalence: 0.8 B” (10-97) Page 1-A-5 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Table Preface-1. FCC Registration Information Reg. Status MTS/WATS Interfaces Model # M 02LS2 8138 M 02GS-2 8138 Reg. 02LS2 8920 Ringer Equiv. Number 0.4B (ac), 0.0 (dc) 0.4B (ac), 0.0 (dc) 0.8B (ac), 0.0 (dc) SOC Networ k USOC Canadian Jacks ----- RJ11X CA11X ----- RJ11X CA11X ----- RJ11X CA11X Table Preface-2. FCC Registration Information Reg. Analog PL Interfaces Model # SOC Network USOC Canadian Jacks Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. Reg. 0L13C 02LR2 TL11M TL12M TL11E TL12E TL31M TL32M TL31E TL32E 8128 8128 8128 8128 8108, 8118 8108, 8118 8108, 8118 8108, 8118 8108, 8118 8108, 8118 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F 9.0F RJ21X RJ21X RJ2EX RJ21FX RJ2EX RJ2FX RJ2GX RJ2HX RJ2GX RJ2HX CA21A CA21A CA2EA CA2FA CA2EA CA2FA CA2GA CA2HA CA2GA CA8HA Table Preface-3. FCC Registration Information Reg. Digital Interfaces Model # Reg. 04DU9-BN 8000, 8010* Reg. 04DU9-DN 8000, 8010* Reg. 04DU9-1KN 8000, 8010* Reg. 04DU9-1SN 8000, 8010* Reg. 04DU9-1ZN 8000, 8010* Reg. 04DU9-BN 8000, 8010** Reg. 04DU9-DN 8000, 8010** Reg. 04DU9-1KN 8000, 8010** Reg. 04DU9-1SN 8000, 8010** M 04DU5-24 8249 M 04DU5-48 8249 M 04DU5-56 8249 M 04DU5-96 8249 * with 812 CSU ** with 811 DSX Page 1-A-6 SOC Network USOC Canadian Jacks 6.0Y 6.0Y 6.0Y 6.0Y 6.0Y 6.0P 6.0P 6.0P 6.0P 6.0F 6.0F 6.0F 6.0F RJ48 RJ48 RJ48 RJ48 RJ48 N/A N/A N/A N/A RJ48 RJ48 RJ48 RJ48 CA81A CA81A CA81A CA81A CA81A --------CA81A CA81A CA81A CA81A (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface CE Marking The CE mark is affixed to the equipment that conforms to the following Commission Directives: • EMC Directive - 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. • Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits. • Telecom Directive - 91/263/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning telecommunications terminal equipment, including the mutual recognition of their conformity. Country-Specific Regulatory Compliance Information Canada CANADIAN DOC INFORMATION NOTICE TO USERS OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE NETWORK The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection the electrical ground connection of the power utility, telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. (10-97) Page 1-A-7 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of all the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100. Japan CLASS A ITE NOTIFICATION Europe EUROPEAN TELECOMMUNICATION APPROVALS Under the Telecommunications Terminal Directive the following connections are approved: The Dual WAN card (8010), the Single WAN card (8000) and the 120 ohm version of the DSX/CEPT Module (811) are approved for connection to ONP unstructured 2048 kbiVs digital leased lines with G.703 interfaces, following assessment against CTR12 United Kingdom UK APPROVAL NUMBER The BABT approval number is M606037. The Dual WAN card (8010), the Single WAN card (8000) and the 75 ohm version of the DSX/CEPT Module (811), connected via the BNC connector panel (1183) are approved for connection to UK 2048 kbiVs digital leased lines with G.703 (75Ohm) interfaces. UK COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS The E1 Interface is approved in the UK for direct connection to PTO-provided circuits operating at data rates up to 2.4Mbit/s. The E1 Interface comprises a combination of single or dual WAN cards, CEPT module and connector panels as listed in the UK approval documentation. The approved configuration options are shown below. Page 1-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface WAN Card Single/Dual 800020/801020 CEPT Module 811 Interface Card 89xx Connector Panel 1181/1181UK 1183/1183UK 118320 1184 PTN I/F The 89xx Interface Card is also listed in the approval documentation and provides a direct metallic path between the CEPT module and appropriate Connector Panel. The power required by the host and the total of all adapter cards installed within the host environment, together with any auxiliary apparatus, shall not exceed the power specification of the host apparatus. The power requirements for this E1 interface are: 8901 PSU AC Mains: DC Output: 8902 PSU DC Input: DC Output: 100 - 240 Vrms, 47 - 63 Hz +5VDC 2A, +12VDC 1.2A, -12VDC 0.2A 35 - 60 VDC, ± 15%, 120KVA max. +5.6VDC 2.5A, -5.2VDC 1.0A +12VDC 1.9A, -12VDC 1.0A It is essential that, when other option cards are introduced which use or generate a hazardous voltage, the minimum creepages and clearances specified in the table below are maintained. Suitable user protection to ensure compliance with EN 60950 should be present on the card. A hazardous voltage is one which exceeds 42.2V peak AC or 60VDC. If you have any doubt, seek advice from a competent installation engineer before installing other adapters into the host equipment. The equipment must be installed such that with the exception of the connections to the host, clearance and creepage distances shown in the table below are maintained between the card and any other assemblies which use or generate a voltage shown in the table below. The large distance shown in brackets applies where the local environment is subject to conductive pollution or dry non-conductive pollution which could become conductive due to condensation. Failure to maintain these minimum distances would invalidate the approval. (10-97) Clearance (mm) Creepage (mm) Voltage Used or Generated By Host or Other Cards 2.0 2.4 (3.8) Up to 50Vrms or VDC 2.6 3.0 (4.8) Up to 125Vrms or VDC 4.0 5.0 (8.0) Up to 250Vrms or VDC Page 1-A-9 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface 4.0 6.4 (10.0) For a host or other expansion card fitted in the host, using or generating voltages greater than 300V (rms or DC), advice from a competent telecommunications safety engineer must be obtained before installation of the relevant equipment Up to 300Vrms or VDC Above 300Vrms or VDC Germany GERMAN APPROVAL NUMBER The German approval number is A118 142F. SAFETY WARNING SPEZIFISCHE SICHERHEITSMAßNAHMEN DIE EINRICHTUNG IST GEMÄß DEM SICHERHEITSSTANDARD EN60950 ENTWORFEN UND HERGESTELLT WORDEN. DOCH DIE FOLGENDEN SICHERHEITSMAßNAMEN SOLLEN EINGEHALTEN WERDEN. UM IHRE PERSÖNLICHE SICHERHEIT BEI INSTALLATION ODER BEI WARTUNG SICHERZUSTELLEN UND UM SCHADEN AN DER EINRICHTUNG ODER AN DER ZUM ANSCHLUß BESTIMMTEN EINRICHTUNG ZU VERMEIDEN. ERDUNG Die Einrichtung kann genauso durch das Netzanschlußkabel wie durch das mit gekennzeichnete Terminal geerdet werden. STROMVERSORGUNG Wechselspannung 120/240 Volts 2/1 Amps 50/60 Hertz Gleichstrom 24/48 Volts 1/1.5 Amps Die Gleichstromversogung muß zusätzlich den Strom von der Versorgung abstellen können, und die Versorgungsspannung muß von einer isolierten Quelle gemäß der SELV-Voraussetzungen von EN60950 versorgt werden. SCHMELZSICHERUNG Um Brandgefahr zu vermeiden, dürfen Sie nur die Sicherung von der vorgeschriebenen Sorte und Nennwerte für die Einrichtung gerbrauchen. ENTFERNUNG VON PLATTEN UND ABDECKUNGEN Die Abdeckungen und Platten sollen nur von einem qualifizierten Wartungs- oder Operationsperson entfernt werden. Betreiben Sie nie die Einrichtung, wenn die Stromplattenverschlüsse entfernt worden sind, und entfernen Sie nie die Stromplattenabdeckung, ohne zuerst die Stromversorgung abzustellen. Page 1-A-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Customer Service Service If you require technical assistance with the installation, operation or maintenance of products purchased directly from Premisys or you wish to return a product under Warranty for repair, please call: Premisys Technical Support at (510) 353-7686. If you purchased the Premisys product from an authorized dealer, distributor, Value Added Reseller (VAR) or a third party, please contact that vendor for technical assistance and warranty support. Ordering Information To order equipment, cables or additional copies of this Reference Guide, please call: Premisys Customer Service at (510) 353-7600. (10-97) Page 1-A-11 Reference Guide v3.6 Preface Page 1-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Slot Map Introduction The system offers the choice of three chassis and employs four types of cards. This chapter specifies the slots in which cards of different types may be installed in the three chassis. The chassis options are: 1. Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Side: This chassis provides full functionality for smaller systems that require few options and small capacity. 2. Two-Sided Chassis: With front and rear-facing card cages, this chassis provides maximum system functionality and capacity. 3. Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Top: This chassis provides the same functionality and capacity as the two-sided chassis with front facing card cages. The following types of cards may be installed in the chassis: 1. Common cards (CPU and Interface cards) 2. User cards (Voice, Data and Alarm cards) 3. WAN cards (single or dual T1/E1,or HDSL) 4. Communications Server cards (ADPCM) All cards slide into slots in the front of the front-loading systems or the front and back of the two-sided chassis. Rail guides in the top and bottom of the slots align the cards with the connectors for easy insertion. Two-Sided Unit Figure Slot-1 shows the front of the chassis (often called the Network side) with the slot numbers labeled. Cards inserted from the Network side have plastic face plates with a handle in the middle and a retaining screw on the bottom of the cards. Figure Slot-2 shows the back of the chassis (often called the User side) with the slot numbers labeled. Cards inserted from the User Side have metal face plates with handles at the top and bottom. Those cards have screws on both the top and bottom of the face plates. Push the cards firmly into the chassis until the face plate touches the chassis. Screw the face plates to the chassis so the cards cannot come loose accidentally. The two-sided chassis has an error-free card placement system. Certain card types are "keyed" to fit only in their own slots. User cards, for instance, will not seat properly in the CPU Slots (C-1 and C-2). Table Slot-1 describes card placement and should be used to determine setup arrangements. Always put blank face plates over any slots you are not using. Blank face plates help protect the installed cards from contamination, and are an integral part of the air circulation system that keeps the system cool. Also, the blank face plates are required for compliance with UL regulations. (10-97) Page 2-A-1 System Slot Map Reference Guide v3.6 EUR/US JP1 1 2 3 F1 C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 F2 W4 Figure Slot-1. Two-Sided Chassis - Front View R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 AC R + - - + + - C G VN V A VB O R M IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Figure Slot-2. Two-Sided Chassis - Rear View Page 2-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Slot Map Table Slot-1. Card Placement: Two-Sided Chassis Type of Card CPU Cards Server Cards WAN Cards Interface Card Alarm Cards E&M Cards FXO Cards FXS Cards B7R Cards BRI Cards DS0-DP Cards FRAD Cards HSU Cards OCU-DP Cards SRU Cards Main Power (AC/DC) Optional Power Optional Ringer # of Cards 1-2 1-3 1-4 1 0-8 Slots Used C1-C2 P1-P3 W1-W4 IF U1-U8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 1-2 0-2 0-5 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 F1-F2 R1-R5 R1-R5 Notes One required in either slot ADPCM cards; any slot One required Required Internal/External, any user slot 2/4 wire voice, any user slot 2 wire voice, any user slot 2 wire voice, any user slot FDL Mux, any user slot BRI, any user slot 4 wire data, any user slot Frame Relay, any user slot High speed data, any user slot 4 wire data, any user slot Sub-rate data, any user slot AC or DC power Supplies AC/DC converter Ringing generator Front-Loading Unit Figures Slot-3 and Slot-4 show the front-loading chassis. Designed to maximize the use of space, the front loading chassis has a common bus that allows all cards to be placed in similar slots. The combination slots for this unit are P1-P4 (Communications Server card slots) and W1-W4 (WAN slots). Together, these slots are sometimes referred to as slots U1-U8 (when used for voice, data or alarm cards). Cards have either metal face plates or plastic face plates. Push the cards firmly into the chassis until the face plate touches the chassis. Screw the face plates to the chassis so the cards cannot come loose accidentally. As with the two-sided chassis, the user should always put blank face plates over any slots you are not using. Blank face plates help protect the installed cards from contamination and are an integral part of the air circulation system that keeps the system cool. Also, the blank face plates are required for compliance with UL regulations. Table Slot-2 describes card placement and should be used to determine setup arrangements. (10-97) Page 2-A-3 System Slot Map Reference Guide v3.6 S1 +V-V C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 S2 R C G O R M R1 AC W4 IF Figure Slot-3. Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Side (older model) EUR/US JP1 1 2 3 F1 F2 R1 AC C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 W4 IF R + - - + + - C G VN V A VB O R M Figure Slot-4. Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Side (newer model) Page 2-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Slot Map Table Slot-2. Card Placement: Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Side (10-97) Type of Card CPU Cards Server Cards WAN Cards Interface Card Alarm Cards # of Cards 1-2 1-3 1-4 1 0-7 Slots Used C1-C2 P1-P3 W1-W4 IF P1-4, W1-4 E&M Cards FXO Cards FXS Cards B7R Cards BRI Cards DS0-DP Cards FRAD Cards HSU Cards OCU-DP Cards SRU Cards Main Power (AC/DC) Optional Power Optional Ringer 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 1-2 0-1 0-1 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 P1-4, W1-4 S1-S2 S1-S2 R1 Notes One required in either slot ADPCM Cards One required Required Internal/External, any user slot 2/4 wire voice, any slot 2 wire voice, any slot 2 wire voice, any slot FDL Mux, any slot BRI, any slot 4 wire data, any slot Frame Relay, any slot High speed data, any slot 4 wire data, any slot Sub-rate data, any slot AC or DC power Supplies AC/DC converter Ringing generator Page 2-A-5 System Slot Map Reference Guide v3.6 Front-Loading Chassis—Power Supplies on Top Figure Slot-5 shows the front-loading chassis with the power supplies on top. This chassis has three server card slots (P1-3), four WAN card slots (W1-4), and eight user card slots (U1-8). Slots S1 and S2 can accommodate up to two power supplies, while slots R1-5 can accommodate up to five power converters or ringing generators. Table Slot-3 describes card placement and should be used to determine setup. AC RGR VN +VA + VB +COM R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 S1 S2 EUR/US JP1 C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 1 2 3 W3 W4 IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Figure Slot-5. Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Top Page 2-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Slot Map Table Slot-3. Card Placement: Front-Loading Chassis - Power Supplies on Top Type of Card CPU Cards Server Cards WAN Cards Interface Card Alarm Cards E&M Cards FXO Cards FXS Cards B7R Cards BRI Cards DS0-DP Cards FRAD Cards HSU Cards OCU-DP Cards SRU Cards Main Power (AC/DC) Optional Power Optional Ringer (10-97) # of Cards 1-2 1-3 1-4 1 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 1-2 0-2 0-5 Slots Used C1-C2 P1-P3 W1-W4 IF U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 U1-U8 F1-F2 R1-R5 R1-R5 Notes One required in either slot ADPCM Cards; any slot One required Required Internal/External, any user slot 2-/4-wire voice, any user slot 2-wire voice, any user slot 2-wire voice, any user slot FDL Mux, any user slot BRI, any user slot 4-wire data, any user slot FRAD, any user slot High-speed data, any user slot 4-wire data, any user slot Sub-rate data, any user slot AC or DC power supplies AC/DC converter Ringing generator Page 2-A-7 System Slot Map Reference Guide v3.6 DC Power Supply Fuse The DC power supply fuse is located on the chassis next to the DC external power supply connectors on the front or rear panel (depending on chassis model). This fuse is used to protect any over current on the network voltage (Vn) located on the DC connector panel. Table Slot-4 lists the part numbers of approved replacement fuses. Figure Slot-6 shows the location of the fuse replacement cartridge. Table Slot-4. Replacement Fuses for the DC Power Supply Manufacturer Bussman Littlefuse 250VDC 5A GDC 218005 Replacement Fuse Cartridge AC R + - - + + -C G VN V A VB O R M Figure Slot-6. Replacement Fuse Cartridge on Chassis Page 2-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Introduction The Installation section provides the user with information to unpack and assemble the Integrated Access Controller. The installation checklist on the next page is provided for the experienced user as a road map of installation procedures. This chapter will discuss the unit, power supplies, and different hardware configurations for some of the cards. The physical installation of the cards that make up the system is discussed in the Slotmap chapter. Configuration of these cards is presented in later chapters. Design Plan The installation should be based upon a thoroughly considered, documented design plan. Such a plan assures that the necessary components are on hand to implement the system requirements and that the site can accommodate them. Site Selection and Preparation A site survey should be performed to avoid unforeseen problems. A site survey involves a physical check on key information about a site, including building codes, floor plans, available power, existing wiring and grounding. An integrated access device requires a reasonably dust-free operating environment, such as a computer room or a wiring closet. Do not install the chassis in direct sunlight, which may increase the unit’s temperature and discolor the chassis. You may mount the chassis on a wall or in an equipment rack, or place it on a table or other flat surface. The unit can operate on either AC or DC power when equipped with the proper power supply. Table Install-2 lists the electrical and environmental requirements. The mounting brackets (supplied) are required for table top installations to assure proper airflow in the chassis. The top and bottom of the unit must be clear of any objects. When the chassis is installed in a rack, allow a minimum of 2 inches (1.6 cm) space between the chassis and the equipment above and below the unit for proper ventilation. Caution: The chassis MUST be installed horizontally for proper ventilation and cooling effect. Each customer must provide either space or climate control to assure an ambient temperature less than approximately 40° C for reliable operations. If heat dissipation is a problem, increase the space between rack mounted units or install commercially available “heat baffles” above and below each chassis. A wide variety of system functions and capacities can be supported by various combinations of system cards. Table Install-3 lists the specifications for all components supported by the system in Version 3.6. (10-97) Page 2-B-1 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Checklist Complete and document design plan Perform site survey and preparation Unpack and mount chassis Remove power supply covers (as needed) Install ground connection Install AC or DC power supply Install 115VAC to -48VDC converter (if applicable) Install ringing generator (if applicable) Install CPU Card Configure and install WAN card plug-in modules on WAN card (see Section 5) Install WAN Card Install Interface Card Install all other Cards. Set all jumpers and switches as required before installation. See Table Install-1 and relevant card chapters in this manual. Verify voltages (all power supplies in the chassis) Verify fuse rating Connect VT-100 to Interface Card with cable (see Basic Operations chapter) Replace power supply covers Connect AC power cord or apply DC voltage Verify that power supplies, CPU, and WAN cards come up with green LEDs on Register the system (refer to Basic Operations Chapter) Set Alarm Filters (refer to Basic Operations Chapter) Test Alarm History (remove card - restore card) Configure CPU Card (refer to CPU Card Chapter) Configure WAN Card(s) (refer to WAN Card Chapter) Configure Interface Card (refer to Interface Card Chapter) Configure all other Cards (refer to Individual Card Chapters) Page 2-B-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Table Install-1 Module Switches and Jumpers Card WAN: CSU Module WAN: DSX/CEPT Module WAN: HDSL Plug-in Interface Card Alarm Card Alarm Card E&M Card E&M Card E&M Card E&M Card FXS Card FXS Card FXO Card FXO Card FXO Card FXO Card FXS Coin Card FXO Coin Card HSU Card HSU Card HSU Card HSU Card HSU Card SRU Card OCU-DP OCU-DP OCU-DP OCU-DP OCU-DP DS0-DP Card FRAD Card B7R Card ADPCM Card BRI-U Card Model 812 811 820 8927 8401 8403 8108 8115 8118 8119 8124 8128 8134 8135 8138 8139 8149 8159 8202 8203 8212 8214 8215 8220 8249 8248 8247 8246 845 8254 8231 8228 8871 8260 BRI-U Card 8261 BRI-ST Card 8262 Jumpers or Switches JP1-3 JP1-4 T1/E1, 75 ohm/120 ohm JP2-4 JP1-4 JP1-4 balanced/unbalanced operation Active/Passive Active/Passive SW1-4 SW1-4 SW1-4 SW1-4 GND/BAT options GND/BAT options GND/BAT options GND/BAT options P1-8: JP1,2 P1-8: JP1,2 P1-8: JP1,2 P1-8: JP1, 2 MRD option MRD option MRD option MRD option P 1, 2 switch JP2 RS530/V.35 IF option JP1-JP2 P 1-4 switch JP2, JP3, JP9 JP3-JP4 JP1-JP7 JP1-JP7 JP1 Options RS530/V.35 IF option JP1, JP3 JP1, JP2, JP9 JP1, JP2, JP9, JP101 JP602 J101-801 J102-802 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6, JP101 - JP804 LT/NT option 7.5/15 ma sealing current Table Install-2. Electrical and Environmental Requirements Parameter AC Power (110VAC) AC Power (220VAC) DC Power (-48VDC) DC Power (+24VDC) Power consumption Temperature (operating) Temperature (storage) Humidity (10-97) Requirement 90/135VAC 50/60Hz 175/264VAC 50/60Hz -35/-60VDC +18/+32VDC 125W (typical) 0° to 50° C, 32° to 122° F -20° to 80° C, -4° to 176° F 0% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing Page 2-B-3 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Table Install-3. Physical Specifications Height Item Width Depth Weight Power Model inches cm inches cm inches cm lb Kg Watt BTU/hr System Unit 8916 9.0 22.9 17 43.2 9.13 23.2 8.5 3.96 -- -- System Unit 8918 9.0 22.9 17 43.2 15.38 39.0 11.0 5.0 -- -- System Unit 8919 9.0 22.9 17 43.2 AC Power Supply 8901 5.62 14.3 2.13 5.4 8.13 20.6 1.67 .76 -- -- -48VDC Power Supply 8902 5.62 14.3 3 7.6 8.13 20.6 1.75 .80 -- -- 24VDC Power Supply 8907 5.62 14.3 3 7.6 8.13 20.6 1.75 .80 -- -- AC/DC Converter 8903 5.62 14.3 2.75 7.0 8.13 20.6 2.0 .91 -- -- Power Converter 8905 5.62 14.3 2.75 7.0 8.13 20.6 2.0 .91 Ringing Generator 8906 5.62 14.3 1.38 3.5 6.0 15.2 1.5 .68 -- -- CPU Card 8800 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 1.4 4.78 CPU Card 8801 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 1 3.41 CPU Card 8804 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 1.4 4.78 WAN Card 8000 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 1.1 3.75 WAN Card 8010 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 1.5 5.12 WAN Card (HDSL) 8011 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 WAN Card 8014 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .75 .32 2 6.83 CSU Module 812 3.69 9.37 2.13 5.4 .38 .95 .062 .028 0.25 0.85 DSX/CEPT Module 811 3.63 9.22 2.06 5.2 .50 1.27 .062 .028 0.45 1.54 HDSL Plug-in 820 Interface Card 8920 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 0.6 2.05 Interface Card 8921 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 Interface Card 8925 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 0.15 0.51 Interface Card 8926 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 0.2 0.68 Interface Card 8927 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 0.18 0.62 Alarm Card 8401 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 0.4 1.37 E&M Card 8108 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 3.4 11.61 E&M Card 8115 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 1.75 5.97 E&M Card 8118 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 3.4 11.61 E&M Card 8119 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 3.5 11.94 E&M Card 8115 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 FXO Card 8134 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.25 .57 3.5 11.94 FXO Card 8135 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.25 .57 3.5 11.94 FXO Card 8138 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.25 .57 7 23.9 FXO Card 8139 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.25 .57 7 23.9 FXS Card 8124 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 4.85 16.54 FXS Card 8125 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 4.85 16.54 FXS Card 8128 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 9.7 33.12 FXS Card 8129 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 9.7 33.12 FXS Coin Card 8149 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 9.7 33.12 FXO Coin Card 8159 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 9.7 33.12 SRU Card 8220 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 4.6 15.7 FRAD Card 8231 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 HSU Card 8202 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 3.4 11.61 HSU Card 8203 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 HSU Card 8212 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 2.5 8.54 HSU Card 8214 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 2.5 8.54 HSU Card 8215 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 3.5 11.94 OCU-DP 8249 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 2.4 8.2 OCU-DP 8248 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 5.1 17.41 19.0 1.0 .45 5.1 17.41 OCU-DP 8247 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 OCU-DP 10-Port 8246 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 OCU-DP 845 8.0 20.3 .5 6.25 15.9 .75 .32 5.1 17.41 DS0-DP Card 8254 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 3.1 10.58 ADPCM Card 8871 8.0 20.3 B7R Card 8228 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 .5 .23 4.6 15.7 BRI-U Card 8260 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 1.0 .45 6.3 21.48 BRI-U Card 8261 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 BRI-ST Card 8262 8.0 20.3 .94 2.4 7.5 19.0 Page 2-B-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Unpacking and Mounting the Chassis When you receive the system, unpack the boxes and check the chassis and cards for damage. If any part of the unit is damaged, contact the shipping company to file a claim. The shipping company representative will also tell you how to submit a claim, where to send the unit, and give you any special instructions you may need. Pack the unit in the original packing materials and send it by prepaid freight to the address you received. If the original packing materials are unavailable, pack the unit in a sturdy box and surround it with shock-absorbing material. The front and back of the two-sided unit must be accessible for inserting cards. Voice, data, WAN, and power cables are also attached to connectors at the rear of the chassis. The front-loading model of the Integrated Access Controller does not need access to the back side of the unit. Table Install-4 lists the minimum clearances between the equipment and the nearest object for rack-mounted, wall-mounted or table-top installations. Table Install-4. Minimum Rack and Wall-Mount Clearances Clearance Front 10 25 * required for the two-sided chassis only Back* 15 38 Inches Centimeters Top 2 5 Bottom 2 5 Two-Sided Chassis The 891822 and 891823 two-sided chassis have twelve holes on each side of the chassis (see Figure Install-1). These holes facilitate mounting the unit in any standard EIA 19or 23-inch rack (48.2 or 58.4 cm). The two holes on the bottom of the unit (t) can be used for mounting on a table or other flat surface. Top F r o n t B a c k t t Bottom Figure Install-1. Mounting Holes (2-Sided Chassis) (10-97) Page 2-B-5 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Front-Loading Chassis (Power Supplies on Side) The 8916 chassis has seven holes on each side of the chassis (as shown in Figure Install-2). These holes can be used to mount the unit in any standard EIA 19- or 23inch rack (48.2 or 58.4 cm). The two holes on the bottom of the unit (t) can be used for mounting on a table or other flat surface. Top F r o n t B a c k t t Bottom Figure Install-2. Mounting Holes (8916 Front-Loading Chassis) The 891620 chassis has eight holes on each side of the chassis (as shown in Figure Install-3). These holes can be used to mount the unit in any standard EIA 19- or 23inch rack (48.2 or 58.4 cm). The two holes on the bottom of the unit (t) can be used for mounting on a table or other flat surface. Top F r o n t B a c k t t Bottom Figure Install-3. Mounting Holes (891620 Front-Loading Chassis) Page 2-B-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Front-Loading Chassis (Power Supplies on Top) The 891920 chassis has eight holes on each side of the chassis (as shown in Figure Install-4). These holes can be used to mount the unit in any standard EIA 19- or 23inch rack (48.2 or 58.4 cm). The two holes on the bottom of the unit (t) can be used for mounting on a table or other flat surface. Top F r o n t B a c k t t Bottom Figure Install-4. Mounting Holes (Front-Loading Chassis, Power Supplies on Top) (10-97) Page 2-B-7 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Mounting the Chassis To mount the chassis to the rack, attach the metal brackets (see Figure Install-5) to the sides of the chassis with the four 10-32x1/4 screws (brackets and all screws provided in the installation pack). Four 12-24x1/2 screws are needed to attach the chassis to the rack. The brackets are reversible to allow mounting in 19- or 23-inch racks (48.2 or 58.4 cm). You can attach the brackets using holes at the front of the chassis, back of the chassis or near the middle. If you mount the brackets in the middle of the chassis, you can reduce the amount of space required behind it for cables. However, the front and the back must be accessible to insert and remove cards. To attach the unit to the wall, use the template of the hole pattern (provided) and copy to a backboard. The backboard should be 1/2" to 3/4" construction grade plywood. Attach the unit with the 4-10x5/8 screws provided. The wall mount position must be with the power supplies closest to the wall. If you are placing the unit on a tabletop or other hard surface, it is mandatory to assure clearance for proper airflow in the chassis. Make sure the chassis is accessible from the front, and has at least 3/4 inches (2 cm) clearance above the chassis. The metal brackets (see Figure Install-5) should be attached to provide the additional clearance needed for attaching cables to the user cards for both the two-sided and front-loading systems. Attach the brackets to the side of the chassis using the two (t) holes. Place the plastic abrasion-protective inserts ("feet") in the holes provided near the ends of the bottom of the bracket. Key: Oval Holes for Rack Attachment Round Holes for Rack Attachment Holes for Tabletop Attachment Holes for Plastic Inserts ("Feet") Figure Install-5. Hole Pattern on the Mounting Bracket Page 2-B-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Power Supply and Ringing Generator System The power supply and ringing generator system can consist of up to two power supplies, two AC to DC converters and up to four ringing generators. External -48VDC talk battery and external ringing generators may be used instead of the internal units. Use the following guidelines to determine your power supply and ringing generator requirements. System Power The system will always require one of the following power supplies: Ø AC (8901) Ø -48VDC (8902) Ø +24VDC (8907) Even though the 8907 power supply has specifications listed as negative throughout this manual, it can be used with positive voltage (+24VDC). Because of the extremely small number of applications that would require it, the conversion procedure is not covered in this manual. If you are considering using +24VDC, please call the customer service number listed in the Preface. For backup, you may add a second power supply (see Preface for specific UL requirements when adding a redundant power supply). Redundant power supplies are not load-sharing. -48VDC Talk Battery In addition to the power supplies, a -48 VDC talk battery is required whenever there are analog voice cards present in the system unless all of those are E&M ports and are used in Transmission Only (TO) mode, or when Type 1 signaling is used. A -48VDC power source is also required for use with: Ø External Alarm card Ø OCU-DP card Ø BRI card (to provide sealing current) If the unit is powered by the AC (8901) supply, either the 8903 Internal 115VAC to -48VDC or 8905 120/240VAC to -48VDC Converter or an external source will be required for the -48VDC talk battery. The 8903 AC to DC converter is available only for 115VAC sources. Use 8905 for 220 VAC locations. Ringing Generators Ringing generators are required whenever there are FXS cards in the unit or if any FXO ports are used in Manual Ringdown (MRD) mode. Ringing voltage may be provided from an external source or by using the 8906 Ringing Generator. The 8906 requires a -48VDC source in the system. Customers having the older 8904 Ringing Generator may still use it. (10-97) Page 2-B-9 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Warning: The 8904 must never be used in the same system with an 8906 ringing generator. Warning: The 8904 and 8906 ringing generators are incompatible with external ringing devices. The 8904 provides ringing voltage of 105VAC (nominal) at 20 Hz for 11 simultaneously ringing voice ports, while the 8906 provides ringing voltage of 100VAC for the same number of ports. With normal call activity, a single ringing generator might provide all of the power necessary to run the system. In a group where incoming calls are at a minimum, 30-50 stations could share the same ringing generator. Small groups with heavy incoming call volumes might require two or more ringing generators. This card will not “quit” with a heavy load, it will just have weaker and slower ringing abilities. That condition should alert you to the need for additional equipment. The compatibility of power sources and ringing generators that can be used together are summarized in Table Install-5. Table Install-5. Power Supply Options Compatibility Table Power Sources AC (8901) -48VDC (8902) Converter (8903) Converter (8905) Ringer (8906) +24VD C (8907) -48VDC External Ringer External Ringer (8904) AC (8901) --- yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -48VDC (8902) Converter (8903) Converter (8905) Ringer (8906) +24VDC (8907) -48VDC External Ringer External Ringer (8904) yes --- no no yes no yes yes yes yes no --- yes yes no no yes yes yes no yes --- yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes --- no yes NO NO yes no no no no --- no yes yes yes yes no no yes no --- yes yes yes yes yes yes NO yes yes --- NO yes yes yes yes NO yes yes NO – US/Europe Jumper Prior to inserting any cards and powering up the chassis, jumper JP1 on the 891620, 891822/23, and 891920 chassis must be set to US or European configuration. The jumper is located on the resource card backplane, and is accessible from the chassis front. The default setting is US. The resource cards must also have the jumper set consistent with the chassis. See the Slot Map chapter for more detailed information on this feature. EUR/US JP1 Page 2-B-10 1 2 3 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Chassis Grounding ! ! ! PLEASE READ—IMPORTANT ! ! ! Ø When using any CPU revision B or C in a six-digit chassis as depicted in figures Install-6 through Install-9, or in a four-digit chassis as depicted in figure Install-10 with a voice ringer card installed, the chassis must be properly grounded to ensure reliable operation. × In order to identify which CPU you have, you must either visually look at the white sticker that has been placed on the back of the mainboard. It indicates the type and revision of CPU that is being installed. If you do not have revision B or C CPU’s as stated above, then please disregard this notice. To ensure proper operation in a chassis with an external power connector like those shown below, it is crucial that each chassis is properly grounded. This section details grounding procedures for each type of chassis. This information presumes that the operator and/or installer has some knowledge of grounding issues. Please refer to Field Alert Bulletin 108-000004 for a top level grounding tutorial. The chassis ground is usually connected to the earth ground directly (using the chassis ground screw) or via the power cord. ) and In order to minimize electrical potential between grounds, chassis ground ( common signal ground (COM) in the terminal power connector should be connected with a jumper wire or bridge. Improper grounding may cause a difference in electrical potential between the chassis and the terminal equipment, which could damage the cards, the terminal equipment, or both. IF YOU ARE UNCLEAR ABOUT STANDARD GROUNDING PROCEDURES, PLEASE CONSULT WITH YOUR NETWORK ADMINISTRATOR. (10-97) Page 2-B-11 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Side Figure Install-6 details the possible ground connections for the external power connector of the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the side. POWER CONNECTIONS R G VN R + - C VA VB O - + + - M 48 VDC PSU AC* third wire* ground -48VDC Return + -48 VDC Supply AC PLUG Optional Telecom Ground (Note: Optional Telecom Ground Connection: It may be required when the 48VDC PSU output is not grounded or when the system is AC powered. It is only needed for the proper operation of the Telecom Ground Start and E&M signaling circuits. For Additional information please refer to Field Alert Bulletin 108-000001). Figure Install-6. Ground Connections (Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Side) Page 2-B-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Two-Sided Chassis Figure Install-7 details the possible ground connections for the external power connector of the two-sided chassis. POWER CONNECTIONS R G VN R + - C VA VB O - + + - M 48 VDC PSU AC* third wire* ground - -48VDC Return + -48 VDC Supply AC PLUG Optional Telecom Ground (Note: on Optional Telecom Ground Connection: It may be required when the 48VDC PSU output is not grounded or when the system is AC powered. It is only needed for the proper operation of the Telecom Ground Start and E&M signaling circuits. For Additional information please refer to Field Alert Bulletin 108-000001). Figure Install-7. Ground Connections (Two-Sided Chassis) (10-97) Page 2-B-13 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Top Figure Install-8 details the possible ground connections for the external power connector of the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the top. POWER CONNECTIONS 48 VDC PSU RGR AC* third wire* ground - -48 VDC Supply + -48VDC Return +V N VA + +V B - AC PLUG COM Optional Telecom Ground (Note: on Optional Telecom Ground Connection: It may be required when the 48VDC PSU output is not grounded or when the system is AC powered. It is only needed for the proper operation of the Telecom Ground Start and E&M signaling circuits. For Additional information please refer to Field Alert Bulletin 108-000001). Figure Install-8. Ground Connections (Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Top) Page 2-B-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Grounding Four-Digit Chassis The front-loading chassis (revision C1 or greater) has a terminal block connector near the AC power connection and main power fuse, as shown in Figure Install-9. +V -V R C G O R M Figure Install-9. Chassis External Power Connector (rev. C1+) As with the six-digit chassis, this chassis must be properly grounded for reliable operations and safety. This is accomplished by strapping the common ground ), as shown in Figure Install-10 connector (COM) to the earth ground connector ( below. POWER CONNECTIONS R C G O +V -V R M 48 VDC PSU AC* third wire* ground - -48VDC Return + -48 VDC Supply AC PLUG Optional Telecom Ground (Note: on Optional Telecom Ground Connection: It may be required when the 48VDC PSU output is not grounded or when the system is AC powered. It is only needed for the proper operation of the Telecom Ground Start and E&M signaling circuits. For Additional information please refer to Field Alert Bulletin 108-000001). Figure Install-10. Chassis Ground Connections (Front-Loading Chassis: Power Supplies on Side). (10-97) Page 2-B-15 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Installing the AC Power Supply (8901) To install the AC Power Supply proceed with the following steps. Table Install-6 lists the power supply specifications. 1. Remove the panel covering the front power slots. You may insert or remove the power supply module while power is on or off. 2. Hold the power supply by its metal handle and align the printed circuit board (PCB) edges with the rail guides of either power supply slot (F1 or F2 for two-sided systems, S1 or S2 for front loading systems). Push the module in until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector and replace the panel that covers the front power supply slots. Table Install-6. AC Power Supply Specifications Parameter Rating 50W 70W (10% duty cycle) 1.7A at 120VAC 60Hz full rated output load 3A max 3.7A peak at 240VAC cold start 47-63Hz min 65% UL, FCC, CSA Output Power Continuous Output Power Peak (60 sec) Input Current (maximum) Source Input Current (maximum) Inrush Surge Current Input Frequency Efficiency Approvals Installing the DC Power Supply (8902 or 8907) Table Install-7 lists specifications for the 8902 (-48VDC) and 8907 (+24VDC) power supplies. Table Install-7. DC Power Supply Specifications Parameter Output Power Input Power Source Input Current (Max) Approvals 8902 Rating 50W continuous -35 to -60VDC 3A UL, FCC, CSA 8907 Rating 50W continuous +18 to +32VDC 5A UL, FCC, CSA Perform the following steps to install: Page 2-B-16 1. Remove the panel covering the front power slots. You may insert or remove the power supply module while power is on or off. 2. Hold the power supply by its metal handle and align the PCB edges with the rail guides of either power supply slot (F1 or F2 for two-sided systems, S1 or S2 for front loading systems). Push the module in until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector, and replace the panel that covers the front power supply slots. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation External Power Connector 8916 Chassis Power Connector A terminal block connector is attached to the 8916 chassis near the AC power connection and main power fuse. Figure Install-11 shows the connector. +V -V R C G O R M Figure Install-11. 8916 External Power Connector (rev. C1+) Six Phillips-head screws are attached to the terminal block on the chassis. The two end screws anchor the connector to the chassis, and the one on the left acts as the chassis ground. The other screws are used to connect power wires from other sources. The "+V" screw is used for power return. The "RGR" screw is used for an external ringer. Wiring should be done according to a wiring plan that takes into account the size of the wire, type of insulation, length of the wire and environmental conditions of the installation site. All wires should be secured according to local requirements. A 14 gauge ground wire less than 20 feet in length is recommended. The Common and Ground terminals may need to be strapped together. All connections should be made using insulated ring terminals like the one shown in Figure Install-12. .300 inch (3.4 cm) Size 6 Figure Install-12. Ring Terminal (insulated) Specifications 891620 Chassis Power Connector The power connector blocks are the same for all chassis with six-digit product numbers. Diagrams of these chassis that display the placement of the power connector block can be found in the Slot Map chapter. (10-97) Page 2-B-17 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Grounds and power feeds are connected to the power connector block by inserting and fastening the wires in the proper slot. The screw adjacent to each slot can be loosened or tightened to secure the connection. For safety reasons, no more than one-eighth of an inch (0.125") of the connecting wire should be exposed. No uninsulated wire should be visible from the power connector block. Figure Install-13 shows the power connector block for the 891620. This block provides for dual power connections at VA and VB where redundant power feeds are required. Connection VA feeds power supply slot F1. Connection VB feeds power supply slot F2. In addition, VN can be connected to a -48v source for powering voice cards and circuits. The COM (common) is used for signal reference. RGR (ringer) connection is used when an external ringer is connected to the chassis. Ringer bias is selected by the connection to VN+ or VN-. Note: If -48vdc is applied to VA or VB DO NOT connect external power to VN R + G VN R - + + VA VB C O M Figure Install-13. 891620 Terminal Power Connector 891822/891823 Chassis Power Connector Figure Install-14 shows the power connector block for the 891822 and 891823. This block provides for dual power connections at VA and VB where redundant power feeds are required. Connection VA feeds power supply slot F1. Connection VB feeds slot F2. In addition, VN can be connected to a -48v source for powering voice cards and circuits. The COM (common) is used for signal reference. RGR (ringer) connection is used when an external ringer is connected to the chassis. Ringer bias is selected by the connection to VN+ or VN-. Note: If -48vdc is applied to VA or VB DO NOT connect external power to VN R + G VN R - + + VA VB C O M Figure Install-14. 891822/891823 Terminal Power Connector 891920 Chassis Power Connector Figure Install-15 shows the power connector block for the 891920. This block provides for dual power connections at VA and VB where redundant power feeds are required. Connection VA feeds power supply slot F1. Connection VB feeds power supply slot F2. Page 2-B-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation In addition, VN can be connected to a -48v source for powering voice cards and circuits. The COM (common) is used for signal reference. RGR (ringer) connection is used when an external ringer is connected to the chassis. Ringer bias is selected by the connection to VN+ or VN-. Note: If -48vdc is applied to VA or VB DO NOT connect external power to VN RGR VN VA + - + + VB COM Figure Install-15. 891920 Terminal Power Connector Installing the 115VAC to -48VDC Converter (8903, 8905 and 8908) Do not install the 8903 if the unit is connected to an external -48VDC power source. (10-97) 1. For the two-sided chassis, remove the panel covering the rear power slots. Install the module in any of the five rear slots while power is on or off. For the front-loading chassis, remove the panel covering the front power slots. Install the module in slot S1 or S2 while power is on or off. 2. Hold the converter by the metal handle and align the PCB edges with the slot rail guides in the power supply cage. Gently push the module in until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 3. When the power supply is installed and the power is on, the green LED on the front panel of the converter should be on. If the LED goes off, something is wrong. Check that the supply is properly seated in the connector and replace the panel that covers the power slots. Page 2-B-19 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Table Install-8. AC to DC Converter Specifications Parameter Output Power Output Voltage Output Current Hold Up Time Input Voltage Frequency Efficiency Heat Dissipation Approvals Rating 75 Watt Max -48VDC 1.5A DC 20 mSec minimum at full load and 117VAC input 90-135VAC 110VAC=60Hz 0.83 55 BTU per hour UL, FCC, CSA Fuse - 1.5 A 250V Power Bus Edge Handle Connector Figure Install-16. AC-to-DC Converter Layout Page 2-B-20 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation Installing the Ringing Generator (8904 or 8906) The 8904 provides ringing voltage of 105VAC (nominal) at 20 Hz for 11 simultaneously ringing voice ports, while the 8906 provides ringing voltage of 100VAC (nominal) for the same number of ports. If more than one ringing generator is required in the same chassis, they must have the same part number. The 8904 and 8906 Ringing Generators cannot be mixed in a single chassis. Note: Ringing Generator 8904 is a discontinued product. If you are in need of Technical Assistance, please contact Product Support at (510) 353-7686. Ensure that the system has a -48VDC power source before installing either of the modules. You may install up to four (4) ringing generators on the two-sided chassis depending upon availability of slots. The front-loading system with the power supplies on the side can have only one ringing generator. The outputs of all ringing generators are linked together by OR circuits on the ringing bus. In cases where more than one generator is installed, one must be jumpered as MASTER and the others must be jumpered as SLAVE. The master ringing generator will synchronize the ringing signals on the ringing bus. (For more information on configuring the MASTER/SLAVE jumpers, please see the diagrams of the 8904 and 8906 later in this chapter.) Table Install-9 lists the specifications for the 8904 and the 8906. Table Install-9. Ringing Generator Specifications (10-97) Parameter 8904 Rating 8906 Rating Input Power 44-56VDC 45-56VDC Input Current 70mA no load, 350mA full load 250mA RMS Efficiency 0.6 0.6 Heat Dissipation 25 BTU per hour 12 BTU per hour Output Power 10W 30W@56V 25W @48V 22.5W@45V Output Voltage 105VAC 100VAC Output Current 100mA 250mA Output Frequency 20Hz 20Hz Distortion <3% <3% Approvals UL, CSA UL (pending) Page 2-B-21 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 To install the 8904 Ringing Generator: 1. Be sure that power is off before inserting or removing the 8904 ringing generator. 2. For the two-sided chassis, remove the panel covering the rear power slots. You may install the module in any of the five rear slots. For the frontloading chassis, remove the panel covering the front power slots. Install the module in slot R1 only. 3. Make sure that jumper W201 is installed if this is the only 8904 ringing generator in the unit, or if it is the MASTER ringing generator (see Figure Install-17). 4. Remove jumper W201 if this is a SLAVE ringing generator. Remove the jumper by cutting it with wire cutters. 5. Hold the ringing generator by the metal handle and align the PCB edges with the slot rail guides in the power supply backplane. Gently push the module in until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 6. When the supply is installed and power is on, the LED on the rear panel of the ringing generator should flicker at a rate of 20 times per second. If this LED is not flickering, something is wrong. Check that the Master/Slave settings are correct and that the module is firmly seated in the connector. 5. Replace the panel that covers the rear power slots. Fuse - 1.0A 250V Power Bus Edge Connector W201 Master/Slave Jumper (remove if using as slave) Figure Install-17. 8904 Ringing Generator Layout Page 2-B-22 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Installation To Install the 8906 Ringing Generator: 1. You must make sure that power is off before inserting or removing the ringing generator. 2. For the two-sided chassis, remove the panel covering the rear power slots. You may insert or remove the module in any of the five rear slots. For the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the top, remove the panel covering the front power slots, and insert or remove the module in any of the five slots. For the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the side, you may insert or remove the module in slot R1 only. 3. The JP1 jumper is factory-preset to the MASTER configuration (see Figure Install-18). You do not need to change this jumper if this is the MASTER ringing generator, or the only ringing generator in the system. If this is a SLAVE ringing generator, move the jumper on JP1 from the lower pins (MASTER) to the upper pins (SLAVE). 4. Hold the ringing generator by the metal handle and align the PCB edges with the slot rail guides in the power supply backplane. Gently push the module in until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 5. When the supply is installed and power is on, the LED on the rear panel of the ringing generator should flicker at a rate of 20 times per second. A problem is indicated if this LED is not flickering,. Check that the Master/Slave settings are correct and that the module is firmly seated in the connector. 6. Replace the panel cover. JP1 Slave Master Power Bus Edge Connector Master/Slave Jumper Figure Install-18. 8906 Ringing Generator Layout (10-97) Page 2-B-23 Installation Reference Guide v3.6 Connecting AC Power Attach the AC power source to the system at the AC power socket. This socket accommodates the standard 3-prong molded power cord supplied with the system. Secure the power cord to the rack or cabinet for strain relief and route it down to the bottom of the chassis. Using Amphenol Connectors Many of the cables used to connect cards in the Integrated Access Controller to wiring devices use Amphenol connectors at either one or both ends of the cable. The traditional Amphenol connector placed the connector at a right angle to the cable itself, (see Figure Install-19) thus preventing the screw at the bottom of the connector from being properly attached without removing the hood. This type of cable connector is not recommended for use with this system. Amphenol Cable Figure Install-19. Undesirable Amphenol Connectors Newly designed cables mount the Amphenol connector at a 25° angle to the cable and use screws that can be twisted by fingertips to attach the connector from both the top and the bottom. Other types of cables mount the connector at a 90° angle (see Figure Install-20). It is suggested that cables of this design be used with the cards in your system. Amphenol Amphenol Cable Amphenol Cable Figure Install-20. Preferred Amphenol Connectors Page 2-B-24 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Terminal Interface The system is controlled through a serial interface to a VT-100 terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program. Connect the terminal or selected PC COM port to the Interface card TERM jack. Set the terminal’s communications parameters as follows: 9.6 kbps; 8 data bits; no parity; 1 stop bit. Logging On When both the system and your terminal are on, the log-on screen shown in Figure Basic-1 will normally appear. If the screen stays blank after 30 seconds, press thekey to display the screen. If the screen remains blank, check your terminal settings and connections. (For remote log-on procedures, see the Interface Card chapter.) When the system is started for the first time after initial installation, you will see the Registration screen. See the Registration section later in this chapter for instructions. If new system firmware or a different type of CPU has been installed, you will be asked to “Zip” the system. For instructions check “Reinitializing the System” later in this chapter. Node_1 31 | | 12- IMACS Integrated Multiple Access Communications Server Copyright (C) Premisys Communications Inc 1991-1996 Password: Node: Version: Node_1 3.6x Figure Basic-1. The Log-On Screen (10-97) Page 2-C-1 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 The initial Log-On passwords correspond to one of four access level names. For example, the manager access level has the preset password Manager. Passwords are case-sensitive. See Table Basic-1 for a listing of all passwords and access levels. For procedures used to change passwords, see the CPU Card chapter later in this guide. Table Basic-1. Access Levels Access Level Superuser Manager Operator Viewer Initial Password ********* Manager Operator Viewer Description Special access for maintenance and diagnostics, to be used as directed by a certified technician. Full access to all configuration options, diagnostic features and password management. Read/write access to configuration and diagnostic features. Read-only access to configuration and diagnostic features. If you are configuring the system for the first time, log in as “Manager.” If you are maintaining the system after its initial configuration, the password has probably changed from "Manager;" consult your network administrator for the current password. Type the password and press the key to display the main screen for your system. Page 2-C-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Registration When the system is started for the first time, the registration screen will appear. Answer the questions shown at the bottom of the screen, and the system will automatically respond with the correct application parameters and prompts. The registration procedure consists of the three steps shown below. Node_1 | 1. Enter the vendor code. If no other vendor code is specified, enter the vendor code 101. 2. Select the type of chassis used (either front-loading with power supplies on the side, front-loading with power supplies on top, or the two-sided chassis). 3. Confirm the proposed changes by selecting (Y for yes or N for no). Figure Basic-2 shows the completed Registration screen. Welcome to Registration Vendor Code: | 12-31-99 14:33 101 1. Front - Loading Only / Power Supplies on side 2. Front - Loading Only / Power Supplies on top 3. Front & Rear Loading Only / Power Supplies on side Select one: 3 Is the Information on this screen correct (Y/N)? Figure Basic-2. Screen Layout (10-97) Page 2-C-3 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Main Screens After login you will see one of the two following screens: Figure Basic-3 shows the main screen for a front-and-rear loading Integrated Access Controller; Figure Basic-4 shows the main screen for a front-loading only system. Depending on the number of cards installed in your system, your screen may show more or fewer cards than seen in these figures. For consistency and simplicity hereafter, this manual shows only screens for the front-and-rear loading Integrated Access Controller. Node_1 14:33 | Slot Installed C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 CPU XCON CPU XCON ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 PS2 | Status RDNT Slot Installed IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 RI INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 FRAD-18 SRU-232x10 RINGER 12-31-99 Status Alarms | Config| Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | sEr | Oos | cpusWtch Figure Basic-3. Main Screen for Front-and-Rear Loading System Page 2-C-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 Basic Operations | | Slot Installed C1 C2 P1/U1 P2/U2 P3/U3 P4/U4 W1/U5 W2/U6 W3/U7 W4/U8 IF S1 S2 S3 RI CPU XCON CPU XCON HSU-366x2 ADPCM-64 ALR SRU-232x10 CSU+CSU B7R-8 OCU-DPx2 BRI U-IFx8 INTF+modem 12-31-99 14:33 Status RDNT RINGER Alarms | Config| Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | sEr | Oos | cpusWtch Figure Basic-4. Main Screen for Front-Loading Only System (10-97) Page 2-C-5 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Introduction to Screens After you have determined configuration requirements, you can log on and set the cards to implement a custom network design. For each card, the system presents a screen that shows the options and allows you to set them. All screens have the same general layout, as shown in Figure Basic-5. Node_1 | IF INTF+modem PRIMARY CLK EXT RATE EXT FORMAT EXT FRAME 1 int n/a n/a n/a SECONDARY CLK EXT RATE EXT FORMAT EXT FRAME int n/a n/a n/a CURRENT CLK int int 8923 Rev A2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 14:33 OOS U3 ext Save | Undo | Refresh | Time | ACO | proFiles | taBs | Ports | Main Figure Basic-5. Screen Layout Page 2-C-6 • The dark line at the top of the card is the Header Information Line. This line lists the node identity (“Node_1” in the figure above), card identity, time, and date. • The small dark area in the upper right, immediately below the header, displays alarm summary information. In this example, the alarm reveals an Out of Service (OOS) card in slot U-3. If no alarms are active, nothing will be displayed in this location. • The area just below the node ID is the Parameter Settings section of the screen. This section displays current or default settings from the range of user options available on each card. • The Status and Data Entry Change Line is located near the bottom of the card on the left-hand side. This line allows the user to select the options for each parameter. • The dark line at the bottom of the screen displays the Menu of Actions. Each action contains one capitalized letter. Press the capitalized letter of an action on the keyboard to perform the described action. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations It is very important that you record the configuration information for each card as you determine its settings. You, or someone servicing the system at a later date, will need this information to aid in troubleshooting. A simple way to record your configuration is to photocopy the setting tables in the card sections of this guide and write the information for your configuration in the column labeled Initial Setting. Store these pages in a safe place, where they can be available to anyone servicing the system. Status Screen A quick way to check activity of the ports of all system cards is to use the Status screen. Figure Basic-6 shows the Status screen. The lowercase letters that follow card entries show the status of each port on the cards. The possible values are "s" (Standby), "a" (Active), "t" (Test), "l" (Loopback) and "r" (Redundant). Node_1 14:33 Slot C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 | Installed CPU XCON CPU XCON ISDN-PRI ADPCM-64 INV MUX CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 PS2 | 12-31-99 Status RDNT ssssssss ssssssss ssss ss rr ss rr Slot IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 RI Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 FRAD-18 SRU-232x10 RINGER Status ssss ssssssss ssssssss ssssssss ss sssss ssssssss ssssssssss Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos| cpusWtch Figure Basic-6. The Status Screen Pressing the “s” key again will return the screen without status settings. If the system is restarted by log-off/log-on activity or loss of power, the screen will also return to its normal condition. (10-97) Page 2-C-7 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Configuring the Cards The main screen lists all the installed cards next to their slot numbers. To access the screen for each card, move the cursor using the arrow keys to highlight the card and press the key. Use the arrow keys and the key to move around on the screens. When changing card parameters, some settings require you to enter values, while others allow you to select from a list of possible options. When a list of possible options is available, use the right and left arrow keys to move through the options. Use the key to select the setting under the cursor. Use the right and left arrow keys to select the option you want or type over the old value using the keyboard. Press the key to select the option or enter the value. After all choices are made, save your changes by pressing “s.” To access the menu of actions at the bottom of the screen, make sure no option is selected and then press the capitalized letter that represents the action you want. Menu of Actions Table Basic-2 show the Menu of Actions for the Main Screen. Table Basic-2. Main Screen Menu of Actions Action Alarms Config Del accepT Xcon sYs Logout sEr Oos cpusWtch Function Brings up the Alarm screen. Refer to "Alarms" later in this chapter. Sets up the system using a standard configuration. Refer to "Using the Configuration Option" later in the System Operations Chapter. Removes an OOS card from system memory. Removes card settings. Used when replacing a card in one slot with a different kind of card (see below). Brings up the cross-connect screens. See System Operations chapter. Brings up the system screen. Provides for high-level system testing and maintenance. Logs the user off the system. (serialization) Identify the card in a given slot Set the card out of service Switches from the active CPU to the redundant CPU card. See Redundancy chapter. Configure each card to match the system settings previously determined. On the main screen, select each card in turn and change the options for that card as appropriate. Select the Save action after making all the changes for a card; then return to the main screen to configure the next card. Once configured, card settings (by slot) are permanently stored in the NVRAM on the Interface Card. Similar cards may be replaced without having to reconfigure the new card. If you replace the card with a different type of card, the system will ask if you want to lose the current card settings. Press “t” (accepT) to allow this transaction. Page 2-C-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Alarms Alarms warn you of problems and alert you to possible hardware or facility failures. The Alarm sub-screens are accessed from the main screen by pressing the "A" key. The Alarm screen displays the currently active alarms, if any, and provides access to the Alarm Filters screen and the Alarm History screen. Figure Basic-7 shows the Alarm screen with one active alarm. Node_1 | Active Alarms: 1 00023 W1-1 | 12-31-99 14:33 Page 1 of 1 CSU+CSU C CGA_RED 12-31-99 12:41:21 Refresh | pgUp | pgDn | History | Filters | Main Figure Basic-7. The Alarm Screen The first entry shows the Alarm Number (a sequential number from one to 65,535) used to identify the alarm for tracking and maintenance (in this case, #00023). The second entry shows the location of the problem by card slot number (in this case, w1-1). The third column shows the type of card affected (in this case, a WAN card with two CSU modules). The fourth entry shows the alarm modifier (in this case, C [critical]). See a later section in this chapter for more information about alarm modifiers. The fifth entry shows the type of alarm generated (in this case, CGA_RED). The sixth entry shows the date of the alarm and the last entry shows the time the alarm was logged (in this case, 12-31-99 at 12:41:21). (10-97) Page 2-C-9 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Filters You can set filters for each alarm so that the alarm reports occurrences in a number of different ways. Figure Basic-8 shows the Alarm Filters screen accessed by pressing "F" on the main Alarm screen. Node_1 OOS NOS LOS YEL AIS CGA_RED CGA_YEL EER SENSOR DCHAN SWITCH UCA RESET ACO SYNC EER-3 PLC_OOF PLC_LOF PLC_YEL | | 12-31-99 Out of Service No Signal Loss of Sync Yellow Alarm Alarm Info Signal Carrier Group–Red Carrier Group–Yellow Excessive Error Rate Alarm card sensor D-chan out of service Switch to redundant card User card/port alarm System reset Alarm Cut-Off Clock Sync Alarm Error rate above 10e-3 DS3 PCLP Out of Framing DS3 PCLP Losst of Frame DS3 PCLP Yellow Alarm report report report report report report report report report report report report report report report report report report report crit major minor info crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit crit 14:33 aco-on aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off n/a aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure Basic-8. The Alarm Filters Screen The first column shows the alarm abbreviation that is shown on the screen when an alarm is generated. The second column shows the alarm title. The third column contains the filters ignore, report and log. The fourth column contains the filter modifiers info, minor, major and critical. The last column sets the ACO alarm acooff and aco-on. All of these options are explained later in this chapter. The filter in the third column will take precedence over its modifier. If, for instance, you have an alarm filter set to ignore, the setting of the modifier as info, minor, major or critical will be ignored as well. Table Basic-3 identifies the alarms and their meanings. Alarm filters should be set prior to activation of card ports! Page 2-C-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Table Basic-3. Alarm Filters Filter OOS Alarm Out of Service NOS LOS YEL No Signal Loss of Synchronization Yellow Alarm AIS Alarm Information Signal CGA_RED Carrier Group Alarm - Red CGA_YEL Carrier Group Alarm - Yellow EER Excessive Error Rate SENSOR Alarm Card Sensor DCHAN D-chan out of service SWITCH Switch to redundant card UCA User card/port alarm RESET System reset ACO Alarm Cut-Off SYNC Clock Sync Alarm EER-3 Excessive Error Rate (10e-3) PLC_OOF PLC_LOF DS3 PLCP Out of Framing DS3 PLCP Loss of Frame (10-97) Meaning The card, power supply or ringing generator is faulty or has been removed from the unit. Incoming WAN signal is lost. Frame Alignment is lost. The system has received a Yellow Alarm signal from a remote device. Usually received when the device loses WAN signal or synchronization. The system has received a Blue Alarm signal from a remote device. Usually received when the remote or intermediate device has a major failure. The local incoming WAN signal has a serious problem and trunk conditioning is started. After receiving a RED alarm (NOS or LOS) for 2-3 seconds, the system initiates the appropriate trunk conditioning sequence (see voice cards for information about the TC_CGA setting) and sends a Yellow Alarm to the remote device. If the system is in drop/insert mode, it also sends an AIS signal to the downstream equipment. The system has initiated trunk conditioning in response to a Yellow Alarm from a remote device. After 2-3 seconds, the system initiates the appropriate trunk conditioning sequence (see voice cards for information about the TC_CGA setting) The error rate measured by the system has exceeded the threshold set on the WAN card. The Alarm Card sensor has received an alarm indication from an attached device. If the network side D channel looses contact with the user side, an alarm message will be generated. The alarm message will show the slot # and D channel # where the problem exists. The primary card has failed and the system has switched to the redundant card. See the Redundant Operations Chapter. One or more active ports on a user card are not working properly. Voice ports will show an alarm for excessive signaling transitions and data ports will show an alarm for exceeding the data error threshold. The system has been reset by either loss of power or by system software upgrade. The ACO option forces you to manually clear certain alarms. Without this option, self-correcting alarms might not be noticed. When the ACO option is set to either Report or Log and the modifier is set to Major, alarms will report normally but will also generate an ACO alarm. If the modifier is set to Minor, it will not generate the ACO alarm. If the filter is set to Ignore, no alarms will be generated. The SYNC alarm is generated when either the primary or secondary external clock source is lost. This alarm is in addition to the condition that lost the clock source (CGA-RED or OOS). While using transcoder operations for E1 that involve downstream tributaries, setting EER-3 to "report" will cause an alarm to appear on the local system when E1 transmission errors exceed 10e-3 (1 in 1000). The local EER-3 alarm will identify the effected WAN link (i.e., W1-1) and take it out of service. Simultaneously, the downstream tributary will receive an AIS alarm to warn them of the condition. Physical Layer Convergence protocol is Out of Framing Physical Layer Convergence protocol has lost framing Page 2-C-11 Basic Operations PLC_YEL Reference Guide v3.6 DS3 PLCL Yellow Alarm Physical Layer Convergence protocol is reporting a yellow alarm Report Setting the filter for the various alarms to report causes the alarm indication to be sent to a remote device (see the Interface Card chapter), displays the alarm report on the screen, and logs the alarm in the Alarm History. Log Setting the filter for the alarms to log, displays the alarm report on the screen and logs the alarm in the Alarm History (see later in this chapter). Ignore Setting the filter for the alarms to ignore, will cause the alarm indication to be ignored by the system. Modifiers Each alarm may also be designated as info, minor, major and critical. The filter modifier shows on both the active alarm and alarm history screens. When used in conjunction with the External Alarm card, the occurrence of any alarm designated as critical will trigger a form-C contact on the External Alarm card which, in turn, can serve to activate an external device such as a bell or light. Similarly, the occurrence of any alarm designated as major would trigger a different contact and therefore activate a different external indicator. (See External Alarm Card chapter.) ACO ACO (Alarm Cut Off) is an additional security feature used by the system to alert the operator of alarms that clear themselves while the unit is unattended. If ACO is set to report or log, any alarm set to report or log with a major modifier will cause an additional alarm message to appear on the screen. This message, known as the ACO alarm message, must be manually cleared by the operator. Used with the node port of the Interface card (see Interface card chapter), ACO can also trigger some external alarm device such as a bell or light that must also be manually cleared by the operator. ACO alarms must be cleared from the Interface card screen. Alarm Handling The report alarm function attempts to send alarm information to a remote printer, Network Management System or other logging device, in addition to logging the alarm in the Alarm History log. These features use the built-in serial port and modem on the Interface card. You need to change settings on the Printout Alarms screen or IP screen on the Interface card to activate these special functions. (See Interface Card for more information.) Alarms set to either log or report record occurrences automatically to the Alarm History log. You can access the Alarm History log from the Main Alarm screen by pressing the "H" key from the Main Alarm Screen. Page 2-C-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Figure Basic-9 shows the Alarm History Screen. While the history screen is displayed, you can update the list with any new alarms that occur by selecting Refresh from the bottom menu of actions. You can delete all entries in the log by selecting Clear from the menu of actions on the history screen by pressing the “c” key. All alarms (except those set to ignore) appear in the Alarms field (in the upper right corner of the screen), regardless of their setting on the filters screen. The display in the alarms field is the abbreviated version of the alarm name and slot number. For example, OOS U3 indicates that the card in user slot three is out of service. Node_1 | History Alarms: 00012 00011 00010 00009 W1-1 W1-1 W1-1 C1 | 12-31-99 4 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CPU XCON 14:33 Page 1 of 1 C M I m CGA_RED NOS YEL RESET 12-31 12-30 12-30 12-28 12:22:00 08:02:09 10:45:00 16:35:17 12-31 12-30 12-30 12-28 12:23:00 09:30:00 11:15:55 22:02:00 Refresh | Clear | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure Basic-9. The Alarm History Screen (10-97) Page 2-C-13 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Reinitializing the System Information about cards inserted, card settings, WAN connections, passwords and other data is stored on the nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) on the Interface Card. When most card types are removed and replaced, the NVRAM remembers the card settings and if the same kind of card is inserted in the slot, there will be no need to reprogram the settings. If, on the other hand, a card is replaced with a different type of card, then the system will offer the operator the option of deleting the old card, so that the new parameters can be established (see Accept function in “Configuring the Cards,” earlier in this chapter). CPU Card One exception to the rule in the previous paragraph is changing the CPU card type between standard bus-connect, enhanced bus-connect or cross-connect. When a CPU card is removed and replaced by a like CPU card, the system will reevaluate the NVRAM and assign the old system parameters to the new CPU card (including passwords). If the CPU card is replaced with one of the other types of CPU card, or in some cases with the same type of CPU card that is equipped with a different version of firmware, the new CPU card will want to “cold-start” the system (overwrite NVRAM information on the Interface card). The screen shown as Figure Basic-10 will be shown. *** NVRAM on INTF Card is not available, Software revision has been changed *** Press ‘Z’ to zip the System Zip | zAp | Debug | Reg | Main Figure Basic-10. Cold Start NVRAM Screen If the new CPU card was inserted in error, the process can be stopped by removing the wrong CPU card and replacing it with the correct type of card. Page 2-C-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations Warning: Pressing the Z command from the Menu of Actions will start the ZIP process. "Zipping " the system deletes all of the information stored on NVRAM on the Interface Card and resets the system. All cards must then be completely reconfigured. When the Z key is pressed, the system will display the main log-in screen and ask for password authorization from either Manager or Operator access levels. After the correct password, the system will ask the question, "OK to Zip the system (y/n)"? If Y is pressed, the system will test and reinitialize itself. All NVRAM information will be erased from the Interface card and a new log-in screen will appear. Test and Debug Screen Advanced configuration and diagnostics are available through the use of the sYs (System) command from the Menu of Actions of the Main Screen. Pressing Y brings up the Test and Debug screen shown in Figure Basic-11. Test and Debug Zip | Debug | Reg | Backup | rEstore | Main Figure Basic-11. Test and Debug Screen ZIP Caution: The Z (Zip) command allows the user with Operator (and higher) password authority to reset the entire system. Since the settings for all cards in the system will be reset to their original factory settings, "zipping" the system should be thoroughly considered prior to implementation. The Zip screen is shown as Figure Basic-12. (10-97) Page 2-C-15 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Test and Debug Zip will reboot the system. Ok to Zip (y/n)? Zip | Debug | Reg | Backup | rEstore | Main Figure Basic-12. Zip Screen DEBUG The D (Debug) command is only available to factory software engineers with a password authorization higher than "Superuser." It gives access to the system software coding. REG The R (Registration) command allows the user with Operator (and higher) password authority to change the registration of the system. The user must have the information shown below to properly reregister the system. There should be no reason for this command to be used during normal operation of the system. The registration procedure consists of the three steps shown below. Answer the questions at the bottom of the screen and the system will automatically respond with the correct application parameters and prompts. 1. Enter the vendor code. If no other vendor code is specified, enter the vendor code 101. 2. Select the type of chassis used (either front-loading with power supplies on the side, front-loading with power supplies on top, or the two-sided chassis). Confirm the proposed changes by selecting y for yes or n for no). Figure Basic-13 shows the completed Registration screen. Page 2-C-16 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 Basic Operations | Welcome to Registration Vendor Code: | 12-31-99 14:33 xxx 1. Front - Loading Only / Power Supplies on side 2. Front - Loading Only / Power Supplies on top 3. Front & Rear Loading Only / Power Supplies on side Select one: 3 Is the Information on this screen correct (Y/N)? Figure Basic-13. Registration Screen (10-97) Page 2-C-17 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 BACKUP The Backup command backs up system information to a text file in the PC that is running the terminal emulation program. The Backup command allows backup of information on a system-wide or card-by-card basis. It also backs up Alarm Filters, Alarm History, Installation Table and Cross Connect information. It is best to back up information after any significant changes in system configuration and at intervals that assure that alarm history and other operating information will be maintained dependably. Figure Basic-14 shows the Backup Screen. The Backup procedure is detailed below. Node_1 | C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 W4 IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup backup NVRAM Backup Install Table Cross Connect Alarm Filters Alarms History | 12-31-99 14:33 backup backup backup backup Go | Copy | Main Figure Basic-14 Backup The Backup procedure creates a text file in which the parameters for the chosen cards are encoded. This information can then be used by the Restore command (see below) to restore the parameters to certain cards, or to the whole unit. Because the Backup command creates a simple text file, the actual commands for the Backup procedure will vary depending on the computer system and terminal software you are using to interface with the unit. The following procedure is specific to Windows 95 using Microsoft Terminal software, but can be easily modified to adapt to other systems and software. Page 2-C-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Basic Operations BACKUP PROCEDURE 1. From the Main Screen, type Y (for sYs) 2. Type B (for Backup). The screen in Figure Basic-14 lists all slots and categories with the default option backup. If you wish to do a full backup, proceed to Step 3. If you do not want to backup a certain slot, use the arrow keys to highlight it, and press . The choices no and backup appear at the bottom of the screen. Use the left arrow key to highlight no, and press . The slots or categories deselected will show no after the slot or category and will not be backed up. If you wish to deselect a number of entries in sequence, press C (for Copy) to change the next slot or category to match the slot or category you have just deselected. (10-97) 3. In the Microsoft Terminal menu bar, select the Transfers pull-down menu. 4. From the Transfers pull-down menu, select Receive Text File. 5. In the "Receive Text File" field, select the name of the file and its directory location. When you select OK a bar will appear at the bottom of the screen, with two buttons, Stop and Pause, as well as the number of bytes and the name of the file being received. 6. Type G (for Go). The screen will fill with scrolling text. When the text stops scrolling, you will see the message "BACKUP COMPLETE, hit 'm' to go back to menu." 7. At this point, turn the transfer function off by selecting the Stop button at the bottom of the screen. The text file containing all the parameters for the selected cards and categories has now been saved. 8. Type M to return to the NVRAM Backup screen. This will allow you to double-check that your backup selections were correct. Type M again to return to the Test and Debug screen. Page 2-C-19 Basic Operations Reference Guide v3.6 RESTORE The Restore command restores all selected card and system information from a file created by the Backup procedure. The Restore procedure is detailed below. This procedure is specific to the use of Microsoft Terminal in Windows 95, but can be easily modified for other systems and software. RESTORE PROCEDURE 1. From the Main Screen, type Y (for sYs) 2. Type E (for rEstore). In the screen shown in Figure Basic-15, the default for all slots and categories is restore. To do a full restore, proceed to Step 3. If you do not want to restore a certain slot, use the arrow keys to highlight it, and press . The choices no and backup appear at the bottom of the screen. Use the left arrow key to highlight no, and press . The slots or categories deselected will show no after the slot or category and will not be restored. To deselect a number of entries in sequence, press C (for Copy) to change the next slot or category to match the entry you have just deselected. Page 2-C-20 3. Type G (for Go). You will see the message "Restore is active. Press twice to end". 4. In the Microsoft Terminal menu bar, select the Transfers pull-down menu. 5. From the Transfers pull-down menu, select Send Text File. 6. At the bottom of the screen, you will see the progress of the file as it is received by the unit. (On some systems, you will not see any progress indicator.) When the restoration is complete, you will see the message "Restore COMPLETED, press twice to end." At this point, all parameters for the selected cards and categories have been restored. 7. Pressing twice will bring up the message "Resetting..." and then show the following prompt: "Restore is done, do you wish to restart now (y/n)?" Selecting Y will cause the unit to reinitialize itself using the restored parameters. You will be required to log in again. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 W4 IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Go Basic Operations restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e restor e Copy NVRAM Restore Install Table restore 12-31-99 Cross Connect restore Alarm Filters restore 14:33 Main Figure Basic-15. Restore Screen Note: The “Alarm History” field does not display on the Restore Screen because alarm history can only hold 32k of memory. This history information can be saved to a separate storage device (i.e. Personal Computer) indifferently for future reference and use. MAIN The "M" (Main) command returns the user to the main system screen. (10-97) Page 2-C-21 Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Introduction The primary purpose of your equipment is to maximize the use of incoming and outgoing T1/E1 lines by assigning specific channels (DS0s) to perform voice, data and cross-connect functions. These system operations are described in detail in this chapter. Assigning the Timeslot Map The system operations described in this chapter use two types of CPU, bus-connect (Models 8800 and 8804) and cross-connect (Model 8801). For the purposes of this chapter, the operation of the Model 8804 CPU is identical to that of the Model 8800 CPU. As a result, the 8804 CPU is not explicitly covered in this chapter. Differences between it and the 8800 are discussed in the CPU card section. The cross-connect CPU differs in application from the bus-connect models because of the DS0 cross-connect module that allows you to select and assign independent connections of one DS0 to another. In this chapter we will refer to these connections as "pass-through" circuits because they link a DS0 from one T1/E1 link to another through the system. Using the cross-connect CPU also allows the user to have up to eight separate T1/E1 links on four WAN cards in any cross-connect combination possible. The next six sections describe ways to administer the network and assemble bandwidth portions to meet these needs. Where applicable, each section first addresses busconnect systems with Model 8800 CPUs and then cross-connect systems with Model 8801 CPUs. Ø The first section deals with assigning incoming and outgoing user card ports to T1/E1 channels (timeslot). Ø The second section describes a time-saving tool known as the "Configuration" option that automatically assigns sequential WAN timeslot to ports on analog voice cards and allows WANs to be assigned without any cards. Ø The third section concerns cross-connecting WAN timeslot to other WAN timeslot in both bus-connect and cross-connect systems. Ø The fourth section addresses a special application that is supported in cross-connect systems only: the ability to broadcast a data signal over multiple WAN aggregates. Ø The fifth section describes signaling status, signaling conversion and companding conversion in bus-connect systems. Ø The sixth section shows you how to view the timeslot map after the assignments and cross-connects are made. In this manual, we define "assigning timeslots" as the process of connecting user card ports to WAN timeslots, and "cross-connecting timeslots" as the process of connecting WAN timeslots to other WAN timeslots. (10-97) Page 2-D-1 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Assigning Timeslots from a User Card The timeslot map specifies the connections between all incoming and outgoing lines connected to the system. It allows you to split the bandwidth of T1/E1 lines into amounts appropriate for normal voice and data communications. A timeslot map comprises all the connections you define for all the cards in the system. Bus-Connect Model A system equipped with a Model 8800 bus-connect CPU can access only two T1/E1 links and has two modes accessed from the WAN card screen: Drop-and-Insert (d-i) and Terminal (term). Note: When voice is going through the d-i, signaling must be turned on for voice to work correctly. Drop-and-Insert mode allows you to route part of the bandwidth of one of the T1/E1 lines to user cards while the unit automatically routes the rest to the other WAN link. In Terminal mode you can route the bandwidth of both T1/E1 links to user cards only. A description of the process follows. Timeslot assignment will be as unique as each customer's needs. A system using an E&M card and HSU card in T1 operation is used as an example here to illustrate the timeslot assignment process. Many different arrangements of timeslot assignments are possible with these two cards. Figure System-1 illustrates of one of those ways. In Drop-and-Insert mode, you can define a route on the timeslot map that assigns WAN port 1-1 timeslots (TS) 1-8 to ports 1-8 on the E&M card and TS#9-16 to the first port on the HSU card which is programmed to operate as an 8xDS0 super-rate data port. The remaining 8 timeslots will automatically be cross-connected to the corresponding timeslots on WAN port 1-2. The E&M card illustrates the case in which each port on the card can be assigned to only a single WAN timeslot (see Figure System-2). The HSU card illustrates the case in which one port may be assigned to multiple WAN timeslots using a table (see Figure System-3). All other available cards are assigned to timeslots in a similar manner, and specific instructions are included in each card chapter. WAN 1-1 TS# 1-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M 1 HSU 2 Card Card TS# 9-16 TS# 17-24 WAN 1-2 TS# 17-24 Figure System-1. A Drop-and-Insert Mode for T1 Operations Page 2-D-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations E&M Card You can define a timeslot map from any user card (data or voice) for connections involving that user card, or from a WAN card for connections involving only WAN cards. For example, Figure System-2 shows the E&M card screen for the above example, from which you can define a timeslot map as follows: Node_1 14:33 1. From the Main Screen, select the E&M card. 2. Select the WAN port to which you want to assign the E&M port. In our example, this would be WAN w1-1. 3. Select TS for each port and a number for the corresponding timeslot on the WAN port will appear at the bottom of the screen. You can change the number by using the up and down arrow keys and the key. 4. Change the STATE for each port you intend to use from stdby to actv. 5. Select Save from the menu of actions at the bottom of the screen to save your changes. | STATE WAN TS MODE R2 TYPE Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID SIG CONV RATE ADPCM U1 E&M 1 actv w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 4Wx8ER 2 actv w1-1 02 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 3 actv w1-1 03 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 8119 Rev A2-0 4 actv w1-1 04 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 5 actv w1-1 05 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 6 actv w1-1 06 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 7 actv w1-1 07 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 8 actv w1-1 08 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 08 Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure System-2. E&M Card with Timeslot Selection Displayed DACOM Timeslot Renumbering The E&M Card timeslot selection screen shown above can be modified for DACOM format. The timeslot data will be translated into DACOM format using a new assigned vendor code. This will allow the renumbering of timeslots so they will be displayed into Korean format. If Vendor Code indicates DACOM, then renumbered timeslots will be displayed using the Korean format. Timeslots 1 through 15 will be unchanged. Timeslots 17 through 31 will be renumbered as 16 through 30, and timeslot 16 will be renumbered as 31. (10-97) Page 2-D-3 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Note: ONLY use this option to reassign the timeslots on the E&M Card to DACOM. Otherwise, DO NOT change your vendor code. HSU Card Figure System-3 shows the HSU card screen for the example in Figure System-1, from which you can define a timeslot map as follows: 1. From the Main Screen, select the HSU card. 2. Select the WAN port to which you want to assign the HSU port. In our example, this would be WAN w1-1. 3. Select the TS table and all 24 timeslots will appear at the bottom of the screen. Place an “X” under all appropriate timeslots using the space bar to either select or delete timeslot assignment, and then press the key. In the example, the HSU port is assigned eight timeslots (numbers 9-16). 4. Change the STATE for each port you intend to use from stdby to actv. 5. Select Save from the menu of actions at the bottom of the screen to save your changes. Node_1 14:33 STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE Tx CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN | U2 HSU-530x2 1 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 8202 Rev C0-0 Ser 00054 | 12-31-99 2 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 x x x x x x Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Dial | Perf | Main Figure System-3. HSU Card Screen with the Timeslot Selection Displayed Page 2-D-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations DACOM Timeslot Renumbering The HSU Card timeslot selection screen shown above can be modified for DACOM format. The timeslot data will be translated into DACOM format using a new assigned vendor code. This will allow the renumbering of timeslots so they will be displayed into Korean format. If Vendor Code indicates DACOM, then renumbered timeslots will be displayed using the Korean format. Timeslots 1 through 15 will be unchanged. Timeslots 17 through 31 will be renumbered as 16 through 30, and timeslot 16 will be renumbered as 31. Note: ONLY use this option to reassign the timeslots on the HSU Card to DACOM. Otherwise, DO NOT change your vendor code. Cross-Connect Model The difference between bus-connect and cross-connect model 8801 is that the crossconnect model allows you to access two T1/E1 links for each of four WAN cards for a total of eight T1/E1 links. Since there is no d-i or term mode setting, all WAN card connections to other WAN cards are accomplished through the cross-connect option on the main screen and must be individually specified (see later section in this chapter). User cards on systems equipped with the cross-connect CPU are assigned to WAN timeslots in exactly the same manner as bus-connect versions. Using the Configuration Option Both bus-connect and cross-connect systems support the ability to automatically assign timeslots to E&M, FXS and FXO cards using the configuration option from the main screen. Figure System-4 shows a picture of the timeslot assignments for four E&M cards using E1 operations. The configure option automatically assigns the 8 ports from E&M card #1 to timeslots 1-8, seven ports from E&M card #2 to timeslots 9-15, and the 8 ports from E&M card #3 to timeslots 17-24, timeslots 25-31 are assigned to E&M card #4, ports 1-7. The configuration option only works with WAN ports 1-1 and 1-2. With a T1 WAN port, the configuration option would automatically assign the eight ports from the first E&M card to timeslots 1-8, the eight ports from the second E&M card to timeslots 9-16 and the eight ports from the third E&M card to timeslots 17-24. WAN 1-1 = E1 TS# 1-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M Card #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M Card #2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M Card #3 TS# 9-15 TS# 17-24 TS# 25-31 (10-97) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M Card #4 Page 2-D-5 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Figure System-4. Timeslot Map Using Configuration Option in E1 Operation In order to use the Configuration Option, the following constraints apply: Ø You must be configuring 3 vacant adjacent user slots for T1 operation or 4 vacant adjacent user slots for E1 operation. Cards must be sequentially in order (i.e. U1, U2, U3). Ø You need to set the MODE on the WAN port to term. Ø The 3 or 4 cards you intend to configure must be the same type (see below). The following steps and series of figures demonstrate the Configuration Option in E1 operation: Page 2-D-6 1. Place the cursor on the first of the 4 slots you intend to install. In Figure System-5, slots U5-U8 will be assigned to the 30 user timeslots on the E1 WAN port. Press c to initiate the configuration option. 2. Select the type of card (E&M-600Ω, E&M (extended range), FXS-900Ω, FXS600Ω, FXO-900Ω or FXO-600Ω as shown in Figure System-5. 3. Select the WAN port to which you wish to assign the voice cards (W1-1 or W1-2) as shown in Figure System-6. 4. The system automatically builds the necessary timeslot structure, but since the user slots are vacant, the system will register Out Of Service alarms for each of the 4 cards, as shown in Figure System-7. Inserting the four E&M cards will turn off the alarm condition. 5. Figure System-8 shows the WAN Xconnect screen with the correctly assigned timeslots. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 14:33 Slot C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 e&m-6 | | 12-31-99 Installed CPU XCON Status ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT CSU+CSU CSU+CSU PS1 PS2 e&mer fxs-9 fxs-6 Slot IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 R1 fxo-9 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXS 2Wx8-9 Status RINGER fxo-6 Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs| Logout | cpuSwtch Figure System-5. Configuration Screen (select operation) Node_1 14:33 Slot C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 w1-1 | Installed CPU XCON ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT CSU+CSU CSU+CSU PS1 PS2 | 12-31-99 Status Slot IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 R1 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXS 2Wx8-9 Status RINGER wan1-2 Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs| Logout | cpuSwtch Figure System-6. Configuration Screen (select WAN card) (10-97) Page 2-D-7 System Operations Node_1 14:33 Slot C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 Reference Guide v3.6 | | 12-31-99 Installed CPU XCON Status ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT CSU+CSU CSU+CSU PS1 PS2 Slot IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 R1 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXS 2Wx8-9 E&M 4Wx8-6 E&M 4Wx8-6 E&M 4Wx8-6 E&M 4Wx8-6 RINGER Status OOS OOS OOS OOS U8 U7 U6 U5 OOS OOS OOS OOS Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs| Logout | cpuSwtch Figure System-7. Configuration Screen (with Alarms noted) Node_1 14:33 TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | W1 XCON TS frame align U5-1 A-01 U5-2 A-02 U5-3 A-03 U5-4 A-04 U5-5 A-05 U5-6 A-06 U5-7 A-07 U5-8 A-08 U6-1 A-09 U6-2 A-10 U6-3 A-11 U6-4 A-12 U6-5 A-13 U6-6 A-14 U6-7 A-15 CEPT+CEPT CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit 8010 Rev A6-2 TS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 XCON cas U7-1 U7-2 U7-3 U7-4 U7-5 U7-6 U7-7 U7-8 U8-1 U8-2 U8-3 U8-4 U8-5 U8-6 U8-7 Ser 00101 TS A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-31 | 12-31-99 CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit OOS OOS OOS OOS U8 U7 U6 U5 Refresh | Test | Main Figure System-8. WAN Card Timeslot Screen Page 2-D-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Cross-Connecting WAN Timeslots After assigning user cards to timeslots, the remaining WAN bandwidth may be assigned to pass-through connections between T1/E1 links. Bus-Connect Model In bus-connect mode, the choice of Mode from the WAN card will automatically determine how WAN timeslot cross-connects are made. Whatever mode is selected will apply to both T1 and E1 links. In the d-i mode, all timeslots on one T1/E1 link that are not assigned to user ports will be cross-connected to the other link on a one-toone basis. In the term mode, no cross-connect circuits are possible. Note that if a Model 8804 CPU is used, then a Dual WAN card in slot W3 can only be used in term mode. W3 Does Not support voice cards 8212, 8220 and 8221. If the Dual WAN card in slot W1 is optioned with one T1 port (DSX or CSU) and one E1 port (CEPT), and if that card is set to operate in d-i mode, then the cross-connect map used by the system for unassigned ports will be as shown in Table System-1. Table System-1. T1 to E1 Cross-Connect Map in d-i Mode T1 DS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 E1 DS0 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 T1 DS0 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 E1 DS0 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 29 30 31 Cross-Connect Model Cross-connecting WAN timeslots with the cross-connect model is performed from the Main screen. To access this function, select "X" from the Menu of Actions on the Main screen. Choosing "Add" from the Menu of Actions provides the fields used to program all of the "pass through" circuits in your network. Figure System-9 shows the "Add" fields. Table System-2 lists the circuit parameters along with the possible and default values. (10-97) Page 2-D-9 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 page: | C1 CPU 1 of XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 CIRCUIT ID W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV new_circuit w1-1 00x64 off w1-1 00x64 off d n/a n/a Save Figure System-9. The CPU Cross-Connect Screen Page 2-D-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Table System-2. Cross-Connect Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter CIRCUIT ID W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC v v&s d CNV pcm conv sig conv User Options Any combination of letters or numbers up to 14 characters including spaces w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 table off all0 all1 m_oos 1:1 1:7 lpbk 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 table off all0 all1 m_oos 1:1 1:7 lpbk 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz v v&s d n/a e&m fxsl dpt user* n/a none A-mu fxsg mrd fxsd plar dpo fxol fxog fxod Default new_circuit w1-1 00 off w1-1 00 off d no e&m n/a mu-A none none ANSI-CCITT CCITT-ANSI ABCD-ABAB none ABCD-AB01 *selection of user will require user bit pattern information to be entered Circuit Identification A "circuit" is defined as a group of one or more DS0s that are cross-connected from one WAN link to another. Each circuit can carry voice or data traffic, and each is given its own name to facilitate cross-connect management within the system. The "CIRCUIT ID" field allows the user to define and name individual pass-through circuits. The default value is "new circuit" and can be changed to show any pertinent title for the pass-through connection, although each circuit ID must be unique. The title can contain up to fourteen letters or numbers, of upper and lower case, including spaces and underscore (_), dash (-). In Figure System-10, the circuit is identified as SF01-NY01. Warning: When cross-connecting multiple independent data DS0s (not a superrate circuit) between WAN aggregates in a cross-connect system, you must program each data DS0 cross-connect independently of the others. Note: Crossconnecting multiple DS0s in v mode maintains DS0 integrity. Attempting to save time by cross-connecting those independent data DS0s as one superrate circuit could cause data errors. This limitation does not apply to voice DS0s. (10-97) Page 2-D-11 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID new_circuit of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 00x64 off w1-1 00x64 off d n/a n/a SF01-NY01 Save Figure System-10. New Circuit Selection W/U (WAN Unit) The first WAN Unit column is the T1/E1 link from which the pass-through connection begins. (Since these circuits are bi-directional, the concept of beginning or ending is used for illustrative purposes only.) The options are all of the WAN cards and ports, and the identification uses the same convention (w1-1, w1-2, etc.) seen earlier. If a WAN card is not present in the W/U selected, an error message is generated. The example shown in Figure System-11, shows the selection of WAN 1-1. Page 2-D-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID new_circuit of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 00x64 off w1-1 00x64 off d n/a n/a SF01-NY01 Save Figure System-11. The WAN Unit Options TS/BW The first Timeslot/Band Width column shows the different timeslots from WAN 1-1 that will be assigned to this pass-through connection. Figure System-12 shows the selection of timeslots 8-12 from WAN 1-1 assigned to the start of the connection. Any number of timeslots from 1-24 would be acceptable for T1 operations and from 1-15 and 17-31 for E1 operations. The bandwidth is automatically assigned. Selection is made using the space bar and the arrow keys. The arrow key moves from slot to slot and the space bar toggles between selecting and deselecting the timeslot. (10-97) Page 2-D-13 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev TEST W/U C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW w1-1 TS/BW TEST 00x64 off w1-1 00x64 off 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 x x x x x TYPE TC CNV d n/a n/a Save Figure System-12. The Timeslot/Bandwidth Options Test (for Data Circuits) The first Test column allows the user to select the test pattern to be applied to this circuit in the direction of the first WAN link specified. Figure System-13 shows the options which are selected by highlighting the choice and pressing the return key. The choices are off (no testing), all 0 (all zeros), all 1 (all ones), m_oos (Multiplexer Out Of Synchronization), 1:1 ("one to one" pattern where a 1 is followed by one zero), 1:7 ("one to seven" pattern where a 1 is followed by seven zeros), lpbk (loopback), 300 Hz (steady 300 cycle tone), 1kHz (steady 1000 cycle tone), and 3kHz (steady 3000 cycle tone). When the circuit is saved, the system will send the selected pattern toward the first end of the circuit on each DS0 to facilitate testing. When circuit testing is finished, "Test" should be returned to the "off" position. The loopback (lpbk) option places the circuit in loopback in the direction of the first WAN link specified. If you are dealing with a voice cross-connect circuit (with or without signaling), test capabilities are accessed from the WAN cross-connect screen. This feature is discussed at the end of this section. Page 2-D-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID of SF01-NY01 off all 0 CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 05x64 off w1-1 00x64 off d n/a n/a all 1 moos 1:1 1:7 lpbk 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz Save Figure System-13. The Test Options W/U (WAN Unit) The second WAN Unit column is the T1/E1 link in which the pass-through connection ends. The options are all of the WAN cards and ports. If a WAN card is not present in the W/U selected, an error message is generated. The example shown in Figure System-14, shows the selection of WAN 3-2. TS/BW The second Timeslot/Band Width column shows the different timeslots from WAN 3-2 that will be assigned to this pass-through connection. Figure System-14 shows the selection of 5 timeslots from WAN 3-2 assigned to the end of the connection. Any number of timeslots from 1-24 would be accepted for T1 operations and from 1-15 and 17-31 for E1 operations. The bandwidth is automatically assigned. Selection is made using the space bar and the arrow keys. The arrow key moves from slot to slot and the space bar toggles between selecting and deselecting the timeslot. The number of DS0s assigned to this half of the cross-connect circuit must equal the number assigned to the other. If not, the system will reject the connections and generate an error message. (10-97) Page 2-D-15 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Test (for Data Circuits) The second Test column allows the user to select the test pattern to be applied to this circuit in the direction of the second WAN link specified. Figure System-14 shows the option set at off. Like the previous Test column, the choices are: off (no testing), all 0 (all zeros), all 1 (all ones), m_oos (Multiplexer Out Of Synchronization), 1:1 ("one to one" pattern where a 1 is followed by one zero, and then another one), 1:7 ("one to seven" pattern where a zero is followed by a 1 and 7 zeros, and then another one), lpbk (loopback), 300 Hz (steady 300 Hz tone), 1kHz (steady 1000 Hz tone), and 3kHz (steady 3000 Hz tone). When the circuit is saved, the system will send the selected pattern toward the second end of the circuit on each DS0 to facilitate testing. When circuit testing is finished, "Test" should be returned to the "off" position. The Loopback (lpbk) option places the circuit in loopback in the direction of the first WAN link specified. If you are dealing with a voice cross-connect circuit (with or without signaling), test capabilities are accessed from the WAN cross-connect screen. This feature is discussed at the end of this section. Type The Type column selects the mode of operation for the pass-through circuit. Figure System-14 shows the selection of Type. The choices are v (voice) requiring no trunk conditioning; v&s (voice with signaling) which will preserve A/B (robbed bit) signaling on the selected timeslots and provide trunk conditioning; and d (data) which also supports trunk conditioning. Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 v v&s of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 05x64 off w3-2 05x64 off d n/a n/a d Save Figure System-14. The Type Options Page 2-D-16 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations TC The operator may define the pattern to be transmitted on a cross-connected circuit should one of the two WAN links that define that circuit fail. This is known as Trunk Conditioning and the selections available are based upon the selection in the Type column. For d (data), no choice is available and the system automatically shows n/a (not applicable). An example of this is shown above as Figure System-14. For v&s (voice with signaling) the choices shown in Figure System-15 are user (a user defined bit pattern, as shown in Figure System-16, that is requested when user is selected), e&m, fxsl (foreign exchange station-loop start), fxsg (foreign exchange station-ground start), fxsd (foreign exchange station-defined network), plar (private line-automatic ringdown), dpo (dial pulse-originating), fxol (foreign exchange officeloop start), fxog (foreign exchange office-ground start), fxod (foreign exchange officedefined network), dpt (dial pulse-terminating), and mrd (manual ringdown). Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 TC CGA e&m fxsl mrd of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV off v&s e&m no 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U w1-1 e&m 05x64 idle off w3-2 05x64 e&m idle fxsg fxsd plar dpo fxol fxog fxod dpt user Save Figure System-15. The User Option Screen (10-97) Page 2-D-17 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 TC CGA XCON 8801 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 user 05x64 0x00 off w3-2 user 05x64 0x00 off v&s e&m no of CPU Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 Enter 2 hex digits: 0x00 Save Figure System-16. The User Bit Pattern Selection Screen For v (voice options) , no choice is available and the system automatically shows n/a (not applicable). An example of this is shown as Figure System-17. Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 05x64 off w3-2 05x64 off v&s e&m no Save Figure System-17. The Voice Options Screen Page 2-D-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations CNV The Conversion (CNV) parameter allows the user to request that PCM companding and signaling conversion be performed on this cross-connect circuit. Since these conversions only apply to voice circuits, if the TYPE selected is data (d), then the only acceptable value here is n/a. Similarly, if the TYPE selected is voice without signaling (v), the system will only allow you to request PCM companding conversion. If the TYPE is voice with signaling (v&s), then you can select any combination of companding and/or signaling conversion. If the TYPE is v or v&s, the system will first ask you to "Select PCM CONV:" for defining the type of companding conversion you require. (See Figure System-18.) The options are no companding conversion (none), convert the incoming A-law signal to mu-law (A-mu) and convert the incoming mu-law signal to A-law (mu-A). If the TYPE is v&s, the system will prompt you to "Select SIG CONV:" for selecting the type of signaling conversion needed. (See Figure System-19.) The first option is default signaling conversion (none) where a bit pattern of "0000" will automatically be converted to "0001" in the T1 to CEPT direction. The second option (ANSI-CCITT) will convert the incoming ANSI signaling to CCITT signaling. The third option (CCITT-ANSI) convert the incoming CCITT signaling to ANSI signaling. These two options are complementary (i.e. if either one is selected in one direction, the other is automatically selected for the reverse direction). When convert is selected then the TC field is used to select what type of conversion is used from the TABS field on the interface card. The fourth option (ABCD-ABAB) will convert the incoming CEPT signaling to T1 signaling for an ESF or D4 cross-connect. The fifth option (ABCD-AB01) will convert the incoming T1 signaling to CEPT signaling for a ESF or D4 cross-connect. These two options are complementary (i.e. if either one is selected in one direction, the other is automatically selected for the reverse direction). Because of space limitations in the CNV column on the screen, the system will display a summary notation of the choices just made. The possible values are no (no conversion), sig (signaling is converted, but not the PCM), pcm (PCM is converted, but not the signaling) and p&s (both signaling and PCM are converted). Figure System-20 illustrates those options. (10-97) Page 2-D-19 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 05x64 off w3-2 05x64 off v&s e&m pcm Select PCM CONV: none A-mu mu-A Save Figure System-18. Selecting PCM Conversion Node_1 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w1-1 05x64 off w3-2 05x64 off v&s e&m pcm Select SIG CONV: 14:33 none ANSI-CCITT CCITT-ANSI ABCD-ABAB ABCD-AB01 Save Figure System-19. Selecting Signaling Conversion Page 2-D-20 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 page: | C1 CPU 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 SF01-PHX11 SEA4AX Test of XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 TEST off off off off TYPE v v&s v&s v&s | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U w1-1 w1-1 w2-1 w2-2 TS/BW 05*64 01*64 01*64 01*64 TEST off off off off W/U w3-2 w2-1 w3-1 w3-2 TS/BW 05*64 01*64 01*64 01*64 TC n/a e&m e&m e&m CNV no sig pcm p&s Add | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | View all | Tads | Main Figure System-20. Completed Circuits Menu of Actions Table System-3 shows the Menu of Actions for the Completed Circuits screen. Table System-3. Menu of Actions Action Add uPdate dElete pgUp (10-97) Function Add allows you to program additional pass-through cross-connects in the system. If mistakes are made during the add process, pressing the up arrow or down arrow key will terminate this operation. The uPdate action is initiated by pressing the "p" key. With this command, you can change any of the parameters of a pass-through connection. As shown in Figure System-22. Use the arrow keys to highlight the area to be changed and close the transaction using the "S" (Save) command. The dElete action is initiated by pressing the "e" key. Use this command to delete existing pass-through connections. As shown in Figure System-21, the system will prompt you to delete the circuit, and the "y" key must be pressed to complete the transaction. The pgUp (page up) action is initiated by pressing the "u" key. Since the system can handle many different cross-connect circuits, you may exceed a single screen. New pages will be added automatically to accommodate additional circuits. The page count feature at the top of the screen shows you the current page and the total amount of crossconnect pages. Use this command to scroll up through the pages of cross-connect information. Page 2-D-21 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 pgDn The pgDn (page down) action is initiated by pressing the "d" key. This action is similar to the pageUp command. Use this command to scroll down through the pages of cross-connect information. The View all action is initiated by pressing the "v" key. This action is used to access the Broadcast screen discussed in a later section. The Test Access Digroups (TADs) function is a remote test access for data cross connects that pass through the system according to publication TR-TSY-000343, Issue #1, June 1986. A test center can access the Integrated Access Controller and assign a non-intrusive testing circuit between the unit and the test center via another WAN link. See the TADs section later in this chapter. Pressing "m" (Main) will return the user to the main cross-connect screen. View all Tads Main Node_1 page: | C1 CPU 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-NY01 of XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 TEST off TYPE v 14:33 1 W/U w1-1 TS/BW 05*64 TEST off W/U w3-2 TS/BW 05*64 TC n/a CNV no Tads | Delete Selected Circuit (y/n)? Add | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | View all | Main Figure System-21. The Delete Cross-Connect Screen Page 2-D-22 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 14:33 TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | W1 CSU+CSU XCON TS CIRCUIT_ID w3-2 w3-2 w3-2 w3-2 w3-2 1 2 3 4 5 SF01-NY01 SF01-NY01 SF01-NY01 SF01-NY01 SF01-NY01 8010 TS 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Rev A6-2 XCON TS Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 CIRCUIT_ID Refresh | Test | Main Figure System-22. The Updated WAN Card Screen Using the Test Option for Voice Cross-Connects Voice and data circuits differ in the way in which the test function is accessed. While the user can set up test patterns on data circuits on the cross-connect screen from the main screen, users testing voice circuits must use a subscreen of the WAN Xconnect card screen. Figure System-23 shows the error message that appears when the user attempts to access testing of voice circuits from the CPU Xconnect screen. (10-97) Page 2-D-23 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 page: | C1 1 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 CIRCUIT ID SF01-HSTN4C MIFL42A-SF01 NY66-WDC18a W/U w3-1 w2-1 w2-1 TS/BW 02*64 01*64 01*64 TEST off off off W/U w2-2 w3-1 w2-2 TS/BW 02*64 01*64 01*64 TEST off off off TYPE v&s d v&s TC e&m n/a e&m CNV p&s n/a p&s SF01-HSTN4C w3-1 02*64 off w2-2 02*64 off v&s e&m p&s Channel test is available from WAN XCON screen. Save Press any key to continue . . . Figure System-23. Message on CPU Xconnect Screen Figure System-24 shows the WAN Xconnect screen for the voice circuit used in this example. Place the cursor over the selected circuit and press the "t" key to bring up the Test Screen shown in Figure System-25. This screen splits the circuit into two parts with your location as the midpoint. The first column of test parameters will apply to that portion of the circuit on WAN 2-1, timeslot 13. The second column of test parameters will apply to that portion of the circuit on WAN 2-2, timeslot 13. Table System-4 lists the test parameters along with the possible and default values. Page 2-D-24 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 XCON u2-1 u2-2 u2-3 u2-4 u2-5 u2-6 u2-7 u2-8 System Operations | W1 TS A-01 A-02 A-03 A-04 A-05 A-06 A-07 A-08 CSU+CSU 8010 CIRCUIT_ID user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit Rev A6-2 TS 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 XCON w2-2 TS 13 CIRCUIT_ID NY66-WDC18a w3-1 5 MIFL42A-SF01 14:33 Refresh | Test | Main Figure System-24. Highlighted Circuit on WAN Xconnect Screen Node_1 TX ABCD PATTERN MON Tx ABCD MON Rx ABCD CONVERSION TYPE WAN STATE mon | | 12-31-99 w2-1 ts13 mon off 0000 1111 p&s v&s stdby 14:33 w2-2 ts13 mon off 0101 1111 p&s v&s stdby set Refresh | Test | Main Figure System-25. Test Screen and ABCD Bit Set Option (10-97) Page 2-D-25 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Table System-4. WAN Cross-Connect Test Screen Options Parameter Tx ABCD PATTERN MON Tx ABCD MON Rx ABCD CONVERSION TYPE WAN STATE User Options mon set off all 0 all 1 m_oos 1:1 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz information only - no user options information only - no user option information only - no user option information only - no user option information only - no user option 1:7 Default mon off lpbk Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD bit parameter allows the user to observe the bit pattern being sent on the transmit side of the line (mon) or to set a different pattern for testing that portion of the circuit (set). Choosing set brings up a small four character window at the bottom of the screen and allows the user to type in a new pattern of ones and zeros. Figure System-26 shows a diagram of the process. When Tx ABCD for WAN 2-1 is set to mon, the WAN 2-1 column reflects the ABCD bits being sent out on WAN 2-1. This pattern should be identical to the Rx ABCD on WAN 2-2 (unless the conversion table is used). When Tx ABCD for WAN 2-1 is set to set, the user supplies a bit pattern of four 1s and 0s for the new ABCD bits. The Rx ABCD stream from WAN 2-2 is broken at circle #1, and the new pattern is inserted into the Tx ABCD stream. The same applies for mon and set for WAN 2-2. The bit stream will be broken at circle #2. Network Tx ABCD WAN 2-1 Tx ABCD WAN 2-2 1 2 Rx ABCD WAN 2-1 Rx ABCD WAN 2-2 WAN XCONN Figure System-26. Voice Test Diagram Page 2-D-26 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations PATTERN The Pattern parameter allows the user to choose a test pattern to be transmitted as PCM data on the selected side of the circuit. The options are off, all 0 (zeros), all 1 (ones), m_oos (multiplexer out of synchronization), 1:1 (a one followed by a zero and then another one), 1:7 (a zero followed by a one and seven zeros, then another one), lpbk (loopback), 300 Hz (300 Hz tone), 1kHz (1000 Hz tone) and 3kHz (3000 Hz tone). Since the Tx ABCD only changes signaling bits, this option allows the user to choose the test pattern. A different pattern can be sent on either side of the circuit. MON Tx ABCD The Monitor Transmit ABCD bit information field shows the bit pattern being transmitted on the outbound circuit. It can be changed by using the set command. This parameter is for information only. MON Rx ABCD The Monitor Receive ABCD bit information field allows the bit pattern being received on the inbound circuit. This parameter is for information only, it is not changeable by the user. CONVERSION The Conversion information field shows the user the conversion setting selected from the cross-connect screen. The possible values are no (no conversion), sig (signaling is converted, but not the PCM), pcm (PCM is converted, but not the signaling) and p&s (both signaling and PCM are converted). This parameter is for information only, it is not changeable by the user on this screen. WAN STATE The WAN State information field shows the current status of the port. The possible values are stdby, actv, test (the operator is actively controlling the circuit), OOS (the WAN port is Out of Service) and CGA (the WAN port assigned has a CGA alarm). This parameter is for information only, it is not changeable by the user on this screen. Broadcast One of the special features of WAN timeslot assignment in cross-connect systems is the ability to copy a data signal and send it to multiple locations without disturbing the original circuit. This feature is called Broadcast (meaning multi-cast, not to be confused with broadcast quality video). An example of this feature would be a major company that transmits data lecture from the corporate headquarters in Denver to the sales office in San Francisco. Sales offices in Salt Lake City, Houston and Phoenix would like to be in the data lecture as well. The master circuit (Denver to San Francisco) is a two-way circuit (i.e., both ends can send and receive data). The other ends of the broadcast circuits (the sales offices in Salt Lake City, Houston and Phoenix) can only receive the output of the Denver end of the master circuit (i.e., they will not be able to take part in the discussion in “real time”). (10-97) Page 2-D-27 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 The following series of figures shows how the process works. Figure System-27 shows the main cross-connect screen. In this example, T1 circuits connected at the Denver office go to San Francisco (w1-1), Houston (w1-2), Salt Lake City (w2-1) and Phoenix (w2-2). This screen only shows the cross-connects made from WAN cards to WAN cards, not User cards to WAN cards. DENVER01 14:33 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 1 W/U SF-SLC w1-1 HST-PHX w1-2 TS/B W 01*6 4 01*6 4 TEST W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV off w21 w22 01*64 off v n/a no 01*64 off v n/a no off Add | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | View all | Tads | Main Figure System-27. Main Cross-Connect Screen Broadcast circuits can be initiated, updated or deleted only from the broadcast screen. To access the Broadcast option, press the "V" (View all) selection from the menu of options and the All Circuits screen (Figure System-28) is displayed. In addition to the WAN to WAN cross-connects, this screen also shows User card to WAN card timeslot assignments for all WAN cards. Because this screen shows all WAN timeslots that are either assigned to user cards or cross-connected to other timeslots, it could be quite full. Page 2-D-28 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations DENVER01 14:33 | C1 CPU page: 1 CIRCUIT ID of XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 1 W/U user_circui t user_circui t SF-SLC w4-1 w4-2 HST-PHX w1-2 w1-1 TS/B W 06*5 6 06*5 6 01*6 4 01*6 4 TES T off off off off W/U TS/BW TEST TYPE TC CNV w11 w22 w21 w22 06*56 off d n/a n/a 06*56 off d n/a n/a 01*64 off v n/a no 01*64 off v n/a no Bcast | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-28. All Circuits Screen In addition to the two WAN to WAN cross-connects shown in Figure System-28, an HSU circuit from slot u4-1 to the San Francisco T1 circuit on WAN 1-1 and an HSU circuit from slot u4-2 to Phoenix on WAN 2-2 are shown in Figure System-29. To select the broadcast option, place the cursor over the User card circuit that will be copied (in this case, it will be the Denver end of the Denver to San Francisco link on WAN 1-1) and press the "b" (Broadcast) key from the menu of options. The screen shown in Figure System-29 will show the dynamics of the first copy of that circuit. Pressing the "Enter" key allows users to access and modify connection options. (10-97) Page 2-D-29 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 DENVER01 14:33 page: | C1 1 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 1 CIRCUIT ID user_circui t user_circui t SF-SLC HST-PHX W/U w4-1 TS/BW 06*56 TEST off W/U w1-1 TS/BW 06*56 TEST off TYPE d TC n/a CNV n/a w4-2 06*56 off w2-2 06*56 off d n/a n/a w1-1 w1-2 01*64 01*64 off off w2-1 w2-2 01*64 01*64 off off v v n/a n/a no no user_circui t w4-1 06*56 off w1-1 00*56 off b/d n/a no Lecture Save Figure System-29. Add Broadcast Screen In this example, the broadcast circuit is labeled "Lecture" for easier identification later when the circuit will be disconnected. Figure System-30 shows the selection of a second destination for the broadcast circuit. In this example, that destination is Salt Lake City, which is accessed through WAN w21. The timeslot selection is shown in Figure System-31. Selecting "S" (Save) from the Menu of Actions will save the parameters of the new circuit. Figure System-32 shows the new circuit. Note that the circuit type is "b/d" (broadcast/data). Similar actions will duplicate this circuit for the other destinations. Figure System-33 shows the completed circuits. To disconnect the circuits when the program is finished, highlight the circuit to be disconnected with the cursor and press the "e" key and the screen shown in Figure System-34 will appear. Selecting "y" will permanently delete the copied circuit while leaving the original circuit intact. Page 2-D-30 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations DENVER01 14:33 page: | C1 1 of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 TYPE d d v v 1 CIRCUIT ID user_circuit user_circuit SF-SLC HST-PHX W/U w4-1 w4-2 w1-1 w1-2 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 TEST off off off off W/U w1-1 w2-2 w2-1 w2-2 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 TEST off off off off Lecture w4-1 06*56 off w1-1 06*56 off w1-1 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 w1-2 | 12-31-99 TC n/a n/a n/a n/a b/d CNV n/a n/a no no n/a no Save Figure System-30. "To" Destination Selection DENVER01 14:33 | C1 page: 1 CIRCUIT ID of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 1 W/U TS/BW TEST W/U TS/BW TEST w4-1 w4-2 w1-1 w1-2 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 off off off off w1-1 w2-2 w2-1 w2-2 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 w4-1 06x56 off w2-1 01x64 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 x x x x x x user_circuit user_circuit SF-SLC HST-PHX Lecture | 12-31-99 TC CNV off off off off TYP E d d v v n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a no no off b/d n/a no Save Figure System-31. Timeslot Selection (10-97) Page 2-D-31 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 DENVER01 page: | C1 1 of CIRCUIT ID user_circuit user_circuit SF-SLC HST-PHX Lecture CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U w4-1 w4-2 w1-1 w1-2 w4-1 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 TEST off off off off off W/U w1-1 w2-2 w2-1 w2-2 w2-1 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 TEST off off off off off TYPE d d v v b/d TC n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a CNV n/a n/a no no no Bcast | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-32. Completed Broadcast Circuit DENVER01 page: | C1 1 CIRCUIT ID user_circuit user_circuit SF-SLC HST-PHX Lecture Lecture Lecture of CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U w4-1 w4-2 w1-1 w1-2 w4-1 w4-1 w4-1 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 06*56 06*56 TEST off off off off off off off W/U w1-1 w2-2 w2-1 w2-2 w2-1 w1-2 w2-2 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 06*56 06*56 TEST off off off off off off off TYPE d d v v b/d b/d b/d TC n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a CNV n/a n/a no no no no no Bcast | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-33. Three Broadcast Circuits Page 2-D-32 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations DENVER01 page: | C1 1 of CIRCUIT ID user_circuit user_circuit SF-SLC HST-PHX Lecture Lecture Lecture CPU XCON 8801 Rev C01-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 W/U w4-1 w4-2 w1-1 w1-2 w4-1 w4-1 w4-1 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 06*56 06*56 TEST off off off off off off off W/U w1-1 w2-2 w2-1 w2-2 w2-1 w1-2 w2-2 TS/BW 06*56 06*56 01*64 01*64 06*56 06*56 06*56 TEST off off off off off off off TYPE d d v v b/d b/d b/d TC n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a CNV n/a n/a no no no no no Delete Selected Circuit (y/n)? Bcast | uPdate | dElete | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-34. Delete Broadcast Circuit WAN Link to WAN Link Circuits from a WAN link to a WAN link can also be duplicated from the broadcast screen. The same procedure is used to establish multiple connections for WAN to WAN circuits. Back in Figure System-30, highlighting the WAN link circuit on slot w1-1 will allow you to cross-connect duplicate information to any other WAN link needed. (10-97) Page 2-D-33 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table System-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the Broadcast screen. Table System-5. Menu of Actions Action Bcast uPdate dElete pgUp pgDn Main Function Bcast allows you to program additional broadcast cross-connects in the system. If mistakes are made during the add process, pressing the up arrow or down arrow key will terminate this operation. The uPdate action is initiated by pressing the "p" key. With this command, you can change any of the parameters of a broadcast connection. Use the arrow keys to highlight the area to be changed and close the transaction using the "s" (Save) command. The dElete action is initiated by pressing the "e" key. Use this command to delete existing broadcast connections. As shown in Figure System-34 earlier, the system will prompt you to delete the circuit, and the "y" key must be pressed to complete the transaction. The pgUp (Page Up) action is initiated by pressing the "u" key. Since the system can handle many different circuits, you may fill the screen allotment for data. New pages will be added automatically to accommodate additional circuits. The page count feature at the top of the screen shows you the current page and the total amount of pages of information. Use this command to scroll up through the pages of cross-connect information. The pgDn (Page Down) action is initiated by pressing the "d" key. This action is similar to the pgUp command. Use this command to scroll down through the pages of cross-connect information. Pressing "m" (Main) will return you to the cross-connect screen. Test Access Digroups (TADS) The Test Access Digroups (TADS) is a remote test access for data cross connects that pass through the system according to publication TR-TSY-000343, Issue #1, June 1986. A test center can access the system and assign a non-intrusive testing circuit between the unit and the test center via another WAN link. For the purposes of this discussion on Test Access Digroups, the figures show a 64kbps data circuit between Fremont, CA. and Jacksonville, FL. Figure System-35 shows the cross-connect screen with the data circuits connected. Page 2-D-34 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Node_1 14:33 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonville of | 12-31-99 1 FACILITY w1-1 01*64 TEST off EQUIPMENT w1-2 01*64 TEST off TYPE d TC moos CNV n/a moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-35. The TADS Screen In Figure System-35, the data circuit called "Jacksonville" is connected on a single time slot between WAN1-1 and W1-2. Monitor Circuit With the monitor circuit, the data test center (by remote access) creates a "hitless" monitor connection (i.e., one that can be created, maintained and dropped without affecting the information on the circuit being tested) between the data test center and the Node_1 Device. Highlighting the desired circuit and pressing the "N" key, brings up the add monitor circuit screen shown in Figure System-36. (10-97) Page 2-D-35 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 of | 12-31-99 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonville FACILITY w1-1 01*64 TEST off EQUIPMENT w1-2 01*64 TEST off TYPE d TC moos CNV n/a new_circuit w1-1 off w1-1 off m/d moos n/a 00*64 00*64 moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-36. The Add Monitor Circuit Screen Cross connect information is added in a similar fashion to the Add Broadcast screen mentioned in the last section. Figure System-37 shows the completed monitor circuit. Node_1 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonvill e monitor ckt monitor ckt of | 12-31-99 14:33 1 FACILITY w1-1 01*64 TEST EQUIPMENT mon w1-2 01*64 TEST off TYPE d TC moos CNV n/a w1-1 w1-2 off off off off m/d m/d moos moos n/a n/a 01*64 01*64 w2-1 w2-1 01*64 01*64 moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-37. Completed Monitor Circuit Page 2-D-36 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Figure System-38 shows a diagram of how the Monitor circuit splits the original cross connect circuit for testing. Notice how the test circuit uses two 64kbps WAN timeslots, one for the transmit side and one for the receive side of the line. Fremont DTE W1-1 #1(R) W1-1 #1(T) W2-1 #1 Data Test Center Equip W2-1 #2 W1-2 #1 W1-2 #1 Jacksonville DCE Figure System-38. Monitor Circuit Diagram Split Circuit Pressing the "L" command from the Menu of Actions allows you to split the circuit through the data test center equipment. New circuit information is added in the same way as with the monitor circuit. With the Split Circuit, the data test center splits the circuit and connects it to their equipment. Unlike the Monitor test circuit, the Split test circuit is intrussive and all transmit and receive data must pass through the equipment at the data test center. Figure System-39 shows the TADS screen with a split circuit completed. It uses two 64kbps timeslots (like the Monitor circuit). Figure System-40 shows a diagram of the split test circuit. (10-97) Page 2-D-37 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonvill e split ckt split ckt of | 12-31-99 1 FACILITY w1-1 01*64 TEST EQUIPMENT spl w1-2 01*64 TEST off TYPE d TC moos CNV n/a w1-1 w1-2 off off off off s/d s/d moos moos n/a n/a 01*64 01*64 w2-1 w2-1 01*64 01*64 moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-39. TADS Screen with Split Circuits Fremont DTE W1-1 #1(R) W1-1 #1(T) W2-1 #1 Data Test Center Equip W2-1 #2 W1-2 #1 W1-2 #1 Jacksonville DCE Figure System-40. Split Circuit Diagram Page 2-D-38 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Release Pressing the "R" command from the Menu of Actions allows you to release the circuit from the data test center equipment. The system will verify the action desired with a yes/no question. With the Release Circuit, the Data Test Center removes the connection between the circuit being tested and restores the circuit to its preaccessed state. Figure System-41 show the TADS screen with the release verification. Node_1 14:33 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonvill e split ckt split ckt of | 12-31-99 1 FACILITY w1-1 01*64 TEST EQUIPMENT spl w1-2 01*64 TEST off TYPE d TC moos CNV n/a w1-1 w1-2 off off off off s/d s/d moos moos n/a n/a 01*64 01*64 w2-1 w2-1 01*64 01*64 Restore Selected Circuit (y/n)? moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-41. TADS Restore Circuit Screen Terminate and Leave Access The Terminate and Leave Access (TLA) circuit gives the data test center the capability to terminate one or both directions of transmission on a circuit by inserting an unassigned channel code (01111111) in the outgoing transmission path(s). The TLA feature is useful in circuit provisioning to turn circuits up and down remotely, and in testing multipoint circuits to isolate and remove noisy bridge legs from service. Figure System-42 shows the TLA screen with the choice of Monitor (mon) or Unassigned Channel Code (uca) to be applied to the highlighted circuit. (If TLA had been applied to a Split circuit, the choices would have been spl or uca.) (10-97) Page 2-D-39 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 page: | C1 10161 CPU XCON COM 407535038 Ser 00101 1 of | 12-31-99 1 CIRCUIT ID Jacksonville monitor ckt monitor ckt FACILITY w1-1 01*64 w1-1 01*64 w1-2 01*64 TEST mon off off EQUIPMENT w1-2 01*64 w2-1 01*64 w2-1 01*64 TEST off off off TYPE d m/d m/d TC moos moos moos CNV n/a n/a n/a Jacksonville w1-1 mon w1-2 off d moos n/a mon 01*64 01*64 uac moNitor | spLit | Release | Tla | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure System-42. TLA Circuit State Screen Menu of Actions Table System-6 shows the Menu of Actions for the TADS screen. Table System-6. Menu of Actions Action moNitor spLit Release Tla pgUp pgDn Main Page 2-D-40 Funtion The Monitor command allows the user to create a monitor circuit at the WAN interface. See section above. The Monitor command allows the user to create a split circuit at the WAN interface. See section above. The Release command allows the user to release and restore a split circuit or a monitor circuit. See section above. The Terminate and Leave Access (TLA) command is the capability to terminate one or both directions of transmission on a circuit. See section above. The pgUp) action is initiated by pressing the "u" key. Since the system can handle many different TADS circuits, you may fill the screen allotment for data. New pages will be added automatically to accommodate additional circuits. Use this command to scroll up through the pages of TADS information. The pgDn (Page Down) action is initiated by pressing the "d" key. This action is similar to the pgUp command. Use this command to scroll down through the pages of cross-connect information. Pressing "m" (Main) will return you to the cross-connect screen. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Signaling and Companding Conversion in Bus-Connect Systems User card ports may or may not have a signaling mode applied to them when assigned to a timeslot. Typically, analog voice cards (i.e., E&M, FXO, FXS) will have their analog signaling information converted to digital signaling bits which are then inserted into the digital bitstream. Data card circuits (i.e., HSU, SRU, etc.), on the other hand, do not require the system to perform any signaling processing or conversion. Unlike DS0s terminating on voice or data cards in the system that will have controlled signaling parameters, circuits that "pass through" your system must have signaling assigned to them by the user. This ensures that the WAN cards either maintain existing signaling patterns as in T1-T1 circuits or change and convert them for circuits going from a T1 to an E1 environment. In Figure System-43, timeslots 1-8 and 13-18 are connected to user cards and therefore will have signaling automatically turned off or on by the system depending on the type of user ports that are assigned to them. Of the pass-through connections on the other timeslots, you can either select signaling or no signaling depending the type of equipment or channel facility on which it is ultimately terminated. For voice circuits, you would probably want to enable signaling, and for data equipment, you would probably want to disable signaling (the default). Further, this screen allows you to request that signaling conversion and/or companding conversion be performed on passthrough circuits. Node_1 TS CNV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | W1 XCONNECT BW u2-1 u2-2 u2-3 u2-4 u2-5 u2-6 u2-7 u2-8 u1-2 u1-2 u1-2 u1-2 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k voice voice voice voice voice voice voice voice ts-9 ts-10 ts-11 ts-12 CSU+CSU 8010 sig sig sig sig sig sig sig sig no no no no Rev A6-2 TS XCONNECT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 Ser 00101 data data data data data data ts-19 ts-20 ts-21 ts-22 ts-23 ts-24 | 12-31-99 14:33 BW CNV 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k no no no no no no Save | Undo | Refresh | sIgnaling | Main Figure System-43. WAN Cross-Connect Screen (10-97) Page 2-D-41 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 To change the signaling and/or companding options of a voice circuit on a WAN card using the drop-and-insert mode, place the cursor over the timeslot you wish to change and select I (sIgnaling) from the Menu of Actions. Table System-7 shows the matrix of choices for the handling of signaling, signaling conversion and companding conversion. Table System-7. Signaling and Companding Options Select Signaling Select PCM CONV yes none, A-mu, mu-A no none, A-mu, mu-A Select SIG CONV none ANSI-CCITT, CCITT-ANSI, ABCD-ABAB, ABCD-AB01 (no choice) Select SIG TYPE (no choice) e&m, fxs, plar, fxo (no choice) The first option is Select Signaling. The choices are either yes or no, depending upon the type of circuit passed through the system (voice or data). Whichever choice is made, the system will then prompt you to select PCM companding conversion. The choices for Select PCM CONV are none, A-mu (A-Law to Mu-Law, E1 to T1 conversion) and mu-A (Mu-Law to A-Law, T1 to E1 conversion). On a normal data service, you would probably choose no and none. A voice circuit on a T1-T1 "pass through" might require signaling enabled but not converted, so the choices would be yes (to pass voice signaling through), and none (the PCM does not have to be converted), and none (the signaling does not have to be converted). If, for instance, you have an international voice circuit passed through your system to a North American T1 circuit, you would probably need to have both signaling and PCM conversion converted. Choosing yes for Select Signaling will bring up your Select PCM CONV options, followed by a prompt to select the signaling conversion for this circuit. The first option is default signaling conversion (none) where a bit pattern of "0000" will automatically be converted to "0001" in the T1 to CEPT direction. The second option (ANSI-CCITT) will convert the incoming ANSI signaling to CCITT signaling. The third option (CCITT-ANSI) converts the incoming CCITT signaling to ANSI signaling. These two options are complementary (i.e. if either one is selected in one direction, the other is automatically selected for the reverse direction). The fourth option (ABCD-ABAB) will convert the incoming CEPT signaling to T1 signaling for an ESF or D4 cross-connect. The fifth option (ABCD-AB01) will convert the incoming T1 signaling to CEPT signaling for a ESF or D4 cross-connect. These two options are complementary (i.e. if either one is selected in one direction, the other is automatically selected for the reverse direction). If signaling conversion is enabled for that circuit, you will then be asked to Select SIG TYPE. The choices are e&m, fxs, plar and fxo. After this final choice, the screen updates the signaling and conversion information on that circuit. Page 2-D-42 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Figure System-44 shows the WAN card cross-connect screen for a bus-connect system. Timeslots 19-24 show all of the possible choices for pass through circuits. The values are no (signaling is not passed through and neither PCM nor SIG are converted), pcm (signaling is not passed through, PCM is converted, SIG is not converted), sig-no (signaling is passed through and there is no PCM or SIG conversion), sig-sig (signaling is passed through, PCM is not converted, SIG is converted), sig-pcm (signaling is passed through, PCM is converted, SIG is not converted) and sig-p&s (signaling is passed through, both PCM and SIG are converted). Node_1 TS CNV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | W1 XCONNECT BW u2-1 u2-2 u2-3 u2-4 u2-5 u2-6 u2-7 u2-8 u1-2 u1-2 u1-2 u1-2 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k voice voice voice voice voice voice voice voice ts-9 ts-10 ts-11 ts-12 CSU+CSU 8010 sig sig sig sig sig sig sig sig no no no no Rev A6-2 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 TS XCONNECT BW CNV 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 u5-1 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 w1-2 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 06x56k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k 64k no pcm no sig pcm p&s data data data data data data ts-19 ts-20 ts-21 ts-22 ts-23 ts-24 Save | Undo | Refresh | sIgnaling | Main Figure System-44. Signaling and Companding Options Checking the Timeslot Map Once the timeslots are selected and assigned, the list of all DS0 connections (the timeslot map) can be viewed through the WAN card Xconnect screen for both busconnect and cross-connect systems. (In the bus-connect version, changes of signaling status [trunk conditioning] can also be done from this screen [see previous section]). You can see the results of your assignment selections by checking the timeslot map as follows: 1. From the Main Screen, select the WAN card in slot W-1. 2. Type to bring up the timeslot screen (see Figure System-45). 3. Selecting for Main will return you to the WAN card screen. 4. Selecting for Main again will return you to the Main screen. (10-97) Page 2-D-43 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | W1 XCON TS u2-1 D-01 user_circuit u2-1 D-02 user_circuit u2-1 D-03 user_circuit u2-1 D-04 user_circuit u2-1 D-05 user_circuit u2-1 D-06 user_circuit u2-1 D-07 user_circuit CSU+CSU CIRCUIT ID 8010 TS 13 Rev A6-2 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 XCON TS CIRCUIT ID 19 u2-1 A-01 user_circuit 20 21 22 23 24 u2-1 u2-1 u2-1 u2-1 u2-1 A-02 A-03 A-04 A-05 A-06 user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit 14 15 16 17 18 8 9 10 11 12 Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure System-45. Timeslot Screen in T1 Operation Figure System-46 shows the same example displayed on a bus-connect system using E1 connections in d-i mode. (Timeslot #16 will not be available for assignment on either the HSU table or the voice card timeslots.) Like T1 operation in d-i mode, unspecified timeslots are automatically assigned to corresponding slots on the other WAN port on the same card. DACOM Timeslot Renumbering The WAN Card timeslot selection screen shown above can be modified for DACOM format. The timeslot data will be translated into DACOM format using a new assigned vendor code. This will allow the renumbering of timeslots so they will be displayed into Korean format. If Vendor Code indicates DACOM, then renumbered timeslots will be displayed using the Korean format. Timeslots 1 through 15 will be unchanged. Timeslots 17 through 31 will be renumbered as 16 through 30, and timeslot 16 will be renumbered as 31. Note: ONLY use this option to reassign the timeslots on the WAN Card to DACOM. Otherwise, DO NOT change your vendor code. Page 2-D-44 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 System Operations | W1 XCON TS frame align U5-1 A-01 U5-2 A-02 U5-3 A-03 U5-4 A-04 U5-5 A-05 U5-6 A-06 U5-7 A-07 U5-8 A-08 U6-1 A-09 U6-2 A-10 U6-3 A-11 U6-4 A-12 U6-5 A-13 U6-6 A-14 U6-7 A-15 CEPT+CEPT CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit 8010 Rev A6-2 TS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 XCON cas U7-1 U7-2 U7-3 U7-4 U7-5 U7-6 U7-7 U7-8 U8-1 U8-2 U8-3 U8-4 U8-5 U8-6 U8-7 Ser 00101 TS A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-31 | 12-31-99 CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit Refresh | Test | Main Figure System-46. Timeslot Screen in E1 Operation Recording the Configuration on Paper After you set up your initial system configuration and define your timeslot map, take the time to record this information on paper. Recording the initial configuration in a logical manner will pay for itself if you have a problem later. Record the information in any way that makes sense to you and your colleagues. Whatever your approach, it is suggested that you also note the initial settings for each card in copies of the T1 or E1 operation tables provided as Tables System-8 and -9. Store all the initial configuration information in a safe place where anyone needing to service the system can easily find it. (10-97) Page 2-D-45 System Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Table System-8. Timeslot Recording Form (T1 Operation) WAN Port # _______ - _______ TS Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 2-D-46 Card Type Port Number (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 System Operations Table System-9. Timeslot Recording Form (E1 Operation) WAN Port # _______ - _______ TS Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (10-97) Card Type Port Number Page 2-D-47 Reference Guide v3.6 Redundant Operations Introduction The system can be configured with redundant features that will switch operations from failed critical components to "backup" replacements with the minimum loss of service possible in the event of equipment failure. The four areas of redundant operations are the power system (load share), the CPU card, the WAN card and the ADPCM network. Power System Each of the power supply components is designed to switch to alternative units (if available) in the event the primary unit fails. Additionally, the defective unit will create a system alarm upon failure to alert the operator of the condition so that suitable diagnostic and repair work may be initiated. The units covered by these redundancy parameters are: • 8901 AC Power Supply • 8902 DC Power Supply • 8906 Ringing Generator (Master only, see below) • 8907 DC Power Supply Upon failure, the LED on the 8903 or 8905 AC to DC Power Converter will be turned off but will not generate a system alarm (unless the system is equipped with the 8902 External Alarm card). If the "Master" 8906 Ringing Generator fails, an alarm will be generated and the LED will turn off. If a "slave" Ringing Generator fails, the LED will turn off but no alarm will be generated by the system. Figure RDNT-1 shows the main screen of a cross-connect system in which Power Supply #1 (PS1) has failed. The Power Supply failure is noted in the alarm message in the top right hand corner of the screen. (10-97) Page 2-E-1 Redundant Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | Slot Installed C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 CPU XCON CPU XCON ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 PS2 | Status RDNT OOS Slot Installed IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 RI INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 FRAD-18 SRU-232x10 RINGER Status 12-31-99 14:33 PS1 OOS Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-1. Redundant Power Systems (Two-Sided Chassis) CPU Card CPU Card redundancy is valuable to the user because of the criticality of the CPU card to the operation of the entire system. CPU redundancy is supported in both crossconnect and enhanced bus-connect units using two 8801 or 8804 models respectively. A CPU card installed in slot C2 will become the redundant mate of the one in slot C1, if they are both of the same type. Switching from one CPU card to the other is triggered by any one of the following conditions: • A software command issued by the operator • Removal of the active CPU card • Failure or malfunction of the active CPU card During a CPU redundancy switch over, disruptions to voice and data traffic are momentary and traffic will recover automatically. Figure RDNT-2 shows the Main screen of a cross-connect system. The CPU in slot C1 is active and the CPU in slot C2 is the redundant mate. When the command "cpusWtch" is selected from the Menu of Actions, the system will prompt the user with the yes/no question. Figure RDNT-3 shows the same screen after the switch. The CPU card in slot C1 now shows redundant and the CPU in slot C2 now shows as the active mate. Note: This switch is intrusive and will cause an outage. Page 2-E-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Redundant Operations Node_1 | Slot C1 C2 P1/U1 P2/U2 P3/U3 P4/U4 W1/U5 W2/U6 W3/U7 W4/U8 IF S1 S2 RI | Installed CPU RCON CPU RCON E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT INTF+modem PS1 PS2 RINGER 12-31-99 14:33 Status RDNT OK to switch to redundant CPU (y/n)? Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-2. Redundant CPU Cards (Front-Loading Chassis) Node_1 | Slot C1 C2 P1/U1 P2/U2 P3/U3 P4/U4 W1/U5 W2/U6 W3/U7 W4/U8 IF S1 S2 RI | Installed CPU RCON CPU RCON E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT INTF+modem PS1 PS2 RINGER 12-31-99 14:33 Status RDNT Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-3. CPU Switchover (Front-Loading Chassis) WAN Card T1 and E1 WAN redundancy is supported in enhanced bus-connect systems (Model 8804 CPU) and in cross-connect systems (Model 8801 CPU). It is not supported in the standard bus-connect systems (Model 8800 CPU). (10-97) Page 2-E-3 Redundant Operations Reference Guide v3.6 In both cases, the user may define in software, one or more events that can trigger a WAN redundancy switchover from among the following options: • A software command issued by the operator • The removal of the active WAN port or card • The failure or malfunction (OOS) of the active WAN port or card • CGA alarm declaration on the active WAN port or card During a WAN redundancy switchover, disruptions to voice and data traffic are momentary and traffic will recover automatically. Enhanced Bus-Connect WAN Redundancy In enhanced bus-connect systems, a single or dual WAN card that is installed in slot W2 automatically becomes the redundant mate of the WAN card in slot W1. Similarly, a WAN card in slot W4 automatically becomes the redundant mate of the WAN card in slot W3. This is known as 1x1 redundancy and a "Y-adapter" (Model 1239) is required to bring the outputs of each pair of WAN ports onto the same facility. The "master" WAN card and its redundant mate must be equipped with the same mix of DSX, CSU or CEPT modules and those must be placed in the same positions on both cards. If an incompatible WAN card is installed in a redundant slot, then the system will "reject" that card. If a Dual WAN is used in "terminate" mode, only the failed WAN port will switch to its redundant mate. If the Dual WAN card is programmed for "drop and insert" mode, both ports will switch even if only one has failed. Figure RDNT-4 shows the Main screen (status screen selected) of the enhanced busconnect system. In this example, the two ports on WAN-1 are paired with the two ports on WAN-2, while the two ports on WAN-3 are paired with the two ports on WAN-4. Figure RDNT-5 shows the main WAN card screen for the card in slot W3 with port 1 selected. The software command "sWitch" is selected from the choices in the Menu of Actions and the system delivers the prompt shown in the same figure. Pressing "y" will complete the transaction and the traffic on WAN port 3-1 will be switched to WAN port 4-1. The main screen (Figure RDNT-6) now shows WAN port 4-1 as the active port and WAN port 3-1 as the redundant port. Note: There are no internal test functions available for WAN #3 or #4. Page 2-E-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Redundant Operations Node_1 14:33 | Slot C1 C2 P1 Installed CPU RCON | Slot IF U1 U2 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 P2 U3 FXS 2Wx8-9 P3 U4 FXO 2Wx8-9 U5 U6 U7 U8 RI HSU 366x2 HSU 366x2 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 RINGER W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 Status CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 PS2 a r a r a r a r 12-31-99 Status s s s s s s s s s s s sss ssssss ssssss ssssss s s s ssss Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-4. RCON WAN Cards (Two-Sided Chassis) Node_1 14:33 | | CSU actv term esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 w/to at&t 10e-4 none STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES 12-31-99 CSU actv term esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 w/to at&t 10e-4 none STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES OK to switch to the redundant WAN (y/n)? Save | Undo | Refresh | Xcon | Perf | Test | sWitch | Main Figure RDNT-5. RCON WAN Card Switchover (10-97) Page 2-E-5 Redundant Operations Node_1 14:33 Slot C1 C2 P1 Reference Guide v3.6 | Slot IF U1 U2 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 P2 U3 FXS 2Wx8-9 P3 U4 FXO 2Wx8-9 U5 U6 U7 U8 RI HSU 366x2 HSU 366x2 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 RINGER W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 Installed CPU RCON | CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 PS2 Alarms | Config | Status r a r a a r r a 12-31-99 Status s s s s s s s s s s s sss ssssss ssssss ssssss s s s ssss Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-6. RCON WAN Cards (Two-Sided Chassis) Cross-Connect WAN Redundancy In cross-connect systems, WAN redundancy requires the installation of a Dual WAN card with Relays (Model 8014) in slot W4. That WAN card with Relays acts as the redundant card for the WAN cards installed in slots W1 through W3 provided it is equipped with matching DSX, CSU or CEPT plug-in modules and that the plug-in modules are installed in the correct positions. This is known as 1xN redundancy and, following a redundancy switchover, the relay module on the 8014 switches the output of the redundant WAN card to the correct pins on the WAN connector of the Interface card. Note that if a Model 8014 Dual WAN card with Relays is installed in slots W1, W2 or W3, then it will function as a standard Dual WAN card. Also, if the plug-ins of a Model 8014 installed in slot W4 do not match those of a WAN card in slot W1, W2 or W3, then it cannot act as that card's redundant mate. Even though the system will not reject the card, it will simply not switch even if the active WAN card fails. Finally, if a standard WAN card is installed in slot W4, then WAN redundancy cannot be supported by the system. In cross-connect systems redundancy switchovers occur on a WAN card (not port) basis and the whole card must match the redundant card in slot W4 for the switchover to occur. Note: In the 8014 there must never be a physical T-1 connection to WAN 4 that is being used as a Redundant WAN. Figure RDNT-7 shows the main screen (status screen selected) of a cross-connect system. In this example the two CSU ports in WANs 1, 2 and 3 are backed-up by the two ports in W4. Page 2-E-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Redundant Operations Node_1 | | Slot C1 Installed CPU XCON Status P1/U1 P2/U2 P3/U3 P4/U4 W1/U5 W2/U6 W3/U7 W4/U8 IF S1 S2 RI E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CSU+CSU INTF+modem PS1 PS2 RINGER s s s s a a a r 12-31-99 14:33 sssssss sssssss sssssss s a a a r Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-7. XCON WAN Cards (Front-Loading Chassis) Figure RDNT-8 shows the main WAN card screen for the card in slot W1 with port 1-1 selected. The software command "sWitch" is selected from the choices in the Menu of Actions and the system delivers the prompt shown. Pressing "y" will complete the transaction and the traffic on the card in slot W1 will be switched to the 8014 card in slot W4. The main screen (Figure RDNT-9) now shows both ports on the card in slot W4 as active port and the ports on the card in slot W1 as redundant. Node_1 | | CSU actv xcon esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 w/to at&t 10e-4 n/a STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES 12-31-99 14:33 CSU actv term esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 w/to at&t 10e-4 none STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES OK to switch to the redundant WAN (y/n)? Save | Undo | Refresh | Xcon | Perf | Test | sWitch | Main Figure RDNT-8. Switchover in Cross-Connect System (10-97) Page 2-E-7 Redundant Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | | Slot C1 Installed CPU XCON Status P1/U1 P2/U2 P3/U3 P4/U4 W1/U5 W2/U6 W3/U7 W4/U8 IF S1 S2 RI E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CSU+CSU INTF+modem PS1 PS2 RINGER s s s s r a a a 12-31-99 14:33 sssssss sssssss sssssss s r a a a Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-9. XCON WAN Cards (Front-Loading Chassis) ADPCM Card This system can employ ADPCM cards that use voice compression technology to effectively increase the digital voice transmission capabilities of voice cards (E&M, FXS or FXO) or WAN links. See the ADPCM chapter in the Server Cards section for complete technical details about the ADPCM card. Each system allows one, two, or three ADPCM cards located in slots P1 through P3, depending on slot availability. In systems with two or three ADPCM cards, any one of the cards can be selected as the redundant backup. No restrictions exist about slot order. Figure RDNT-10 shows a console with three ADPCM cards. The ADPCM card in slot P1 is highlighted. Pressing the "Enter" key will bring up the ADPCM main screen shown as Figure RDNT-11. Page 2-E-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Redundant Operations Node_1 | Slot C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 W4 F1 F2 Installed | Status Slot IF U1 s s s s s s s s U2 s s s s s s s s U3 s s s s s s s s U4 ss U5 ss U6 ss U7 ss U8 RI ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 ADPCM-64 CSU+CSU CSU+CSU CEPT+CEPT CEPT+CEPT PS1 Installed INTF+modem ALR E&M 4Wx8-6 FXS 2Wx8-9 FXO 2Wx8-9 HSU 366x2 OCU-DPx5 FRAD-18 SRU-232x10 RINGER 12-31-99 14:33 Status s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s sssss sssss sssss sss ssssss ssssssss Alarms | Config | Del | accepT | Xcon | sYs | Logout | Oos | cpusWtch Figure RDNT-10. Selecting the Redundant ADPCM Card Node_1 | 1 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle STATE USER WAN TS ADPCM WAN ADPCM TS TYPE RATE SIG MODE CODING TC CGA stdby Save actv | Undo | 12-31-99 2 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 3 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 4 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle pg_Left | 5 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 6 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 7 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 14:33 8 stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle rdnt | Refresh | pg_riGht | Main Figure RDNT-11. The ADPCM Card Main Screen Highlighting the STATE parameter and pressing the "Enter" key shows a new option "rdnt." Selecting "rdnt" as the STATE for any of the ADPCM ports and saving the changes will cause the entire card to become the redundant ADPCM card for the system. The main screen will change and look like the one shown in Figure RDNT-12. (10-97) Page 2-E-9 Redundant Operations Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | 1 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle STATE USER WAN TS ADPCM WAN ADPCM TS TYPE RATE SIG MODE CODING TC CGA Save | Undo | | 12-31-99 2 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle Refresh | 3 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle pg_Left 4 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle | 5 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle pg_riGht | 6 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 7 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle 14:33 8 rdnt n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v 32k e&m u-law idle Main Figure RDNT-12. The ADPCM Card Main Screen Should either card in slots P2 or P3 fail for any reason, the entire voice compression network will switch to the redundant card in slot P1. When the Out of Service condition is repaired, the card in the slot that previously failed will become the redundant card for the system. The system does not have to have any of the ADPCM cards redundant. All three slots (P1-P3) can be used for traffic on ADPCM voice networks. Page 2-E-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card Introduction This section discusses the installation and operation of the CPU card. It describes the three types of CPU Cards and includes the following main topics: Ø CPU Card Settings Ø Printing Alarms Remotely Ø TCP/IP Network Management Ø Network Statistics Ø Routing The CPU Card controls all operations of the system. One CPU Card is required for all installations. Two Models 8801 or 8804 CPUs can be used for CPU redundancy. 8800 CPU Card The 8800 is the base model CPU Card. It supports up to two T1 or E1 WAN ports (on one WAN Card). The 8800 requires that you install the WAN Card in slot W1 and that all channels be assigned to time slots on links W1-1 and W1-2. A system that uses an 8800 CPU card is said to operate in "standard bus-connect" mode. The 8800 CPU does not support redundant operations. 8801 CPU Card The 8801 CPU card supports complex applications requiring more than two WAN ports and the ability to cross-connect DS0s between WANs. The 8801 supports up to four WAN Cards for a total of eight T1 or E1 WAN ports and has a built-in cross-connect module. A system that uses an 8801 CPU card is said to operate in "cross-connect" mode. Two Model 8801 CPUs can be installed in slots C1 and C2 to achieve CPU redundancy. The 8801 also supports 1xN WAN redundancy. (See the Redundant Systems chapter.) 8804 CPU Card The 8804 CPU supports two T1 or E1 WAN links in slot W1-1 and W 1-2 with a redundant card (similarly configured) in slot W2. It supports another two T1 or E1 WAN links in slot W3-1 and W3-2 with a redundant card (similarly configured) in slot W4. If the T1/E1 link in w1-1 fails for any reason, the system will automatically switch to the similarly configured card in slot w2-1 (W1-2 would switch to W2-2 in the same way). Slot W3 can support either a Single or a Dual T1/E1 WAN card. If the T1/E1 link in w3-1 fails for any reason, the system will automatically switch to the similarly configured card in slot w4-1 (w3-2 would switch to w4-2 in the same way). (10-97) Page 3-A-1 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Note that WAN ports in slot W3 can operate only in "terminate" mode and can only support 8202, 8213 or 8215 HSU card ports and OCU-DP ports from an 8247 5 or 10-port OCU-DP card. No other voice or data ports can be assigned to the WAN card in slot W3 in this mode. A system that uses an 8804 CPU is said to operate in "enhanced bus-connect" mode. Two Model 8804 CPUs can be installed in slots C1 and C2 to achieve CPU redundancy. The 8804 also supports 1x1 WAN redundancy. (See the Redundant Systems chapter.) CPU Card Settings Figure CPU-1 shows the main CPU card screen. Fill in the fields on the screen to configure the CPU for your site and system. Use the commands at the bottom of the screen to perform various system functions. Table CPU-1 lists the commands. Node_1 14:33 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 NODE ID SUPERUSER MANAGER OPERATOR VIEWER SYS CONT SYS LOC Node_1 ************** Manager Operator Viewer System Contact System Location SYS PH# ALRM SEQ ACO 5106231574 all cur C1 Host 3.60 Active Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 Voice 3.60 Save | Undo | Refresh | Prt | tcp/Ip | Main Figure CPU-1. CPU Card Screen The CPU screen has ten setting fields: Node ID, four passwords, System Contact Person, System Location, System Phone Number, Alarm Sequence and Alarm Cutoff. The Node ID must be unique within each user’s network for each unit. The “Superuser” password level is reserved for use by factory personnel only. The other three levels are referred to as "manager," "operator" and "viewer" respectively. The user sets these values on the CPU card screen, shown in Figure CPU1. Each password can be up to 14 characters long (alphabetic and numeric only). Note that passwords are case-sensitive. For more information about passwords, and changing the settings on this card, refer to “Logging On” in the Basic Operations chapter. Page 3-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card The System Contact Person is the name of the person to contact. The System Location is where the system resides. The System Phone Number is the phone number used by a remote user to engage the system in a VT-100 session (using either ISDN D channel dialing or the Remote Integrated Terminal System described in the Interface chapter). Up to ten numeric characters can be placed in this field. The Alarm Sequence establishes how the sequence number for alarms is generated. If this parameter is set to all, any alarm generated by the system will be assigned a sequence number. If this parameter is set to report , only those alarms set to report will be assigned a sequence number. See the Basic Operations chapter for additional information on setting alarm reporting characteristics. The Alarm Cut Off (ACO) option reports a status to the user based on the setting latch (condition held) or cur (current condition). The CPU screen also displays the status of each CPU (Active or Redundant), the type of CPU installed and the version of the voice and host software. Changing Passwords Depending on the security procedures for your network, you may need to change passwords frequently. The best passwords are at least 6 and no more than 12 characters long, are not found in a dictionary, and contain both letters and numbers. Because the system is case-sensitive, you can capitalize some of the letters in the passwords to give you more possible combinations. Perform the following steps to change the system passwords: 1. Log on to the system at the Manager access level and select the CPU card from the main screen. 2. Highlight the password you want to change and press the key. 3. Type the new password (up to 14 characters, alphanumeric, case sensitive (no spaces allowed)) over the old password and press the key. 4. Make sure the password appears as you want it (passwords are casesensitive) and save your changes. Entering Values in Fields To change the value in a field: (10-97) 1. Use the arrow keys to scroll to the field. 2. Press the key to open the entry area at the bottom of the screen. 3. If the system offers a set of choices, use the arrow keys to scroll to your choice and press again. If data entry is required, type in the data and press . 4. When desired entries have been made press s (Save) to save the entries. Page 3-A-3 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table CPU-1 shows the Menu of Actions for the CPU Card. Table CPU-1. CPU Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Prt tcp/Ip Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Initiates alarm printing to remote device. Refer to “Printing Alarms Remotely” in this section. Sets up communications with a Network Management System via SNMP or TELNET. Refer to “TCP/IP Network Management” in this section. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Printing Alarms Remotely Often integrated access controllers are placed in unsupervised locations (equipment closets, etc.). With no one present to detect alarms that might occur, the system administrators have no way of knowing that the unit is not operating properly. The basic solution to the Network Management problem is the Print Alarm feature. Each system can be programmed to call a predetermined telephone number at specific intervals and report the presence of selected system alarms. Alarms are chosen to print remotely by selecting the Report option in the alarm filters (see Basic Operations chapter). The user can employ either an external modem (with faster transmission rates) or the internal modem (2.4kbps) on many of the Interface cards to send system alarms to a remote logging device such as a printer or personal computer. If using the internal modem, the user should connect the remote device to a V.22 bis 2.4kbps asynchronous modem set to auto-answer, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity. When the modem connected to the remote logging device answers, the system sends the alarm messages as a string of ASCII characters formatted with carriage returns and line feeds and hangs up the call. More information on this process can be found later in this chapter. The network administrator can also call the phone number associated with the system modem and initiate a two-way, interactive VT-100 session with the system to determine the nature of the problem and dispatch technicians if necessary. Another Network Management solution is the TCP/IP feature discussed later in this chapter. If the TCP/IP network management system is active, the Print Alarm feature will not operate. Using the TCP/IP feature automatically converts alarm messages into SNMP traps for forwarding to downstream NMS equipment. Page 3-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card Figure CPU-2 shows the Print Alarm screen. Table CPU-2 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 off PRT ALARMS PRT PHONE# PRT RETRY PRT ATTEMPTS PRT MAJOR&CRIT PRT MINOR&INFO ELEMENT 1 ELEMENT 2 ELEMENT 3 ELEMENT 4 ELEMENT 5 ELEMENT 6 1 1 1 1 number alarm model address time severity Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-2. Print Alarm Screen Table CPU-2. Print Alarm Options and Defaults Parameter PRT ALARMS PRT PHONE# PRT RETRY PRT ATTEMPTS PRT MAJOR&CRIT PRT MINOR&INFO ELEMENT 1 ELEMENT 2 ELEMENT 3 ELEMENT 4 ELEMENT 5 ELEMENT 6 User Options off direct modem telephone number (up to 14 numbers) 1-60 1-99 1-500 1-32000 alarm model address time severity number empty alarm model address time severity number empty alarm model address time severity number empty alarm model address time severity number empty alarm model address time severity number empty alarm model address time severity number empty Notes 1 Default off 2 1 1 1 1 number 2 alarm 2 model 2 address 2 time 2 severity NOTES (10-97) 1. The Print Alarms option must be off if TCP/IP is on. 2. The choice of “empty” will eliminate that element from the NMS report. Page 3-A-5 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 PRT ALARMS The Print Alarms option sets parameters for alarm output to a remote device. The system uses the modem on the Interface card to call a remote device or Network Management System. The system sends the alarm information for all alarm filters set to Report (see “Alarms” in the Basic Operations chapter). Set the Printout Alarms setting to off to disable all external alarm-generated messages. The direct setting sends all alarms reported since the last report cycle to a local device through the DB-9 computer port. The modem setting sends all alarms reported since the last report cycle to a remote device through the modem port. The remote device may be any asynchronous ASCII device which can accept lines of text up to 80 characters long. It must support XON/XOFF flow control and be capable of attaching to an asynchronous dial-up modem. Figure CPU-3 shows an OOS alarm reported to a remote device. The device’s modem must be compatible with CCITT Rec. V.22 bis and support connections at 2.4kbps. Set the modem for auto answer mode. Both the device and modem should be set for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. PRT PHONE# The Print Phone Number is the number the modem dials when sending alarms to the remote device. The number may be up to 14 digits long. PRT RETRY The Print Retry field determines the number of time the system will wait between attempts to redial the remote device. The retry interval can be from 1-60 minutes. PRT ATTEMPTS 1. The Print Attempts is the maximum number of times the system attempts to contact the remote device before giving up. The number of attempts can range from 1-99. PRT MAJOR The Print Major field is the maximum number of time the system will wait from the occurrence of a major alarm until it places a call to the remote device to report it. The interval-cycle can be from 1-500 seconds. All alarm reports designated as "Major" (see “Alarms” in the Basic Operations chapter) will be reported at that time. For example, if the user specifies an interval-cycle of 300 seconds (5 minutes), every major alarm that occurs during a 5 minute period will be reported at the end of that cycle. The Print Major interval-cycle starts from the most recent of: 1. 2. 3. Page 3-A-6 The end of the last Major cycle (if no alarms occur). When parameters are saved using the Save command from the Menu of Actions. 40 seconds after the last alarm message is reported. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card PRT MINOR The Print Minor field is the maximum number of time the system will wait from the occurrence of a minor alarm until it places a call to the remote device to report it. The interval-cycle can be from 1-32,000 seconds. All alarm reports designated as "Minor" (see “Alarms” in the Basic Operations chapter) will be reported at that time. For example, if the user specifies an interval-cycle of 3,600 seconds (60 minutes), every minor alarm that occurs during a 60 minute period will be reported at the end of that cycle. The Print Minor interval-cycle starts from the most recent of: 1. The end of the last Minor cycle (if no alarms occur). 2. When parameters are saved using the Save command from the Menu of Actions. 3. 40 seconds after the last alarm message is reported. When the specified interval-cycle for major or minor alarms is reached, the system will send a list of the accumulated alarms sorted by the elements below. To avoid congestion, alarm reporting is limited at the remote device or Network Management System to the first 40 lines of non-reported alarms. The system will then wait 40 seconds and send the next 40 lines, and continue sending in that way (i.e. 40 lines, wait 40 seconds) until finished with the entire list of non-reported alarms. Forty seconds after the last alarm message is reported, the new interval-cycle starts. ELEMENT 1-6 The elements of the alarm configuration (see the Basic Operations Chapter), alarm, model, address, time, severity, number, or empty can be arranged in any order that is most helpful for the user. For instance, the user might want the order of the alarm configuration to be severity, time, model, address, alarm, and number, while another might want the sequence to be model, time, alarm, address, severity, and number. Elements 1-6 can order these variables in any way needed. NO=Node_1 AK=7 NU=00038 AL=OOS ML=8840 UN=P2 ON=07-20-95 14:44:12 OF=07-20-95 16:12:16 SV=C END Figure CPU-3. Remote Printout of Alarms For example, Figure CPU-3 shows the Node Name, "Node_1," Acknowledgment Number 7, Alarm Number 38, Alarm type is Out of Service, Model 8840, Address Number P2, Time on 7/20/95 at 14:44:12, Time off 7/20/95 at 16:12:16, and Severity is Critical. (10-97) Page 3-A-7 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table CPU-3 shows the Menu of Actions for the Print Alarms Screen. Table CPU-3. Print Alarms Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics and on other screens to redraw the screen. Returns to the CPU card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. TCP/IP Network Management This section presents another type of Network Management System supported by this unit for diagnosing and reporting trouble at unsupervised locations. SNMP alarm traps and TELNET configuration can transmit over this path. Both formats can use the 4kbps FDL (Facility Data Link) on a T1 link using ESF format, the SA4 on an E1 link, a full DS0 on a T1/E1 link, or the computer port of the Interface card using SLIP protocol. If you do not understand the NMS concepts of IP addressing, SNMP, SLIP, TELNET and Ping, please consult with your network administrator before attempting to install or repair components presented in this section. If the FDL is used to transmit and receive information, a Lucent Technologies DACSII (6.1 or higher) or DACSII ISx (3.0 or higher) is used to convert the FDL/IP information to a full DS0. (On a point-to-point circuit, a DACSII is not needed.) If you have a small number of remote units to supervise, one of the Network Management System options is to use a B7R (Bit-7 Redundant) card at the NMS site. One through eight remote units send alarm information on the FDL/SA4 of a DS1 to either a DACSII on eight individual DS0s and multiplex the contents into a single 38.4kbps asynch circuit using SLIP protocol for use by a communication server or terminal server for routing to a Local Area Network. (See B7R card chapter.) Using IP addresses, the network management center can communicate directly with the affected unit, diagnose the problem, and dispatch a technician if necessary. Figure CPU-4 shows how a typical system might be set up to make use of this feature. This figure shows eight integrated access controllers (from different geographic locations) reporting alarms through the TCP/IP interface to workstations at the network site using the procedure mentioned above. Page 3-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card System #1 4Kbps TCP/IP FDL Circuits System #2 Single 38.4Kbps Asynch SLIP Circuit System #3 Concentrator Unit DACSII System #4 B 7 R T1/E1 Terminal Server System #5 LAN Up to 8 DS0s System #6 Workstations System #7 System #8 Figure CPU-4. Typical TCP/IP Network Management System Figure CPU-5 shows the TCP/IP screen. Table CPU-4 shows the TCP/IP screen parameters and options. Node_1 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 | | Netstat Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 stdby 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 n/a n/a n/a 0.0.0.0 HOST IP STATUS HOST IP ADDR HOST NETMASK DEFAULT IP PORT DEFAULT IP SLOT DEFAULT IP UNIT RPT1 IP ADDR RPT1 COMMUN STR RPT2 IP ADDR RPT2 COMMUN STR RPT3 IP ADDR RPT3 COMMUN STR Ping Rev A2-0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 | rOute | Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-5. TCP/IP Screen (10-97) Page 3-A-9 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table CPU-4. TCP/IP Screen Parameters and Options PARAMETER HOST IP STATUS HOST IP ADDR HOST NETMASK DEFAULT IP PORT DEFAULT IP SLOT DEFAULT IP UNIT RPT1 IP ADDR RPT1 COMMUN STR RPT2 IP ADDR RPT2 COMMUN STR RPT3 IP ADDR RPT3 COMMUN STR User Options stdby actv IP address IP address off local wan n/a n/a IP address IP address IP address Notes serv 1 1 1 Default stdby 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 off n/a n/a 0.0.0.0 blank 0.0.0.0 blank 0.0.0.0 blank NOTES 1. The user options depend upon the selection in the Default IP Port selection. All user options are explained below. HOST IP STATUS The Host IP Status is the IP address status for this specific integrated access controller. HOST IP ADDR The Host IP Address is the IP address for this specific integrated access controller. If the B7R is used for this NMS, the Port IP address must be the same as the one entered in the ADDR field of that card. HOST NETMASK The Host Netmask is used to indicate how much of the IP address is used for host addressing and how much is used for network addressing. If the B7R card is used for this NMS, this address must be the same as the one entered in the NETMSK field of that card. DEFAULT IP PORT The Default IP Port setting tells the CPU card where IP packets will be sent or received. The options are off (to disable Network Management System), local (information will be sent over the DB-9 computer serial port to NMS equipment), wan (information will be sent over the WAN FDL or a DS0 [chosen on the WAN card main screen with ESF/NMS RPT option]), or serv (information sent over WAN DS0s through the Ethernet connection to the NMS equipment). If this parameter is set to local, wan or serv the Print Alarms feature (mentioned in the previous section) must be set to off. If local is chosen for this setting, the internal modem will not operate. Page 3-A-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card DEFAULT IP SLOT The Default IP Slot options are determined by the choice of Default IP Port. If off or local is selected for that parameter, this option will show n/a. If wan is selected, the options for this parameter will show W1-W4 (the WAN card slot that transmits and receives NMS information). If serv is selected, the options for this parameter are P1-P3 (the Server card slot that transmits and receives NMS information). DEFAULT IP UNIT The Default IP Unit options are determined by the choice of Default IP Port. If off or local is selected for that parameter, this option will show n/a. If wan or serv is selected above, the options for this parameter will be 1-2 (corresponding with the WAN or Server port). RPT1 IP ADDR The RPT1 IP Address is the IP address of the first Network Management System host running a SNMP trap server. RPT1 COMMUN STR The RPT1 Community String holds the community string for the first NMS host running a SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages that do not contain the correct string. There must be some entry in this field to enable RPT1. RPT2 IP ADDR The RPT2 IP Address is the IP address of the second Network Management System host running an SNMP trap server. RPT2 COMMUN STR The RPT2 Community String holds the community string for the first NMS host running an SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages that do not contain the correct string. There must be some entry in this field to enable RPT2. RPT3 IP ADDR The RPT3 IP Address is the IP address of the third Network Management System host running an SNMP trap server. (10-97) Page 3-A-11 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 RPT3 COMMUN STR The RPT3 Community String holds the community string for the first NMS host running an SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages that do not contain the correct string. There must be some entry in this field to enable RPT3. Menu of Actions Table CPU-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the TCP/IP screen. Table CPU-5. TCP/IP Screen Menu of Actions Action Ping Netstat rOute Save Undo Refresh Main Function Test to see if the connected device responds to an echo request message. After entering the IP address of the host device, the status line will display, "Testing . . ." The next message will tell if the host is alive or down. Displays the Network Statistics. See below. Shows the Routing screen. See Routing section below. Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics and on other screens to redraw the screen. Returns to the CPU card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Network Statistics The Network Statistics screens provide maintenance and diagnostic information for the different protocols supported by this equipment. Statistics begin to accumulate when the TCP/IP Port is changed from off to local or wan and will continue to store information until it is turned off. Figure CPU-6 shows the first of four network statistics screens. Figures CPU-7 through -9 show the other three screens. Page 3-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 CPU Card | C1 CPU XCON 8801 MTU Size Bytes Received Packets Received Packets Discarded Packets Dropped - Buffer Buffer Overflow Packets Sent Out Bytes Sent Out MTU Size Frames Received Frames Aborted on Receive Frames To Transmit from Above Frames Transmitted Frames Aborted on Transmit Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 14:33 NETSTAT Page 1 of 4 SLIP 240 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FDL 240 0 0 0 0 0 pgUp | pgDn | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-6. TCP/IP Network Statistics Screen SLIP The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Size field shows the largest number of userdata (e.g., the largest size of an packet) that can be sent in a single frame. The MTU for this system is 210 with overhead = 240. The Bytes Received field shows the number of bytes received by the local system from the network host. The Packets Received field shows the number of packets (unit of bytes, roughly similar to an IP datagram) received by the local system from the network host. The Packets Discarded field shows the number of packets sent by the network host that were discarded by the local system. Packets are discarded because they either exceed the MTU or are not complete. The Packets Dropped - buffer field shows the number of incoming packets that were dropped because there was not enough free memory to buffer them. The Buffer Overflow field shows the occurrences of buffer overflow at the local system. The Packets Sent Out field shows the number of packets transmitted by the local system to the network host. The Bytes Sent Out field shows the number of bytes transmitted to the network host by the local system. (10-97) Page 3-A-13 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 FDL The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Size field shows the largest number of bytes that can be sent in a single frame. The default MTU is 210 with overhead = 240. The Frames Received field shows the number of frames received by the local system from the network host. The Frames Aborted on Receive field shows the number of frames that were aborted when received by the local system from the network host. Frames are aborted because they either exceed the MTU or are not complete. The Frames to Transmit from Above field shows the number of frames that were sent by the local system to the TCP layer of the network host. The Frames Transmitted field shows the number of frames sent from the local system to the network host. The Frames Aborted on Transmit field shows the number of frames aborted when transmitted by the local system to the network host. Frames are aborted because they either exceed the MTU or are not complete. Node_1 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 14:33 NETSTAT Page 2 of 4 IP 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default TTL Datagrams Received Datagrams Discarded Datagrams Delivered Above Datagrams From Above Datagrams Sent TX Wait for RAM TX Aborted - mailbox short Messages Received Messages Discarded Messages Sent Echo Requests Received Echo Replies Sent Echo Requests Sent Echo Replies Received Dest Unreachable Sent pgUp | pgDn | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-7. TCP/IP Network Statistics Screen IP The Default TTL field shows the Time To Live for information packets from transmission to delivery. The TTL for this system is 255 seconds. The Datagrams Received field shows the number of IP datagrams (packets) received by the local system from the network host. Page 3-A-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card The Datagrams Discarded - checksum field shows the number of datagrams that were discarded by the local system. The Datagrams Discarded - protocol field shows the number of IP datagrams that were discarded by the local system because the protocol used is not supported. The supported transmit protocols are IP, ICMP, TCP and UDP. The supported receive protocols are IP and TCP. The Datagrams Delivered Above field shows the number of datagrams sent to the TCP layer of the network host to the local system. The Datagrams From Above field shows the number of information or traps sent by the local system to the UDP or TCP layer of the network host. The Datagrams Sent field shows the total number of datagrams sent by the local system to the network host. The TX Waits for RAM field shows the total number of datagrams sent by the local system which were delayed by lack of free RAM memory. The TX Aborted - mailbox short field shows the total number of datagrams aborted by the local system because of a mail subsystem overflow. ICMP The Messages Received field shows the number of ICMP messages received by the local system from the network host. The Messages Discarded field shows the number of ICMP messages by the network host that were discarded (for any reason) by the local system. The Messages Sent field shows the number of ICMP messages sent by the local system to the network host. The Echo Requests Received field shows the number of "ping" message requests received by local system by the network host. This figure is part of the total messages received. The Echo Replies Sent field shows the number of "ping" message requests transmitted to the network host. This figure is part of the total messages sent. The Echo Requests Sent field shows the number of "ping" requests sent to the network host by the local system. This figure is part of the total messages sent. The Echo Replies Received field shows the number of "ping" message replies received by the local system. This figure is part of the total messages received. The Destination Unreachable Sent field shows the number of ICMP messages that were discarded upon receipt by the network host because they were improperly addressed. (10-97) Page 3-A-15 CPU Card Node_1 Reference Guide v3.6 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 14:33 NETSTAT Page 3 of 4 TCP State = LISTEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Packets Received Packets Discarded - Checksum Packets Discarded - Port Packets Discarded - Window Bytes Delivered Above Bytes From Above Packets Sent ACKs Received Packets Sent - reset Packets Sent - ACK Packets Retransmitted RTT Increased RTT Decreased Connections Opened Connections Closed Connections Aborted Packets Tx Aborted - RAM pgUp | pgDn | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-8. TCP/IP Network Statistics Screen TCP Transmission Control Protocol is a transport layer, connection-oriented, end-to-end protocol. It provides reliable, sequenced, and unduplicated delivery of bytes to a remote or local user. TCP provides reliable byte stream communication between pairs of processes in hosts attached to interconnect networks. The Packets Received field shows the number of TCP packets received by the local system from the network host. The Packets Discarded - Checksum field shows the number of TCP packets that were discarded by the local system because the checksum failed. The Packets Discarded - Port field shows the number of TCP packets that were discarded by the local system because the port assignment was incorrect. The Packets Discarded - Window field shows the number of TCP packets that were discarded by the local system because the window data was incorrect. The Bytes Delivered Above field shows the number of information or traps sent from TCP layer of the network host to the local system. The Bytes From Above field shows the number of information or traps sent to the TCP layer of the network host from the local system. The Packets Sent field shows the total number of TCP packets that were transmitted to the network host by the local system. Page 3-A-16 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card The ACKs Received field shows the total number of acknowledgments that were received by the local system from the network host. The Packets Sent - reset field shows the total number of TCP packets that were transmitted by the network host to the local system. The Packets Sent - ACK field shows the total number of TCP acknowledgment packets that were transmitted by the network host to the local system. The Packets Retransmitted field shows the total number of TCP packets that were retransmitted by the local system to the network host. The RTT Increased field shows the number of times the retransmission time-out was increased because the system was busy. The RTT Decreased field shows the number of times the retransmission time-out was decreased because the system was not busy. The Connections Opened field shows the total number of connections that were opened by the local system to the network host. The Connections Closed field shows the total number of connections that were closed by the local system to the network host. The Connections Aborted field shows the number of times the connection was aborted because either the number of consecutive retransmission’s was equal to 10 or retransmission time-out was equal to 15 minutes. The Packets TX Aborted - RAM field shows the total number of packets sent by the local system which were aborted because of the lack of free RAM memory. Node_1 | C1 CPU XCON 8801 Rev C3-0 Ser 00202 | 12-31-99 14:33 NETSTAT Page 4 of 4 UDP 0 0 TELNET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SNMP 0 0 Packets From Above Packets Sent Bytes Received Bytes Received as Commands Bytes Delivered Above Bytes Replied as Commands Bytes From Above Bytes Sent Sessions Opened Sessions Closed TX Wait for Buffer PDUs Sent Traps Sent pgUp | pgDn | Refresh | Main Figure CPU-9. TCP/IP Network Statistics Screen (10-97) Page 3-A-17 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 UDP User Datagram Protocol is a transport layer, connectionless mode protocol, providing a datagram mode of communication for delivery of packets to a remote or local user. The Packets From Above field shows the number of UDP packets sent by the local system to the network host. The Packets Sent field shows the number of UDP packets transmitted from the local system to the network host. TELNET The Bytes Received field shows the total number of bytes that were received by the local system from the network host. The Bytes Received as Commands field shows the total number of bytes that were received as commands by the local network from the network host. The Bytes Delivered Above field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted by the network host to the local system. The Bytes Replied as Commands field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted as commands by the local system to the network host. The Bytes From Above field shows the total number of bytes that were received by the network host from the local system. The Bytes Sent field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted by the local system to the network host. The Sessions Opened field shows the total number of sessions that were opened by the local system with the network host. The Sessions Closed field shows the total number of sessions that were closed by the local system with the network host. The TX Wait for Buffer field shows the total number of transmissions that were delayed by the local system for free memory in the buffer. SNMP The PDUs Sent field shows the number of Protocol Data Units sent from the local system. A Protocol Data Unit is a data object exchanged by protocol machines, usually containing both protocol control information and user data. The Traps Sent field shows the total number of SNMP traps that were transmitted by the local system to the network host. Page 3-A-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 CPU Card Menu of Actions Table CPU-6 shows the Menu of Actions for the Network Statistics screen. Table CPU-6. Network Statistics Screen Menu of Actions Action pgUp pgDn Refresh Main Function Scrolls forward through network statistics one page at a time. Scrolls backward through network statistics one page at a time. Since the system does not update statistics automatically, the Refresh command must be used to update information in statistics fields. Returns to the CPU card IP screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Routing The system supports multi-point routing of Internet Protocol (IP) packets to either a local Network Management System over the computer port or to a remote NMS over the B7R card, timeslot #24 or the Facilities Data Link (FDL) of a T1 link. (For E1 links, the information is sent on the B7R card, timeslot #31 or the SA4.) If you want to use an entire timeslot (either 24 or 31) for remote NMS routing, no action needs to be taken. If a B7R card is used or you want to use the FDL or SA4, an additional selection must be made on the WAN card. For T1 links the selection is made on the ESF/NMS RP parameter and on E1 links it is made on the COM/NMS RP parameter. (See the WAN card and B7R card chapters for further information.) All packets arriving on any of the optional paths or the local port will be treated by the IP stack as follows: • If the packet's destination address matches that system's address, the packet is processed locally. • If the address is not the same, the unit will search the routing table to find a remote address that matches the destination of the packet. • If a match is not found for the packet, it is routed to the interface specified in the DEF DEST field. If the default destination matches the interface the packet arrived from, the packet is dropped. All IP addresses between the Remote Start and Remote End addresses must go to the same WAN link. If you are unclear about IP Addresses, please consult with your Network Administrator. Figure CPU-10 shows a typical routing application. Even though 24 integrated access controllers are used in this example, the number of remote units is virtually unlimited except for bandwidth and link-down considerations. (10-97) Page 3-A-19 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 S1 S2 S5 S3 S6 S4 S10 S18 S11 S12 S17 S15 S16 S7 S8 S13 S14 S9 S21 S19 S22 S23 S20 S24 S25 Comm Serv Figure CPU-10. Routing Feature Diagram In the diagram above, 24 integrated access controllers will transmit alarm information to an IP routing Controller (System 25) by the optional paths of separate WAN links. The network administrator assigns IP addresses for each system on the TCP/IP screen of each unit's interface card (PORT IP ADDR). System 20 is connected by any of the optional paths to System 25 which supports NMS equipment (the communications server) by either a local SLIP connection directly from the CPU card or any of the optional paths of a WAN link. In this example, all alarms received by any of the 24 Controllers will be forwarded to Controller 25 on a single WAN link. Each of the 24 reporting units use System 25's IP address as the RPT1 IP ADDR on the TCP/IP screen of its interface card. First routing is initiated by the off/on command for each sub-unit. The IP address for REM STRT is the lowest IP address of the sub-units controlled by that port. The IP address for REM END is the highest IP address of the sub-units controlled by that port. The local port is included to be able to transmit the IP packets generated by the routing unit to the same destination. In most cases, the DEF DEST of all units controlled by this router will be the same place (either the local port or optional WAN paths to a distant location). The column headings are associated with the incoming WAN link associated with the IP location of the remote systems. For example, if you expect incoming information from system #1 on WAN 1-1, you would assign the IP address for system #1 between the REM STRT and REM END for WAN 1-1. Figure CPU-11 shows the Routing screen and Table CPU-6 lists the options for that screen. Page 3-A-20 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | C1 CPU Card CPU XCON 8802 page: 1 of 1 IP STATIC ROUTING IP Net SubNetMask Rev C3-0 Ser 00672 | 12-31-99 14:33 SLOT/UNIT Save | Refresh | Add | dEl | Get | pgUp | pgDn | Main | Figure CPU-11. Routing Screen Table CPU-6. Settings for Routing Parameters Parameter IP NET SUBNETMASK SLOT/UNIT User Options a valid SubNet or Gateway address a valid Netmask IP address wan: W1-1 through W2-4 serv: P1-P3 user: not supported local: COMP Default ip ip w1-1 IP NET The IP Net field shows a valid SubNet or Gateway address of a device located on this system unit. SubNetMask The Remote Netmask field shows the Netmask of a device located remotely from this system. Any valid Netmask is acceptable. The remote netmask information is the same as that placed on the remote unit's TCP/IP screen. Slot/Unit The Default Destination specifies where to route packets received from a remote device and the routing device to downstream NMS equipment (either the optional paths of a WAN link or the local SLIP port). (10-97) Page 3-A-21 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table CPU-7. Routing Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Refresh Add dEl Get PgUp PgDn Main Function Saves changes to settings. Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics and on other screens to redraw the screen. Open the data entry screen to add a route Delete a route Get information on routing destinations Go to a previous page of routing paths Go to the next page of routing paths Returns to the CPU card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Adding Routes In the Routing Screen, type a (Add) to present a data entry screen. A data line appears near the bottom of the screen for the four address parameters of Table CPU-6. Use the right/left arrow keys to scroll to the desired field. Press to present the corresponding data entry field (Figure CPU-11). Type in the correct address parameters, up to three digits (0-255) in each segment of the address, using the right arrow key to move to the next segment. Press again to move the entered address into the data line. Use the left/right arrow keys to move on to the next address to be entered and repeat the process. The Slot/Unit field offers the entry categories shown in Figure CPU-12. Scroll to the desired category and press to present one of the choices shown in Table CPU-6. Scroll to the desired value and press . When valid address and destination parameters have been added, type s to save the address. The system will not save an invalid address. To exit the Add screen without saving press the up or down arrow key. Delete a Route In the Routing Screen, scroll to the route to be deleted. With the route highlighted, press e to delete. Get Information To obtain addressing information, press g for Get. The system displays the destination variables wan, serv, user, and local across the bottom of the screen. Use the left/right arrow keys to scroll to the desired destination and press to select. The choices available under each of these options are then displayed. Now highlight the desired option and press again to initiate the search. The system responds: Sending RIP Request. Please wait ... Press any key to cancel After the system sends RIP request, the IP Static Routing screen will return, displaying valid IP Net (address), SubNetMask, and Slot/Unit information. Page 3-A-22 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 CPU Card | C1 CPU XCON 8802 Rev C3-0 page: 1 of 1 IP STATIC ROUTING IP Net SubNetMask SLOT/UNIT 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 w1-1 Ser 00672 | 12-31-99 14:33 Save Figure CPU-12. Routing Address Entry Node_1 | C1 CPU XCON 8802 Rev C3-0 page: 1 of 1 IP STATIC ROUTING IP Net SubNetMask SLOT/UNIT 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 w1-1 wan serv user Ser 00672 | 12-31-99 14:33 local Save Figure CPU-13. Slot/Unit Options (10-97) Page 3-A-23 CPU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table CPU-8. Slot Unit Options Slot/Unit Options WAN SERV USER LOCAL Page 3-A-24 Description w1-1 through w4-2 P1 through P3 not supported Default w1-1 P1 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 ADPCM Card Introduction The 8871 ADPCM card is a plug-in resource card for the system. The card has 32 pairs of voice compression engines that accept input directly from voice, SRU or BRI cards in the same system unit or voice traffic on WAN links through the system. ADPCM cards require a matching card at the other end to decompress the voice channels to normal 64K operation. Except for SRU which uses h link to extract data from timeslot. Each pair of compression engines utilize one 64Kbps DS0 for two compressed channels. In Figure ADPCM-1 the eight numbers at the top of the screen represent the first four pairs of compression engines. Each engine can compress 64Kbps voice traffic to either 24Kbps, 32Kbps or 40Kbps (depending upon compression quality needed). The rate of any DS0 is 64Kbps, so the sum of the compression rates for engine #1 and #2 must equal that figure. If, for instance, you assign a 32Kbps circuit to engine #1, engine #2 can only accept a 32Kbps circuit. A 40Kbps circuit can only be paired with a 24Kbps circuit and vice-versa. The compression engines work in pairs. Engine numbers 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, are paired. Each member of the pair must have the same ADPCM WAN and ADPCM TS. Additionally, both members of the compression engine pair must be active before either port will operate. The ADPCM card can compress low speed asynchronous data transmission (19.2Kbps or less) from an SRU port that will occupy a 24Kbps engine. Each data circuit must be paired with a 40Kbps voice channel. It can also compress B channel voice traffic from the BRI card without restriction of compression rates. Each unit can have up to three ADPCM cards installed (two normal ADPCM cards and one redundant card). See the Redundant Operations chapter for further information about redundant ADPCM cards. The ADPCM card supports Transition Signaling as defined by ANSI T1.302-1989 with the exception of the Alarm bits. ANSI T1.302 specifies signaling at the 32Kbps compression rate. The ADPCM card uses this scheme for 24Kbps and 40Kbps although it is not included in the standard. Table ADPCM-1 summarizes the signals supported by each transcoder data rate. User channel configuration must adhere to these specifications. Table ADPCM-1. Signal Compression Rates Transcoder Rate 24Kbps 32Kbps Voice Quality (MOS)* 3.6-3.8 Range 4.0-4.3 Range Modem Data DTMF no under study up to 4.8 Kbps OK V.32 9.6 Kbps 40Kbps 4.0-4.3 Range up to 12 Kbps OK V.32 14.4 (tbd) * MOS - Mean Opinion Score based upon subjective evaluation (10-97) FAX no Group II Group III Page 4-A-1 ADPCM Card Reference Guide v3.6 ADPCM Card Settings Figure ADPCM-1 shows the ADPCM screen. Table ADPCM-2 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 | Version #:0.1 STATE USER WAN/SERV TS ADPCM W/S ADPCM TS TYPE RATE SIG MODE CODING TC CGA Save | P1 ADPCM-64x1 8871 1 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle 2 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle 3 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle Rev D0-0 4 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle Ser 00259 5 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle 6 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle | 12-31-99 7 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle 14:33 8 stdby n/a none n/a none n/a v&s 24K e&m u-law idle Save | Undo | Refresh | < | > | sWitch | Main Figure ADPCM-1. The ADPCM Card Screen Table ADPCM-2. ADPCM Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE USER WAN/SERV TS ADPCM W/S ADPCM TS TYPE RATE SIG MODE CODING TC CGA User Options stdby actv rdnt n/a uX-1 through uX-8 none w1-1 through w4-2 MORE BACK P1 P2 P3 n/a 01-24 01-31 w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 n/a 01-24 01-31 v&s v trnsp 24K 32K 40K n/a e&m fxs plar fxo u-law a-inv idle busy Default stdby n/a w1-1 01 w1-1 01 v&s 24K e&m u-law idle STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. When assigning ADPCM engine pairs for WAN traffic, set the State setting to stdby (standby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use. Page 4-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 ADPCM Card Setting the State to rdnt (redundant) for any port on an unused card will cause that card to act as the redundant back-up for all of the other ADPCM cards in that unit. Once a card is designated as a redundant ADPCM card the only way it can be used for regular ADPCM traffic is to change the state of the selected port back to either actv or stdby . When assigning ADPCM engine pairs from user cards, changing the port from stdby to actv and saving the selection information on the user card screen will cause the system to automatically assign an ADPCM engine. When the engine is assigned from a user card, no changes can be made from the ADPCM card screen to any of the fields. USER The User setting identifies the User card and port connected to this engine. This is the place where the ADPCM card will expect incoming (not compressed) voice, sub-rate data or B channel traffic. If assigned from a voice card, SRU or BRI card port, this selection will show the user slot and port number (i.e. u5-2 for the card in slot U5, port #2). If you are assigning a WAN timeslot, this setting will show n/a. WAN/SERV The WAN/SERV setting identifies the incoming WAN or server link connected to this engine. This is the place where the ADPCM card will expect incoming (not compressed) voice. This option shows the choices: none, w1-1through w4-2 and MORE on the first line of choices. If you select MORE it offers the choices of P1, P2, or P3. Choose none if you are assigning from a voice card or SRU card port; choose from w11 - w2-4 if assigning from a WAN card, and P1-P3, if assigning from a server card. TS The Timeslot parameter selects the specific timeslot on the WAN link chosen in the previous setting that the ADPCM card can expect incoming voice traffic. The options are determined by the equipment on the WAN link selected in the previous setting. If WAN 1-1 is equipped with either a CSU or DSX module, the options are 1-24. If a CEPT module is installed on that link, the options are 1-15 and 17-31 . If you are assigning from a voice card, SRU card or BRI card port, this setting will show n/a. ADPCM W/S The ADPCM W/S setting identifies the outgoing WAN link to which the engine is connected. This option shows the choices: none, w1-1through w4-2. If you are assigning either from a voice card, SRU or BRI card port or voice traffic from a WAN timeslot, this setting will show w1-1 through w4-2. This is the WAN link to which the ADPCM card will route outgoing (compressed) traffic. ADPCM TS The ADPCM Timeslot parameter selects the specific timeslot on the WAN link chosen in the previous setting that the ADPCM card will send outgoing compressed traffic. The options are determined by the equipment on the WAN link selected in the previous setting. If WAN 1-1 is equipped with either a CSU or DSX module, the options are 124. If a CEPT module is installed on that link, the options are 1-15 and 17-31 . (10-97) Page 4-A-3 ADPCM Card Reference Guide v3.6 TYPE The Type parameter identifies the voice and signaling requirements for the incoming circuit. The options are v (voice), v&s voice and (signaling) and trnsp (transparent). The v setting is used when the input to the ADPCM channel is a 64Kbps channel and inband signaling is not required. The v&s setting is used when the input to the ADPCM channel is a 64Kbps voice channel and the ADPCM card must provide inband signaling. The trnsp setting allows the user to map the output of SRU ports to the ADPCM channel. Sub-Rate Data will be clocked into the ADPCM channel at an input rate equal to 24Kbps and then passed transparently (non-compressed) through the ADPCM card to the appropriate WAN timeslot. This could be useful when the user has an odd number of voice channels and wants to utilize the empty engine pair of the last ADPCM channel. B channel traffic from the BRI card also uses the trnsp Type setting but is not restricted in its compression rates. If the engine is assigned from a voice card, this selection will show v&s. If assigned by an SRU or BRI card, it will show trnsp . It cannot be changed from this screen. RATE The Rate parameter identifies the compression requirements for the incoming circuit. The options are 24K, 32K and 40K (the pair of engines must be equal to 64Kbps). If this engine is assigned from a user card port, the selection will show the value that was chosen on that port. It cannot be changed from this screen. SIG MODE The Signal Mode parameter identifies the type of signaling required for the incoming circuit. If v&s was chosen in the Type setting, the options are e&m, fxs, plar and fxo. If v or trnsp were chosen in the Type setting, the only option is n/a. If this engine is assigned from a user card, the selections are uX-1 through uX-8. The default is n/a. CODING The Coding parameter identifies the PCM format required for the incoming circuit. The choices are u-law or a-inv . If this engine is assigned from a voice or BRI card, this selection will show the value that was selected for that port. If this engine is assigned from an SRU card, this selection will show u-law . It cannot be changed from this screen. Page 4-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 ADPCM Card TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning CGA parameter identifies the type of trunk conditioning required for the incoming circuit. If v&s were chosen in the Type setting, the options are idle or busy. If trnsp or v was chosen in the Type setting, the only option is n/a. If this engine is assigned from a voice card, this selection will show the value that was selected on the voice card port. If assigned from an SRU or BRI card port, the field will show n/a. It cannot be changed from this screen. Menu of Actions Table ADPCM-3 shows the Menu of Actions for the ADPCM Card. Table ADPCM-3. The ADPCM Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh < > sWitch Main (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Scroll to the left Scroll to the right Switches an active ADPCM card to its redundant mate. Returns to the main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Page 4-A-5 ADPCM Card Page 4-A-6 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Introduction This section discusses the WAN cards and the plug-in modules that define their communications functions. It covers physical configuration of the plug-in modules and their installation as well as the software configuration, monitoring and testing of the cards after installation. WAN cards manage the flow of data through your network. They are also the point of T1/E1 termination and generate or receive clocking. Both CSU and DSX modules are used to connect to T1 facilities operating at 1.544 Mbps. The CEPT module is used internationally for connection to a 2.048 Mbps E1 facility. WAN cards equipped with CSU or DSX modules will also act as the "near end" termination point for Subscriber Loop Carrier (SLC96) facilities as outlined in publication TR-TSY-000008, Issue 2, August 1987. Additional information about WAN card functions is included in the Installation chapter, System Operations chapter and Redundancy chapter. 811 DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module The DSX/CEPT plug-in module supports either DSX or CEPT modes. It is mounted on the WAN Card. DSX is a T1 operation and CEPT is an E1 operation. Jumper settings on the module specify DSX or CEPT operation. Information about installing the module and changing jumper settings is included in this chapter. 812 CSU Plug-in Module The CSU plug-in module is required for Channel Service Unit (CSU) operation in a T1 environment. Like the 811, it is mounted on the WAN Card. 820 HDSL E1 Plug-in Module The HDSL E1(High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line) module is a plug-in for the 8011 HDSL E1 WAN card. It provides transport for E1 rate (2.048 mbps) data over copper cable without mid-span repeaters or conditioning. 8000 Single T1/E1 Link Card The single T1/E1 Link Card is the basic WAN Card. It has a single port for DSX/CEPT or CSU operation. 8010 Dual T1/E1 Link Card The dual T1/E1 Link Card has two ports for either DSX/CEPT or CSU operation or a combination of the two. The Dual T1/E1 Link Card will work with only one plug-in module as long as the WAN port without the plug-in module remains in the standby state. However, a CGA_RED alarm will be generated for that port. (10-97) Page 5-A-1 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 8014 Dual T1/E1 Link Card (with Relays) In Cross-Connect systems, the dual T1/E1 Link Card (with relays), when placed in slot W-4, acts as a redundant card for up to three standard WAN Cards located in slots W-1, W-2 and W-3. This is known as 1xN redundancy. The relay module on this card will switch its output to the correct pins on the WAN connector on the Interface Card. If placed in any other slot, it will behave like an ordinary WAN card. Note: If the plug-ins of the Model 8014 installed in slot w4 do not match those of a WAN card in slot w1, w2 or w3, then it cannot act as that card’s redundant mate. 8011 HDSL E1 WAN Card The 8011 HDSL E1 WAN Card is a dual-port card that provides HDSL services by incorporating the 820 HDSL E1 plug-in module. Page 5-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card 811 WAN Module When installing the 811 CSU/DSX module on the 8000 WAN or 8010 WAN, there are situations in which the plastic standoffs do not allow the module to seat correctly on the WAN board (see Figure WAN-1). TOP VIEW HOLES for Plastic Standoffs Side View Remove all plastic standoffs Figure WAN-1. Removal of Plastic Standoffs - 811 WAN Module When assembling and installing the module on the WAN card, it is our advice that the plastic standoffs be removed to eliminate the possibility of errors on the associated T1 or E1 lines. For this reason, the plastic standoffs are no longer being supplied by the manufacturer for new WAN modules. (10-97) Page 5-A-3 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module (811) Rev E1+ The Model 811 DSX/CEPT Revision E1+ plug-in module (see Figure WAN-2 and WAN-3) provides jumper settings for impedance compensation. The 811 offers either T1 or E1 (75Ω or 120Ω operation). To configure the 811, change the jumper positions on the pins according to Figures WAN-4 through WAN-6. The unit is shipped as shown in Figure WAN-4. Jumpers Figure WAN-2. 811 DSX/CEPT Module (Top View) Figure WAN-3. 811 DSX/CEPT Module (End View) Figure WAN-4. Jumper Settings for T1 Operation Figure WAN-5. Jumper Settings for E1 (75Ω) Figure WAN-6. Jumper Settings for E1 (120Ω) Page 5-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module (811) Rev A1-D1 The Model 811 DSX/CEPT Revision A1-D1 plug-in module (see Figure WAN-7 and WAN-8) provides jumper settings for impedance compensation. The 811 offers either T1 or E1 (75Ω or 120Ω operation). To configure the 811, change the jumper positions on the pins according to Figures WAN-9 through WAN-11. The unit is shipped as shown in Figure WAN-9. Jumpers Figure WAN-7. 811 DSX/CEPT Module (Top View) Figure WAN-8. 811 DSX/CEPT Module (End View) Figure WAN-9. Jumper Settings for T1 Operation Figure WAN-10. Jumper Settings for E1 (75Ω) Figure WAN-11. Jumper Settings for E1 (120Ω) (10-97) Page 5-A-5 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Configuring the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module 811-F 811-F Jumpers set to E1-75 Figure WAN-12. 811 DSX/CEPT Module (Top View) The DSX/CEPT 811-F module is shown above in Figure WAN-12. This module may be optioned for T1, E1/120 Ohms or E1/75 Ohms. The specific jumper option configuration is shown on the card itself. The jumpers shown on this graphic are set to E1/75 Ohms. Page 5-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Setting Jumpers for Balanced/Unbalanced E1 Operation E1 links can be set either to be balanced or unbalanced by setting jumpers on the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module (811) or the 1183 external distribution panel, or both. (See Table WAN-1 for information on which revisions of the DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module have jumpers.) The 1183 and 118320 connector block mounts in place of the cover on the 8916 and 891620 front-loading chassis (see Figure WAN-13) and connects to the Interface Card via a 50-pin cable. Each BNC connector has its own jumper. The 1184 connector block mounts on the 8918xx chassis. Table WAN-1. Selectability of Bal/Unbal jumpers on the DSX/CEPT module (by revision) Revision Ø Ú DSX/CEPT Module 811 81120 A Yes No B Yes No C n/a n/a D Yes n/a E No n/a F No n/a RX Rx TX TX Rx Rx TX TX Rx Rx TX TX Rx UNBAL BAL Rx TX TX Rx Options on the Rear UNBAL BAL RX 10193 Figure WAN-13. 1183 E1 Interface Adapter Balanced Operation For balanced E1 operation, the jumpers on both the 1183 panel and each DSX/CEPT Plug-in Module should be set to "balanced" prior to installation. Unbalanced Operation For unbalanced E1 operation, the jumpers should be set to "unbalanced" in one location only, and set to "balanced" in all other cases. When multiple cards with jumpers are installed, the unbalanced jumper should be set on the card nearest the E1 line. When the 1183 or 1184 panel is present, it is considered nearest to the E1 line, and the corresponding jumper on the rear of the panel would be set to "unbalanced" while all other module jumpers would be set to "balanced." (10-97) Page 5-A-7 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Installing CSU, DSX/CEPT Modules (811, 812, 820) Plug-in modules used to activate WAN cards must be installed prior to insertion of the WAN card into the unit. Figure WAN-13 shows a diagram of the WAN card and the correct placement of these modules. If, for example, your system had a T1 link (DSX) and an E1 link (CEPT), you would receive two DSX/CEPT modules. Using Figure WAN-14 as a guide, place the DSX module in the slot reserved for WAN 1-1 (reference only, not shown this way on actual card). Insert the pins for TX in JP #10, while simultaneously inserting the pins for RX in JP #9 and the 24-pin end connector pins in JP #6. After changing the jumpers to convert the DSX module to CEPT, place the CEPT module in the slot reserved for WAN 1-2. Insert the TX pins into JP #15, the RX pins into JP #14, and the 24-pin end connector pins into JP #13. The CSU module connectors are inserted in the same manner. JP14 JP15 (WAN 1-2) XILINX XILINX Power JP13 Bus Edge Connector JP6 (WAN 1-1) JP10 JP9 Retaining Figure WAN-14. Inserting DSX/CEPT/CSU Modules WAN Card Settings for CSU/DSX Since both CSU and DSX configurations are T1 operations, Figure WAN-15 shows the WAN card screen for CSU/DSX operation. Table WAN-2 lists the CSU/DSX settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values. For information about cross-connects and the timeslot map used to connect your WAN to voice and data ports or equipment, see the System Operations chapter. Page 5-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card In addition to the Local and Line Loopbacks described below, a Single or Dual Link card that is equipped with a CSU plug-in module will recognize and respond to industry-standard T1 loop-up and loop-down codes that are generated from the network or from a remote device. It will ignore those codes if the Single or Dual Link card is equipped with a DSX plug-in module. Node_1 14:33 STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP | W1 CSU+DSX CSU stdby xcon esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 off w/to at&t 10e-4 n/a none 8010 Rev A6-2 STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 DSX stdby xcon esf b8zs n/a 133 126 none off off off 01 off w/to at&t 10e-4 n/a none Save | Undo | Refresh | Xcon | Perf | Farstat | Test | sWitch | Main Figure WAN-15. Typical WAN Card Main Screen for T1 CSU or DSX (10-97) Page 5-A-9 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table WAN-2. Parameter Options and Defaults for CSU/DSX Operations Parameter STATE MODE FORMAT LINE CODE PULSE LINE LEN SLIP LIM AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN LB DET ESF/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP User Options stdby act term d-i xcon d4 esf slc96 slcd4 ami b8zs n/a trnsp Z15s 0 7.5 15.0 126 138 none tcodr off on off on off clr 01-24 off llb plb nlb w/to on off none at&t ansi c-fdl c-b7r 10e-4 thru 10e-9 none n/a none OOS CGA none 1 2 3 4 Notes 1 2 3 4 efdl 5 6 7 Default stdby xcon esf b8zs n/a 0 126 none off off off 01 off w/to at&t 10e-4 n/a none NOTES Page 5-A-10 1. Valid options for Bus Connect systems are term and d-i. The only valid option for Cross-Connect systems is xcon. 2. These options are valid only if you have a CSU and the Line Code is ami. If you have a CSU and the Line Code is b8zs, then this setting will default to n/a. If you have a DSX module, then this setting will always default to n/a. 3. These options are valid only if you have a CSU. If you have a DSX module, then the possible options are 0 (default), 133, 266, 399, 533, 655, and csu. 4. The settings for AIS/ALM vary greatly by the settings of other parameters. A complete matrix of AIS/ALM settings is shown as Table WAN-4 later in this chapter. 5. If the format is d4 or slc96, the only option to appear will be none. 6. If there is no redundant WAN card in the appropriate slot the only option that will appear is n/a. 7. Selection of GROUP is a two-step process. After identifying the group number (1-4), the user must select the secondary group (A, B or C). A which point TC ODR will then become available. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card WAN Card Parameters The following paragraphs describe the parameters for the DSU/DSX WAN cards shown in Figure WAN-15 and Table WAN-2. STATE In standby state, the WAN port is electrically disconnected from the external network. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) when setting up your WAN links, then change it to active (actv) when starting normal operations. MODE In bus-connect systems, WAN cards have two possible modes of operation, Terminal and Drop-and-Insert. Terminal (term) mode is for channel bank applications. All timeslots must connect to a port on a user card or remain unconnected. Drop-and-Insert (d-i) mode automatically connects all timeslots on WAN link #1 to the corresponding timeslots on WAN link #2 of the same card. You can assign any or all of the timeslots to voice and data ports by overriding the automatic setup. See the Systems Operations chapter for more information about using these two modes, and about timeslot maps in general. In cross-connect systems, the Mode automatically defaults to (xcon). FORMAT The Format setting specifies the framing to be used on the WAN link so that it matches the framing used by your T1 carrier. Set the Format parameter based on the type of framing your T1 carrier requires. If you are using an external Channel Service Unit (CSU), the framing format must match that of the CSU. The options are d4 (normal superframe), esf (extended superframe) and slc96 (subscriber loop carrier). Table WAN-3 (on the next page) lists the DS0 time slots and the corresponding SLC assignments (taken from TR-TSY-000008). LINE CODE The Line Code setting matches the coding used by your T1 interface to that used by your T1 carrier or CSU. Set the Line Code setting based on the type of encoding your T1 carrier uses. If you are using an external CSU, the line coding must match that of the CSU. The options are ami and b8zs. PULSE For CSU modules configured for ami mode only, the user must also specify if the system should ensure pulse density (also known as ones density) or if that responsibility belongs to the attached customer equipment. In z15s mode, the system will monitor the outbound data stream and will place a “1” in the 16th bit position whenever it detects fifteen consecutive zeros. Obviously, this can lead to data corruption. In Transparent mode (trnsp), the system will pass all incoming data transparently (the DTE must provide 1s density). If the Line Code parameter for the CSU is b8zs, then Pulse will default to trnsp. If the WAN link is equipped with a DSX plug-in, then this option will automatically default to n/a. (10-97) Page 5-A-11 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table WAN-3. DS0-SLC Conversion Table DS0 Time Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SLC Channel Number Shelf A Shelf B Shelf C* 1 25 49 13 37 61 2 26 50 14 38 62 3 27 51 15 39 63 4 28 52 16 40 64 5 29 53 17 41 65 6 30 54 18 42 66 7 31 55 19 43 67 8 32 56 20 44 68 9 33 57 21 45 69 10 34 58 22 46 70 11 35 59 23 47 71 12 36 60 24 48 72 * Shelf C and D not supported in this release Shelf D* 73 85 74 86 75 87 76 88 77 89 78 90 79 91 80 92 81 93 82 94 83 95 84 96 LINE LEN Use the Line Length setting to adjust the T1 signal strength to the distance that it must travel before it encounters the next T1 device or repeater. For the DSX module, the options are 133, 266, 399, 533, 655 feet or csu which is used to connect to the equipment side of a co-located external CSU. In addition, there is an option called 0 that allows the DSX module to talk to the network side of a co-located external CSU over a short-distance four-wire cable. For a CSU module, the three options are 0, 7.5 and 15.0 which define the amount of attenuation (in dB) that will be applied to the T1 signal before it is transmitted. Provisioning the circuit for 0 will result in the strongest possible signal whereas a setting of 15.0 will generate the weakest possible signal. SLIP LIM Slip Limit defines how many bits of wander the T1 aggregate card will tolerate before forcing a frame slip. The options are 126 and 138 bits which correspond to all old and more recent versions of the relevant specification. Page 5-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card AIS/ALM The AIS/ALM setting, allows the user to specify the type of “keep-alive” signal known as AIS/ALM (Alarm Indication Signal/Alarm) that the system will generate on one T1/E1 should the other fail. The AIS/ALM setting is dependent upon the format selected for this WAN unit. Table WAN-4 shows AIS/ALM settings for Bus Connect and Cross-Connect systems using the different FORMAT settings. Table WAN-4. AIS/ALM Settings System Bus Connect/RB Connect Cross-Connect Format D4 ESF SLC-96 D4 ESF SLC-96 AIS/ALM none none, frm, unfrm note, orb13, orb16 none, tcodr none, frm, unfrm note, orb13, orb16 In Bus Connect and Redundant Bus Connect systems, the only option available for D4 framing is none (no AIS signal is to be generated). The options for ESF framing are none, frm for a framed alarm signal and unfrm for an unframed alarm signal. The options for SLC-96 framing are note (network office terminating equipment), orb16 (Office Repeater Bay - 16 frames) and orb13 (Office Repeater Bay - 13 frames). In Cross-Connect systems, the options available for D4 framing are none (no AIS signal is to be generated) and tcodr (transcoder operations). Selection of tcodr can only be assigned after selection of the Group option. The options for ESF framing are none, frm for a framed alarm signal and unfrm for an unframed alarm signal. The options for SLC-96 framing are note (network office terminating equipment), orb16 (Office Repeater Bay - 16 frames) and orb13 (Office Repeater Bay - 13 frames). LINE LB The Line Loopback setting controls looping of the full T1/E1 line back to the network, as shown in Figure WAN-16. The options are off and on. When on, this setting allows end-to-end testing of the line. LOCAL LB The Local Loopback setting controls looping of the full T1/E1 line back to the PCM bus, as shown in Figure WAN-16. The options are off and on. When on, this setting allows testing of local equipment. (10-97) Page 5-A-13 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Network T1/E1 Line Loopback WAN Card Local Loopback PCM bus Figure WAN-16. WAN Card Line and Local Loopbacks CH LB The Channel Loopback setting allows you to select the type of local loopback for individual DS0 channels or the WAN aggregate. A channel loopback loops a single DS0 channel back towards the PCM bus (see Figure WAN-17) and cannot be used to loop multiple DS0s or a portion of a DS0. Refer to user cards for other loopback options which may allow you to loop part of a channel or multiple channels. The loopback can be off or clear (clr). “Clear” means that the entire 64kbps clear channel will be looped back, but without the Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS), if any, that is embedded in this channel. Page 5-A-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Network T1/E1 WAN Card PCM bus Figure WAN-17. WAN Card Channel Loopback LB ADDR The Loopback Address setting, in conjunction with the Channel Loopback setting, specifies which channel is to be looped back. Only one channel may be looped back at any one time for each T1 link. The valid selections for T1 lines are 1-24. LB GEN The Loopback Generate setting generates in-band diagnostic codes that are sent to the remote equipment These codes are ANSI T1.403 compatible with DS1 networks and allow you to command a latching loopback at remote DS1 equipment. The options are off, llb (Local Loopback), plb (payload Loopback [when the entire signal, excluding the framing bit, is looped back]) and nlb (Network Loopback). LB DET This option allows the card to detect DS1 channel loopbacks. When set to off, no T1 loopbacks can be detected. When set to on, T1 loopbacks will be detected and maintained until a loop down is detected. The with/time-out (w/to) is the same as on except that if no loop down is detected after 10 minutes, the loopback will selfterminate. (10-97) Page 5-A-15 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 ESF/NMS RP This setting specifies the format in which performance statistics for the T1 link will be gathered and stored in the system. In ESF mode, these performance statistics are accessible to the carrier over the Facilities Data Link (FDL) as well as to you through the user interface. The options are none, at&t, ansi, both, c-fdl and c-b7r. The at&t option means that the statistics are gathered in accordance with AT&T Publication 54016 whereas the ansi option means that the ANSI T1.403 specification will be used. You can also specify that the information should be stored in both AT&T and ANSI modes simultaneously by selecting both. Performance statistics are also available for D4 formatted T1 lines. See the section on T1 Performance Monitoring in this chapter for more detailed information on this topic. The choice of c-fdl disables telco-side capability to access performance monitoring information. The c-fdl option sends and receives network management information over the facility data link. The c-b7r option sends and receives the same information over timeslot #24 on the WAN link highlighted. EER THRHD The Excessive Error Rate Threshold selects the error rate at which an alarm is declared. This setting interacts with the EER setting in the Alarm Filters of your system. (See Basic Operations chapter.) The options are 10e-4 through 10e-9 or none. RDNT RULES The selection of Redundancy Rules will define the method of determining what event will trigger a WAN port to switch to its redundant mate. The options are none, OOS or CGA. See the Redundancy Chapter for more information about redundant WAN operations. If there is no redundant WAN card in the appropriate slot or there is an ISDN or ADPCM card in the system, the only option that will appear is n/a. GROUP The Group setting identifies a method of link-fail alarm propagation from upstream trunks to downstream tributaries when the system is configured for transcoder. Selection of group is a two-step process. After identifying the group number (1-4), the user must select the secondary group (A [child group], B [child group] or C [parent group]). Figure WAN-18 shows two Integrated Access Controllers with "parent-child" groupings. Child groups are designated as "A" and "B." Parent groups are designated "C." At this time TCODR may be turned on if alarms are to be propagated to distant end. Page 5-A-16 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Tributary Tributary Trunk W1-1 (A) (C) W1-2 (B) Device #1 W3-1 (A1) (C1) WAN2-1 W3-2 (B1) Device #2 Controller #2 Controller #1 Figure WAN-18. Using WAN Groups For the purposes of this discussion, the WAN links between the Device and the Integrated Access Controller (A, B, A1, and B1) will be called “tributaries” and the WAN link between the two Controller Units (C and C1) will be referred to as a “trunk.” In the normal condition (no WAN groups selected), a failure on any of the tributaries supplying Device #1 would be reported at Integrated Access Controller #1 and Device #1 only. A failure of the trunk (C to C1) would be reported at Controller #1 and #2 only. When Groups are created at both systems, a trunk failure (C to C1) will inform all of the associated tributaries (A and B, A1 and B1) of that condition. When Groups are used in conjunction with the Network Management option (mentioned earlier) and the AIS/ALM is set to tcodr, a failure of any of the tributaries will propagate the failure through the trunk to the associated tributary at the other end (A to A1 or B to B1). The following notification procedure is followed: 1. A Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, Error Rate Exceeded or AIS failure of the transmit leg of W1-1(A) between Device #1 and Integrated Access Controller #1 occurs. 2. Controller #1 detects the failure on the receive leg and declares an alarm for W1-1(A). 3. Controller #1 sets the A Bit (Yellow Alarm) in the transmit leg of W11(A). Device #1 detects this condition and knows not to use W1-1(A). 4. Controller #1(C) sends an alarm message to Controller #2 (C1) that W11(A) is either CGA_RED or AIS. 5. Controller #2 sets the transmit leg of W3-1(A1) into AIS (CGA_RED). Device #2 detects this condition and knows not to use W3-1(A1). When the original failure is corrected, the alarm is also cleared for downstream tributaries. (10-97) Page 5-A-17 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table WAN-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the CSU/DSX main WAN card screen. Table WAN-5. WAN Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Xcon Perf Farstat Test SWitch pArs Main Page 5-A-18 Function Saves changes to settings Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Shows the cross-connect map for each WAN port. See the System Operations section for a detailed description of cross-connect features. Brings up the performance monitoring screen for the near end system. See the Performance Monitoring section below. Opens performance monitoring screen for Far-end Statistics Initiates and monitors testing of all WAN card ports. Refer to Test section below. Allows the user to switch wan port operations to the redundant mate. See the Redundant Operations section. Not supported in this release. Reserved for future use. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Cross-Connect (XCON) The Cross-Connect (Xcon) command in the Main WAN screen allows you to view the Cross-Connections that have been set up in the system. Highlight one of the WANs on the card and type x (Xcon) to select Cross-Connect. Either an E1 screen (Figure WAN19) or a T1 screen (Figure WAN-20) will appear, depending upon the WAN highlighted. This is a display-only screen. Timeslot and cross-connect configuration are discussed in the System Operations chapter of this manual. Node_1 14:33 TS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 XCON frame u5-1 u5-2 u5-3 u5-4 u5-5 u5-6 u5-7 u5-8 u6-1 u6-2 u6-3 u6-4 u6-5 u6-6 u6-7 | W2 CSU+CEPT TS align A-01 A-02 A-03 A-04 A-05 A-06 A-07 A-08 A-09 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 8010 CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit Rev A6-2 TS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Ser 11132 XCON cas u7-1 u7-2 u7-3 u7-4 u7-5 u7-6 u7-7 u7-8 u8-1 u8-2 u8-3 u8-4 u8-5 u8-6 u8-7 TS A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A=31 | 12-31-99 CIRCUIT_ID 64k user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit user_circuit Refresh | Test | Main Figure WAN-19. E1 Cross-Connect Display (10-97) Page 5-A-19 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 XCON | W2 CSU+CEPT TS 8010 Rev A6-2 CIRCUIT_ID TS 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Ser 11132 XCON TS | 12-31-99 CIRCUIT_ID Refresh | Test | Main Figure WAN-20. T1 Cross-Connect Display Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring is supported on all WAN aggregates. The performance monitoring screen is accessed by typing the p (Perf) command from the WAN card main screen Menu of Actions. Performance statistics are accumulated for 15 minute increments that include the current period and the previous 96 periods that are accessed by the pgUp and pgDn commands from the Menu of Actions. In the T1 environment, an error is defined as any CRC6, Controlled Slip or Out of Frame error for "esf" format and any Bipolar Violation (BPV), Controlled Slip or Out of Frame error for the "d4" format. In the E1 environment, an error is defined as any CRC4, Controlled Slip or Out of Frame error. Figure WAN-21 shows the T1 performance monitoring screen (the E1 screen is similar except for the Menu of Actions). The performance statistics are gathered and displayed in fifteen-minute intervals. Periods when no seconds have accumulated are represented by lines in each of the columns. Table WAN-8 identifies the error conditions. Two sets of registers accumulate performance data for T1 WAN links. The user registers and the network registers are driven by the same errored events. However, they can be cleared at separate times. The user may view both the user and network registers but may only clear the user registers. The network has access to only the network registers and can clear only network registers. E1 WAN links have only one set of registers. Table WAN-9 shows the Menu of Actions for the Performance Monitoring Screen. Page 5-A-20 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Node_1 14:33 | W1 CSU+DSX 8010 Rev A6-2 Unit 1 PERFORMANCE USER REGISTERS CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL ES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS: UAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y=YEL N=NOS BES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T=Test Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 Sec. 167 of 900 LOFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L=LOS SLIP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O=OOS STATUS . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . B=BPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E=ERR Refresh | pgUp | pgDn | uSerregs | Networkregs | Clearregs | Main Figure WAN-21. Performance Monitoring Screen (10-97) Page 5-A-21 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table WAN-8. Performance Monitoring Displays Parameter Display ES Errored Seconds (ES) registers the number of seconds with one or more CRC6 (ESF), BPV (D4) or CRC4 (E1) errors, OR one or more OOFs, OR one or more Controlled Slips. UAS Unavailable Seconds (UAS) shows the number of seconds during which service is unavailable. An unavailable signal state is declared after ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) are logged. An unavailable state is cleared after ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds are logged. Unavailable Seconds are also accumulated if the card has an out-of-service (OOS) condition. SES A Severely Errored Second (SES) is any second with 320 or more CRC6 (ESF), BPV (D4) or CRC4 (E1) errors, OR one or more OOF errors. BES A Bursty Errored Second (BES) is any second with more than one and less than 320 CRC6 (ESF), BPV (D4) or CRC4 (E1) errors. LOFC The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) is the accumulation of Loss Of Frame (LOF) conditions. LOF is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous Loss Of Synchronization (LOS) or Out-Of-Frame (OOF) condition. LOF is cleared after no more than fifteen consecutive seconds without an LOS or OOF condition. SLIP A Slipped Second contains one or more Controlled Slips. A Controlled Slip is the deletion or replication of a DS1/E1 frame by the receiving equipment. DM A Degraded Minute (DM) is any minute during the reporting period that contains more than 10-6 errors as described in CCITT G.821. The count for this field is 115 rather than 1-900 for the other fields. STATUS Status displays error codes for conditions that occur during a fifteen minute interval. Identifying codes are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Values are Y (Yellow Alarm received), N (No Signal), T (Test Mode - line loop, local loop, payload loop or standby), L (Loss of Synchronization - 2 out of 4 frame bits in error), O (Out of Service), B (Bipolar Violation) and E (Excessive Error Rate). Menu of Actions Table WAN-9. Performance Monitoring Screen Menu of Actions Action Refresh pgUp pgDn uSerregs Networkregs Clearregs Main Page 5-A-22 Function Because statistics are not calculated in real time, the Refresh command must be used to update the screen with new inforamtion. Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15 minute period and periods 96-1. Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15 minute period and periods 1-96. Allows the user to view the User Registers. Not shown for CEPT operation because it is the only set of registers for that mode. Allows the user to view the Network Registers. When a user is viewing the network registers, the Clear Registers option disappears. (This action is not available in D4 mode or CEPT operation.) Clears the User Registers. Network statistics remain the same. Returns to the main WAN card screen. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Far End Statistics The Far End Statistics (Farstat) screen (Figure WAN-22) reports the same impairlments as the Performance Monitoring screen. The same statistics are collected in the same manner for the far end system for both T1 and E1 systems. Since there are no registers for this option at the near end, the register commands are not available in the Menu of Actions. Node_1 | W1 H_E1+H_E1 Unit 1 AT&T FAREND STATISTICS NETWORK REGISTERS CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL ES 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 UAS 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 Retrieving message. 8011 SES 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 Rev A1-0 BES 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 Ser 00101 LOFC 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 | 12-31-99 14:33 Sec. 240 of 900 SLIP 0 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 0 Please wait... Refresh | Clear | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure WAN-22. Far-End Statistics (10-97) Page 5-A-23 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Test Selecting "Test" from the WAN Screen Menu of Options brings up the screen shown in Figure WAN-23. From this screen, users are allowed to create test situations between WAN cards or between a single WAN card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table WAN-10 lists the user options and display field definitions on this screen. Defaults are shown in bold type. Table WAN-11 shows the Menu of Actions for the Test Screen. In a system using an enhanced bus-connect 8804 CPU card, the test feature cannot be accessed by cards in WAN slot #3 or #4. Node_1 14:33 BERT SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP LB STATE | W1 CEPT+CEPT CSU off no 0 0 0 0 0 0.0e+1 0 none 8010 Rev A6-2 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 CSU off no 0 0 0 0 0 0.0e+1 0 none Save | Undo | Refresh | InsertErr | Clear | Main Figure WAN-23. The WAN Card Test Screen Page 5-A-24 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Table WAN-10. Test Screen Options Parameter User Options BERT off mark space 1:1 qrss lp-up lp-dn SYNC yes no BE see description below ES see description below SES see description below CSES see description below OSS see description below BER see description below ELAP see description below pl-lb l-lb none. LB STATE Default 1:7 3:24 off no BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected WAN port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space (all zeros), 1:1 (one-zero-one-zero), 1:7 (zero-one-6 zeros), 3:24 (3 ones-24 zeros), qrss (quasi-random pseudo signal), lp-up (which sends a T1 loop-up code to the remote end) and lp-dn (which sends a loop-down code to the remote end). Loop-up (lpup) and loop down (lp-dn) codes are not supported for CEPT WANs. SYNC Synchronization (SYNC) displays yes if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment, no if it has not. BE Bit Error (BE) displays the total number of bit errors logged. ES Errored Seconds (ES) displays the total number of seconds in which errors were detected. SES Severely Errored Seconds (SES) shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). (10-97) Page 5-A-25 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds. OSS Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) shows the number of seconds that the BRI BERT has been out of synchronization. BER Bit Error Rate (BER) shows the rate at which errors are being logged. BER equals the number of bit errors (BE) divided by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. ELAP Elapsed time (ELAP) is the total number of seconds elapsed during the test. LB STATE The Loopback State indicates that a loopback from a remote device is both present and operational. The field will show pl-lb (payload loop-back) when the entire signal, excluding the framing bit, is looped back. The field will show l-lb (line loop-back) when the entire signal is looped back. It will show none if the WAN port is not in loopback. Menu of Actions Table WAN-11. Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh InsertErr Clear Main Page 5-A-26 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Allows the user to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal. Clears the testing screen and resets all counters to zero. Returns to the WAN card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card WAN Card Settings for HDSL E1 Figure WAN-24 shows the WAN card screen for HDSL E1 operation. Table WAN-12 lists the HDSL E1 settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values. For information about cross-connects and the timeslot map used to connect your WAN to voice and data ports or equipment, see the System Operations chapter. Node_1 | STATE MODE FRAME TS16 EVEN BIT AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN COM/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP W1 H_E1+H_E1 H_E1 stdby xcon crc cas norm none off off off 01 off none 10-e-4 none none 8011 Rev A1-0 STATE MODE FRAME TS16 EVEN BIT AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN COM/NMS RP EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 H_E1 stdby xcon crc cas norm none off off off 01 off none 10-e-4 none none Save | Undo | Refresh | Xcon | Perf | Farstat | Test | sWitch | Hdsl | Main Figure WAN-24. The WAN Card Screen for HDSL_E1 Operations (10-97) Page 5-A-27 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table WAN-12. Parameter Options for CEPT Operations Parameter STATE MODE FRAME TS16 EVEN BIT AIS/ALM LINE LB LOCAL LB CH LB LB ADDR LB GEN COM/NMS EER THRHD RDNT RULES GROUP User Options stdby actv term d-i xcon crc d-frm cas ccs nos norm inv none tcodr off on off on off clr 00-31 off llb plb nlb none c-sa4 c-br7 10e-4 - 10e-9 none OOS CGA none 1 2 3 4 Default stdby xcon crc nos norm none off off off 00-31 off none 10e-4 none none STATE Leave the card in standby (stdby) when setting up your WAN links; then change it to active (actv) when starting normal operations. MODE In bus-connect systems, WAN cards have Terminal (term) and Drop-and-Insert (d-i) modes of operation. In Terminal mode, used for channel bank applications, all timeslots must connect to a port on a user card or remain unconnected. Drop-andInsertmode automatically connects all timeslots on WAN link #1 to the corresponding timeslots on WAN link #2 of the same card. You can assign any or all of the timeslots to voice and data ports by overriding the automatic setup. See the Systems Operations chapter for more information about using these two modes, and about timeslot maps in general. In cross-connect systems, Mode automatically defaults to xcon, the only available option. FRAME Selects frame types: Cyclic Redundancy Check, 4th level (crc) or Dual Frame (d-frm). TS16 Selects signaling usage of slot 16: Channel Associated Signaling (cas), Common Channel Signaling (ccs) or No Signaling (nos). In the CAS and CCS, timeslot 16 is used to carry signaling information for all channels on the E1. If nos is selected, then timeslot 16 becomes available for user data. Page 5-A-28 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card EVEN BIT Setting the Even Bit parameter for inv causes the system to invert every even bit in every DS0 timeslot, insuring ones-density. This option should be used only if the entire E1 stream is composed of PCM voice. AIS/ALM Specifies the type of “keep-alive” signal known as AIS/ALM (Alarm Indication Signal/Alarm) that the system will generate on one E1 should the other fail. AIS/ALM will show none until the GROUP is selected LINE LB Controls looping the full E1 line back to the network. On enables, off disables end-toend testing of the line. LOCAL LB Controls looping the full E1 line back to the PCM bus. The options are off and on. On allows testing of local equipment; off disables testing. The system generates a “Keep Alive - Type 1” pattern on the E1 line. CH LB Enables individual DS0 channel loopback toward the PCM bus (see Figure WAN-16 earlier in this chapter). A channel loopback loops a single DS0 channel and cannot be used to loop multiple DS0s or a portion of a DS0. Refer to user cards for other loopback options which may allow you to loop part of a channel or multiple channels. Clr enables, off disables loopback. LB ADDR The Loopback Address specifies which channel is to be looped back in the Channel Loopback. Valid selections for E1 lines are 0-31. Do not loop timeslot 16 unless the E1 interface is in no signaling (nos) mode. LB GEN LB GEN generates in-band diagnostic codes that are sent to the remote equipment These codes are compatible with DDS networks and allow you to command a latching loopback at remote DDS equipment. The options are off, llb (Local Loopback), plb (payload Loopback) and nlb (Network Loopback). COM/NMS Communications/Network Management System Report tells the system where to send TCP/IP packets from the NMS configuration selected on the Interface card. The options are none (no NMS), c-sa4 (use SA4 channel for NMS information) and c-b7r (send NMS information to a B7R card on timeslot 31). (10-97) Page 5-A-29 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 EER THRHD Excessive Error Rate Threshold selects the error rate at which an alarm is declared. This setting interacts with the EER setting in the Alarm Filters of your system. (See Basic Operations chapter.) The options are 10e-4 through 10e-9 or none. RDNT RULES Redundancy Rules define the method of determining what event will trigger a WAN port to switch to its redundant mate. The options are none, OOS or CGA. See the Redundancy Chapter for more information about redundant WAN operations. If there is no redundant WAN card in the appropriate slot, or there is an ISDN or ADPCM card in the system, the only option that will appear is none. GROUP Group identifies a path of link-fail alarm propagation from upstream trunks to downstream tributaries. Selection of group is a two-step process. After identifying the group number (1-4), the user must select the secondary group (A [child group], B [child group] or C [parent group]). The group setting is normally used for transcoder applications. Menu of Actions Table WAN-13 shows the Menu of Actions for the E1 HDSL WAN Card. Relevant actions are described below. Table WAN-13. WAN Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Xcon Perf Farstat Test sWitch Hdsl Main Page 5-A-30 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Shows the cross-connect map for each WAN port. See the System Operations section for a detailed description of cross-connect features. Brings up the performance monitoring screen. See the Performance Monitoring section of this chapter. Opens performance monitoring screen for Far-end Statistics Initiates and monitors testing of all WAN card ports. Refer to Test section below. Allows the user to switch wan port operations to the redundant mate. See the Redundant Operations section. Sets HDSL options Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Cross-Connect (XCON) The Cross-Connect (Xcon) command in the E1 HDSL WAN Main WAN screen allows you to view the Cross-Connections that have been set up in the system. Functionality and screens are the same as those for the WAN cards (CEPT) discussed earlier in this chapter. Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring for the HDSL E1 WAN card is essentially the same as for the T1 WAN, except that only a single set of registers is used. Therefore only the Clearregs command appears in the menu of actions, as shown in Figure WAN-25. Node_1 14:33 | W1 CSU+DSX 8010 Rev A6-2 Unit 1 PERFORMANCE USER REGISTERS CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL ES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS: UAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y=YEL N=NOS BES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T=Test Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 Sec. 167 of 900 LOFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L=LOS SLIP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O=OOS STATUS . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . B=BPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E=ERR Refresh | pgUp | pgDn | uSerregs | Networkregs | Clearregs | Main Figure WAN-25. HDSL_E1 Performance Monitoring Screen (10-97) Page 5-A-31 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 HDSL Screen Figure WAN-26 displays the HDSL Screen for the 8011 Dual HDSL E1 WAN card. Table WAN-14 lists the actions on the bottom line of this screen, and Table WAN-15 shows the screen options and defaults. Node_1 | W1 H_E1+H_E1 8011 Rev A0-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 TRAIN MODE ES THRSHLD SES THRSHLD UAS THRSHLD LOOP 1 ltu 0 0 0 off 2 ntu 0 0 0 off LOSS LP1 LOSS LP2 QLTY LP 1 QLTY LP 2 LB STATUS 0 0 loss 10 none 0 0 loss 10 none Save | Undo | Refresh | Perf | Main Figure WAN-26. HDSL Screen Table WAN-15. HDSL Screen Options and Defaults Parameter TRAIN MODE LOOP LOSS LP 1 LOSS LP 2 QLTY LP 1 QLTY LP 2 LB STATUS Page 5-A-32 User Options This parameter determines the master/slave relationship between the units. The setting for the central office local unit is ltu (default). Remote units should be set to ntu. This parameter sets loopbacks on the remote unit. Selecting r-loc will cause the remote link to loop back to the PCM buses of the remote unit. Selecting r-net will cause the remote link to loop back to the network. The default is off. Displays the loss in loop 1 within ±2 dB. (display only) Displays the loss in loop 2 within ±2 dB. (display only) This parameter indicates the measure of signal quality correlated to noise margin in loop 1. Possible readouts are loss (no sync), or a number from 1 to 10, where 10 is the best signal. (display only) This parameter indicates the measure of signal quality correlated to noise margin in loop 2. Possible readouts are loss (no sync), or a number from 1 to 10, where 10 is the best signal. (display only) No user input - display only. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card Menu of Actions Table WAN-14. HDSL Screen Actions Action (10-97) Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Redraws the screen. Perf Brings up the HDSL Performance Monitoring screen Main Returns to the 8011 Dual HDSL E1 WAN card screen. Page 5-A-33 WAN Card Reference Guide v3.6 HDSL Performance Monitoring Screen Figure WAN-27 shows the HDSL Performance Monitoring Screen for the 8011 Dual HDSL E1 WAN card. The screen displays statistics for either Unit 1 (HDSL module 1) or Unit 2 (HDSL module 2), depending on which unit you choose in the HDSL Screen. Node_1 | W1 H_E1+H_E1 8011 Rev A0-0 Unit 1 HDSL PERFORMANCE (15 Min Interval) CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL ES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS: L=LOS SES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R=REVERSED ES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ser 00000 | 12-31-99 14:33 *Local* UAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T=TEST Refresh | Clearregs | 24 HR | 15 mIn | rEmote | Local | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure WAN-27. Typical HDSL Performance Monitoring Screen (local 15-minute interval) The above screen shows the number of error conditions detected in loops 1 and 2 (local or remote), in either 15-minute or 24-hour increments. This allows for four different possible displays: • 15-minute intervals, Local Loop (default) • 15-minute intervals, Remote Loop • 24-hour intervals, Local Loop • 24-hour intervals, Remote Loop You can alternate between screens by selecting from the actions at the bottom of the screen. When 15-minute intervals are active, pressing “h” (24 Hr) switches to 24-hour intervals (see Figure WAN-25). Pressing “i” (15 mIn) in the 24-hour interval mode switches to 15-minute intervals. Similarly, pressing “e” (rEmote) from the Local screen switches to the Remote screen, and pressing “l” (Local) from the Remote screen switches to the Local screen. Page 5-A-34 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 WAN Card The only difference between the 15-minute and 24-hour interval screens is the historical time periods shown on the left side of the screen. In 24-hour intervals, seven historical time periods appear, corresponding to the activity over the past seven twenty-four hour monitoring periods, providing one week of historical monitoring data. (Note that these will be blank if monitoring has just started.) In 15-minute intervals, 12 historical time periods are shown on the left side of the screen. By selecting 'D' (pgDn) from the Menu of Actions, the user can view historical time periods 13 through 24. Pressing 'D' again will display historical time periods 25 through 32. These periods correspond to the activity over the past thirty-two 15-minute monitoring periods, thus providing eight hours of historical data. Table WAN-16 lists the actions available from these screens. The display parameters are described in Table WAN-17. Menu of Actions Table WAN-16. HDSL Performance Monitoring Screen Actions Action Refresh Function Redraws the screen and updates information. Clearregs Clears the user registers and starts over. 24 Hr Switches to 24 hour interval monitoring 15 mIn Switches to 15 minute interval monitoring rEmote Switches to remote loop monitoring Local Switches to local loop monitoring pgUp Scrolls up through historical intervals (n/a for 24 hour intervals) pgDn Scrolls down through historical intervals Main Returns to the 8011 Dual HDSL card screen. Table WAN-17. HDSL Performance Display Parameters (10-97) Parameter Display ES Errored Seconds (ES) registers the number of seconds with one or more CRC6 (ESF), BPV (D4) or CRC4 (E1) errors, OR one or more OOFs, OR one or more Controlled Slips. SES A Severely Errored Second (SES) is any second with 320 or more CRC6 (ESF), BPV (D4) or CRC4 (E1) errors, OR one or more OOF errors. UAS Unavailable Seconds (UAS) shows the number of seconds during which service is unavailable. An unavailable signal state is declared after ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) are logged. An unavailable state is cleared after ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds are logged. Unavailable Seconds are also accumulated if the card has an out-of-service (OOS) condition. Page 5-A-35 Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Introduction The interface card provides all communications connections to the system. This section discusses general Interface Card information, as well as specific settings for the Interface Card. All Interface cards must be installed in the IF slot on all chassis. 8920 Interface Card The 8920 Interface Card has communications, control and network interface ports (see Figure Interface-1). It features an internal modem that facilitates remote communication with the system unit. The 8920 has a DB9 (DTE-male) serial port for network management and two RJ48 jacks that connect to the node port for alarm notification and VT-100 control terminal port. Additionally, an RJ11 jack is available for the modem port. The 8920 supports eight T1 or E1 WAN links. RJ11 Modem Port RS485 Node Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port WAN Link Connector Figure Interface-1. 8920 Interface Card Front Panels (10-97) Page 6-A-1 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 8921 Interface Card The 8921 Interface Card is similar to the 8920 except there is no modem for remote access or alarm printing (see Figure Interface-2). All other fittings and functions are the same. RS485 Node Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port WAN Link Connector Figure Interface-2. 8921 Interface Card Front Panels Page 6-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Interface Card (8925) The 8925 Interface Card uses RJ48 jacks to terminate two (2) T1’s and Bantam connectors to terminate two T1 WAN links and an RS232 control terminal interface port or balanced 120 ohm E1. The computer port, modem port and node port are not available on this interface card. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Interface-3. RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port TX RX WAN 1-2 Bantam Jack T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) RX TX WAN 1-1 Bantam Jack Figure Interface-3. 8925 Interface Card Ports (10-97) Page 6-A-3 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card (8926) The 8926 Interface card is similar to the 8925 Interface card with the addition of the computer port, node port and modem port. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Interface-4. RJ11 Modem Port RS485 Nodal Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port TX RX WAN 1-2 Bantam Jack T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) RX WAN 1-1 Bantam Jack TX Figure Interface-4. 8926 Interface Card Port Page 6-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Interface Card (8927) The 8927 Interface Card uses BNC connectors to terminate two E1 WAN links, a DB9 computer port, an RJ48 control terminal interface port and an RJ48 node port. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Interface-5. RS485 Nodal Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 Computer Port TX E1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) RX RX E1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) TX Figure Interface-5. 8927 Interface Card Port (10-97) Page 6-A-5 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Ports and Functions The Interface card controls many critical functions in the system. It provides interfaces to external control devices, terminates all T1 and E1 WAN links, and holds the nonvolatile RAM and the internal modem. Table Interface-1 lists the interface ports and functions. Figure Interface-6 shows the component layout and labels the ports. See the Pinouts chapter for electrical specifications and pin assignments. Table Interface-1. Interface Ports and Functions Interface Ports Modem Node Control Terminal Computer T1/E1 WAN link Function Connects the internal modem to a phone line. Provides contacts to report ACO alarms. Connects the system to a VT-100 compatible terminal. Connects a local device for printing alarms; or to NMS.. Connects the system to T1 and E1 lines. Modem Line (no modem on 8921) Nodal Port VT-100 Control Terminal DB-9 Serial Port Power Bus Edge Connectors Amphenol Connector for WAN Connections Figure Interface-6. Component Layout for the 8920 and 8921 Interface Card Page 6-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Internal Modem The internal modem is an asynchronous CCITT V.22 bis modem. It allows remote access to the terminal interface and automatic logging of alarm messages to a remote device. Table Interface-2 lists the parameters and rating specifications of the internal modem. Table Interface-2. Modem Specifications Parameter Compatibility Modulation Line Interface Approval Equalization Receiver Sensitivity Dialing Mode Speed Supported Code Set Ringer Equivalence Transmit Level Rating CCITT V.22 bis 16 point QAM 2-wire balanced 600 ohms FCC Part 68 receive automatic adaptive transmit fixed compromise ON to OFF threshold -45 dBm OFF to ON threshold -48 dBm DTMF Tone 2400 bps asynchronous 8-bit characters plus one stop bit with no parity 0.2 A -9.5 dBm Logging On Remotely Normally a local network operator uses a VT-100 terminal to directly access the terminal interface. But where central control or service access is required, the internal modem provides an access method to the terminal interface from a remote location. . The modem automatically answers any incoming calls. The modem communicates at 2.4kbps using 8 data bits, one stop bit and no parity To initiate a call, the remote operator dials in using a VT-100 compatible terminal. The remote operator can press the key to display the log-on screen. After entering a valid password, the remote operator has complete access to the terminal interface as described in the Basic Operations chapter. To disconnect, the remote operator logs off and hangs up the line. The modem automatically resets and waits for another call. If an operator is logged on to the system with a local terminal when a modem call is received, he will automatically be logged off the system and will not be able to restore local access until the modem connection is broken. (10-97) Page 6-A-7 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Using the Node Port The node port allows the system to report ACO (Alarm Cutoff) alarms to an external system to alert the operator to critical situations. Using the ACO function, (see Basic Operations chapter), keeps the alarm active until manually cleared from the terminal. The node port uses an RJ48 connector. Pins 3, 4 and 5 form an RS485 compatible ccontact closure that can be used to report ACO alarms to an external system. Pins 1, 2, 6 and 7 are reserved for future use. Pin 8 is a ground. Connecting the ACO alarm interface to an external alarm device (such as a buzzer or light) alerts you to problems with the system. Figure Interface-7 shows a possible configuration connecting a unit to a generic external alarm system. The nominal input is 5V and the short-circuit current is 250mA. See the Pinouts chapter for pin assignments. The alarm interface is activated by the ACO setting discussed in the Basic Operations chapter. This will activate the device when a designated alarm occurs. The Basic Operations chapter fully discusses conditions and settings necessary to enable this feature. Designation Interface Card Nodal Port Pin # +N 1 -N 2 ANO ANC 3 4 ACOM 5 +F 6 -F 7 GND 8 Amp Amp Common External Alarm System ANO = Open to ACOM on Alarm ANC = Closed to ACOM on Alarm Figure Interface-7. Node Port ACO Alarm Interface Page 6-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Interface Card Settings Figure Interface-8 shows the interface card Main screen. Table Interface-3 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 | IF INTF+modem PRIMARY CLK SECONDARY CLK EXTERNAL CLK 1 int w1-1 rcv CURRENT int CLK 8920 Rev A2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 16:46 Save | Undo | Refresh | Time | ACO | proFiles | taBs | Ports | Main Figure Interface-8. Interface Card Main Screen Table Interface-3. Main Screen Options and Defaults Parameter PRIMARY CLK SECONDARY CLK EXTERNAL CLK CURRENT CLK User Options int w1-1 through w4-2 int w1-1 through w4-2 rcv gen unchangeable ext (not used) ext (not used) Default int w1-1 rcv int PRIMARY CLK The Primary Clock provides all internal timing for the system. Two clock sources are possible: a network source or the internal crystal oscillator. A network clock source provides the best Primary Clock source. If you use a network clock source, you must specify the WAN link to which the clock source is connected; for example, w1-1. A WAN clock source will be either 1.544 or 2.048 Mbps depending on whether you are using a T1 or E1 line and must be accurate to ±50 parts per million (or ±50 x 10-6). (10-97) Page 6-A-9 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Alternatively, the system can generate a clock from its own crystal. If you select int, the crystal provides the clock source for this unit. The stability of this Stratum 4 clock is ±25 parts per million (or ±25 x 10-6). If you use the system internal crystal as a clock source, all other devices attached to the network should derive their clocking from the internal clock as well. The Primary Clock can be set to external (ext), but this feature is not supported in this release. SECONDARY CLK Should the Primary Clock signal fail, the system automatically reverts to the defined Secondary Clock source. This source may also be a WAN link or the internal crystal. Although a secondary clock source is not required, good network design dictates that you have a backup if one is available. This clock cannot be external. Selection of ext will generate an error message. EXTERNAL CLK Reserved for future use. CURRENT CLK The current clock shows the clock now in operation. This field is not accessible by the user. Menu of Actions Table Interface-4 shows the Menu of Actions for the Interface Card. Table Interface-4. Interface Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Time ACO proFiles taBs Ports Main Page 6-A-10 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics and on other screens to redraw the screen. Sets the system time and date. Use the up and down arrows to make changes. ACO alarm. See the Alarm section of the Basic Operations chapter. Profiles function unoperable with this release. Conversion tables for ABCD bits from ANSI to CCITT for voice circuits. See “Conversion Tables” later in this chapter. Allows users to update and set the protocol, rate, communication configuration, and handshake of the communications ports on the interface card. Returns to the Main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Signaling Conversion Tables The Signaling Conversion Tables are especially useful when cross-connecting a T1 (ANSI) voice circuit to E1 (CCITT). Changing the ABCD signaling bits to facilitate proper signaling between the two carrier types may be necessary for proper system operation. All types of voice circuits (E&M, FXS, FXO and PLAR) can access the ABCD Signaling Bit Conversion Tables for changes to their respective patterns. The user can accept the default bit pattern changes or manually override those settings and choose a different bit pattern and insert it into the table. Figure Interface-9 shows the Conversion Tables accessed by pressing the "B" (taBs). Each voice circuit type is represented by two columns corresponding to CCITT to ANSI (C->A) and ANSI to CCITT (A->C) conversion of ABCD bits. Node_1 b | IF INTF+modem E&M ABCD 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 C->A 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 A->C 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 0101 1101 0101 C->A 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0000 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 8920 FXS A->C 0101 0101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 0101 0101 1101 1101 0101 1101 0101 Rev A2-0 C->A 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 1111 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 Ser 01103 FXO A->C 0101 0101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 C->A 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 | 12-31-99 16:46 PLAR A->C 0101 0101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 Save | Undo | Refresh | Default | Main Figure Interface-9. Conversion Tables Screen For instance, an E&M circuit in the "0101" state will send "0101" from the CCITT end of the circuit and the ANSI end would receive "1111" Conversely, the same state would be sent as "1111" from the ANSI end and received at the CCITT end as "0101." Either receive bit pattern can be manually overridden by the user. The E&M portion of the conversion table is also used for DN, PLAR-D3, DPO and DPT. The FXS portion of the conversion table is used for FXS from FXO. The FXO portion of the conversion table is used for FXO to FXS. The PLAR portion of the conversion table is also used for PLAR-D4 to PLAR and MRD. (10-97) Page 6-A-11 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table Interface-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the Conversion Tables screen. Table Interface-5. Conversion Tables Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Default Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics and on other screens to redraw the screen. Returns columns to default settings, one column at a time. The user must save changes after using this command. Returns to the Interface card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Remote Terminal System (RTS) The Remote Terminal System (RTS) is a special application for users using microwave transmission. Using communication software, a user can log into any number of different systems from a single control station (PC, MAC, Sun, or HP Workstation) to download alarm information, change card settings, and perform maintenance. Systems are connected from the Interface card’s COM port to a wireless control network through the RS232 input on one of the four service channels on the wireless network. The Control Station (PC) is connected to pin #2 out and #3 in. Each of the integrated access controllers is connected to RS232 pin #2 in and pin #3 out. The actual number of the systems that can be connected together is determined by the amount of different numbers that can fit in the “SYS PH#” field in the CPU sub menu. The CPU sub menu is accessed by selecting a CPU through the user interface and pressing the key. Identification Each system has a unique identification number on the integrated access controller network (phone number). The unique identification number is used to determine which Controller can be accessed remotely on a serial line. The identification number for each console needs to be entered in the “SYS PH#” field in the CPU sub menu. No two systems can have the same number in the “SYS PH#” on the same network. If that field is the same on more than one integrated access controller, race conditions will occur. Therefore each console on a single network must have an individual number in the “SYS PH#” field. The identification numbers for the integrated access controllers cannot be entered through a control station. This safeguard is provided to ensure a reliable connection between a control station and an integrated access controller. Attempts to change an identification number of a system remotely will be denied. Page 6-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Network Priorities All integrated access controllers on the wireless network have equal priorities. Because of this equality, no Controller can interrupt a remote session between another Controller and a control station. This is why the control station always initiates all communication on the RTS network. Intra-Network Communications Integrated access controllers cannot communicate with each other. Communication on the network is only between the control station and a single Controller. Since the communications on the network of integrated access controllers is always initiated by the control station, the Controller systems cannot communicate with each other. Figure Interface-10 shows a diagram of three RTS units. PC System System System #34 #35 #36 Figure Interface-10. Typical RTS Configuration The PC associated with integrated access controller #34 can engage any of the two other units by using "AT" commands from the communications software used. If a local VT-100 is active at any of the remote locations, the user will be logged off and the master PC will control the system unit. When the master PC logs off, the local user will be able log into the unit again. Connections at all units are done through the DB9 computer port. Terminal Security No user may log into any integrated access controller on the network without knowing the individual password of each system. Table Interface-6 lists the "AT" commands and the associated function. All "AT" commands are followed by pressing the key. (10-97) Page 6-A-13 Interface Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table Interface-6. "AT" Commands Used by RTS AT Command ATDTxxx ATDTxxxR Function Establish a user interface connection. Establish an alarm reporting connection. (Connection only lasts for the length of time necessary to upload and display all alarms that are being reported by the system that have not yet been displayed.) ATDTxxxC Establish a current alarm reporting connection. (Connection only lasts for the length of time necessary to upload and display all active alarms that are being reported by the system.) ATDTxxxH Establish a historical alarm reporting connection. (Connection only lasts for the length of time necessary to upload and display the alarm history reported by the system.) ATDTxxxCH Establish a current and historical alarm reporting connection. (Connection only lasts for the length of time necessary to upload and display the current alarms and alarm history reported by the system.) +++ Disconnects a remote session. "L" (letter L) Disconnects a remote session. xxx indicates the phone number on the CPU card of the desired system unit. Changing the 8927 from Balanced to Unbalanced The jumpers on the 8927 dual E1 Interface card change the operation of the E1 link from balanced to unbalanced. Figure Interface-11 shows the card layout with the position of jumper JP2, JP3, JP5, and JP4. The card is shipped with the jumpers open (the balanced position). To change the E1 link for WAN 1-1 to unbalanced, close jumpers JP2 and JP3. To change the E1 link for WAN 1-2 to unbalanced, close jumpers JP5 and JP4. Node Port VT-100 Port DB9 Serial WAN1-2 WAN1-1 Page 6-A-14 T JP4 R JP5 R JP3 T JP2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card Figure Interface-11. Jumpers on the 8927 Card (10-97) Page 6-A-15 Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards Introduction The External Alarm card performs two alarm-notification functions. The "Switch/Act On" (outbound) function allows the system to report internal alarms to external devices such as buzzers, bells or lights. The "Sensor/Trig On" (inbound) function allows externally generated alarms to be reported to the system through sensors that are located on the card. This chapter discusses the three External Alarm cards available for use with the integrated access system: the 8401, 8402, and 8403. Only one External Alarm card may reside in the integrated access system at a time. The 8401 and 8402 offer 4 and 3 inbound and outbound alarm circuits, respectively, and have a similar architecture. They will be discussed together at the start of the chapter. The 8403, which offers additional capabilities (28 inbound and 14 outbound), is discussed at the end of the chapter. 8401 External Alarm Card The 8401 External Alarm card supports four (4) outbound switches and four (4) inbound sensors. The outbound switches are used to report internal alarms to external devices by triggering form-C contact closures (120VAC - 0.5A), and the inbound sensors are used to bring foreign alarm indications into the system. External alarms that are reported by a sensor are listed in the alarm history file. 8402 External Alarm Card The 8402 External Alarm card supports three (3) outbound switches and three (3) inbound sensors. This card is similar to the 8401 except the fourth alarm port can only be used as an outbound alarm to show that the system’s power unit has failed. This card would be especially helpful when used in locations where loss of power to any of the units would be a critical problem. A -48VDC power source is required with this card. It may be provided by the 8905 Converter or from an external source. (10-97) Page 6-B-1 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 IMPORTANT NOTE To enable the reporting of alarms originating from sensors the SENSOR variable in the Alarm Filters menu must be set to report (see “Filters” in Chapter 2C, “Basic Operations”). From the system Main Menu, select Alarms, and choose Filters to display a menu of alarm filters shown below. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first column of the SENSOR line. Press to display the options ignore, log, and report. The option chosen here will act as the highest level option for all alarm card sensors. If this variable is set to ignore, any alarm conditions from the alarm sensors will be ignored, even if individual sensors are set to report at the alarm card. Likewise, if this variable is set to log, all of the sensors on the alarm card that are set to anything but ignore will be logged, but not reported. For this reason, it is crucial that the SENSOR Alarm Filter be set to report. Node_1 OOS NOS LOS YEL AIS CGA_RED CGA_YEL EER SENSOR DCHAN SWITCH UCA RESET ACO SYNC EER-3 PLC_OOF PLC_LOF PLC_YEL | Out of Service No Signal Loss of Sync Yellow Alarm Alarm Info Signal Carrier Group–Red Carrier Group–Yellow Excessive Error Rate Alarm card sensor D-chan out of service Switch to redundant card User card/port alarm System reset Alarm Cut-Off Clock Sync Alarm Error rate above 10e-3 DS3 PLCP Out of Framing DS3 PLCP Loss of Frame DS3 PLCL Yellow Alarm | 12-31-99 14:33 1 2 log major log minor log minor log minor log minor log major log major ignore minor report minor ignore minor report major ignore minor report major log minor ignore minor ignore minor ignore minor ignore minor ignore minor 3 aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-on aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off n/a aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off aco-off Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Page 6-B-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards External Alarm Card Screens (8401 and 8402) Figure Alarm-1 shows the External Alarm Card screen for the 8401; the 8402, with only 3 ports would have only 3 columns of options. Table Alarm-1 shows the settings and options. Node_1 | U1 ALR 8401 Rev B0-0 1 stdby minor stdby close SWITCH ACT ON SENSOR TRIG ON Major = 0 2 stdby minor stdby close Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 3 stdby minor stdby close 14:33 4 stdby minor stdby close Minor = 0 Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure Alarm-1. External Alarm Card Screen Table Alarm-1. External Alarm Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter SWITCH ACT ON SENSOR TRIG ON User Options stdby actv minor major stdby actv close open any Default stdby minor stdby close SWITCH The Switch setting indicates if the outbound alarm switch is on (actv) or off (stdby). ACT ON The Act On parameter defines the type of system alarm that will cause the switch to trigger. You can program each alarm switch to trigger on minor (info and minor) alarms, major (major and critical) alarms or any alarm message. See the Alarms section of the Basic Operations chapter for more information on how you define an alarm as major or minor. SENSOR The Sensor setting indicates if the inbound alarm sensor is on (actv) or off (stdby). (10-97) Page 6-B-3 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 TRIG ON The Trigger On parameter defines if the sensor should report an external alarm upon sensing the opening (open) or the closure (close) of the C-form contact to which it is connected. Major= The Major= accumulation register shows the current number of reported alarms that are designated either Major or Critical. Minor= The Minor= accumulation register shows the current number of reported alarms that are designated either Minor or Informational. Menu of Actions Table Alarm-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the External Alarm Card. Table Alarm-2. Alarm Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main Page 6-B-4 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards 8403 External Alarm Card Introduction The 8403 External Alarm Card supports 28 sensor inputs and 14 external device ports. Of the 14 external device controls, 8 are Form C contacts (normally open or closed based on user configuration), 4 are Form A contacts (normally open), and 2 are Form B contacts (normally closed). In addition, the card provides an FXS type telephone interface (RJ-11 jack, loop start only, no ringer interface) and an on-board piezoelectric buzzer with either internally generated and customer-selected alarm sounds or sounds transmitted by the network. In the on-hook condition, ring signaling turns on the buzzer with either a locally stored ringback pattern or a network-provided signal. In the off-hook conditions, voice output of the transcoder is routed to the transformer. In an alarm condition, if the sound option is enabled, a 3,000 Hz signal is routed to the buzzer. All sensor inputs are current loop type (4-20 ma current detection). All sensors can be either active (surge protection only) or optically isolated passive current detectors. Active sensors can be powered by either the network battery (-48 VDC) or by the main power supply (+12VDC). The 8403 External Alarm Card is shown in Figure Alarm-3, emphasizing the positions of switches and jumpers used to configure the card. All switches and jumpers should be set prior to installation. (10-97) Page 6-B-5 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 Alarm Sensors Figure Alarm-2 shows page 1 of 3 Alarm Sensors Card screens. Table Alarm-3 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with the possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 page: # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | U1 ALR 8403 1 of 3 B0-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 ALARM SENSORS SENSOR NAME Refresh Main Rev | dEfault TRIG ON close close close close close close close close close close | pgUp | STATUS log log log log log log log log log log pgDn | ALARM TYPE major major major major major major major major major major sWitches BUZZER on on on on on on on on on on | Voice | Figure Alarm-2. External Alarm Card (8403) Sensors Screen Table Alarm-3. External Alarm Card (8403) Sensors Screen Options and Defaults Parameter # SENSOR NAME TRIG ON STATUS ALARM TYPE BUZZER User Options [Alarm Sensor number 1-28] [user-input sensor name] close open ignore log report info minor major crit off on Default fixed blank close ignore minor off SENSOR NAME A user input field of up to six (6) characters to identify the specific alarm. (Note: The sensor name is a local identifier, and is not transmitted with alarm conditions.) TRIG ON The Trigger On parameter defines if the sensor should report an external alarm upon sensing the opening (open) or the closure (close) of the contact to which it is connected. The default value is close. Page 6-B-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards STATUS This value indicates what action should be taken in the event of an alarm for each individual sensor. This variable may be set to log the alarm in the alarm register, or to report the alarm. (Reported alarms are also logged.) The default value is ignore. ALARM TYPE This user-definable parameter indicates the severity of the incoming alarm. The options are info, minor, major, and crit. The default value is minor. BUZZER This variable indicates whether the onboard buzzer should be activated when the sensor indicates an alarm. The default value is off. Menu of Actions Table Alarm-4. External Alarm Card (8403) Sensors Screen Menu of Actions Action Refresh dEfault pgUp pgDn sWitches Voice Main (10-97) Function Redraws the screen. Returns all settings to the default state. Use to return to previous page. Use to go to next page Changes to the Switches screen. Changes to the Voice screen. Returns to the main sensor screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Page 6-B-7 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 Alarm Switches Figure Alarm-3 shows the first of two pages of the Alarm Switches screen. Table Alarm-5 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with the possible and default values. Node_1 page: # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | U1 ALR 8403 1 of 2 | B0-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 ALARM SWITCHES SWITCH NAME Refresh Rev SW. CTRL act_on act_on act_on act_on act_on act_on act_on dEfault | pgUp | ACT ON major major major major major major major pgDn | SENSOR # n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a STATUS off off off off off off off Main Figure Alarm-3. External Alarm Card (8403) Switches Screen Table Alarm-5. External Alarm Card (8403) Switch Screen Options and Defaults Parameter # SWITCH NAME SW. CTRL ACT ON SENSOR # STATUS User Options [Alarm Switch number 1-14] [user-input switch name] off on act_on info minor major crit sensor n/a 1-28 1 off on Note Default fixed blank act_on major n/a displayed Notes: 1. Sensor numbers are assignable if the ACT ON parameter is set to sensor numbered 1 -28, the default is 1. SWITCH NAME A user-input field up to six (6) characters to identify the specific switch. (Note: The switch name is a local identifier, and is not transmitted with alarm conditions.) Page 6-B-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards SW. CTRL This variable indicates the initial state of the switch. The possibilities are off (which unconditionally turns the switch off), on (which unconditionally turns the switch on) or act_on (which relies on the state of the switch). The default value is off. As noted above, 12 of the switches are Form C (which may be either open or closed), one is Form A (always open), and one is Form B (always closed). In the event of system power failure, switch #1 can be used as a fail-safe switch to activate a device that notifies the user. In order for this to occur, a jumper must be set on jumper pair JP63. located towards the center of the card. The contact for switch #1 will close if the system loses power, establishing a circuit that can be used to power an external warning device. The current source must be provided by the external device. ACT ON This parameter defines the condition that will cause the switch to trigger. The user can program each alarm switch to trigger on info, minor, major, or crit alarms. Alternatively, the switch trigger can also be assigned to a particular sensor. When sensor is selected, SENSOR # allows the user to indicate the number of the sensor that will trigger the alarm. The default value is major. SENSOR # When the ACT ON field is set to sensor, the user can input a value from 1 to 28, indicating the number of the sensor that will trigger the switch. The default value is n/a. STATUS This is a display-only field. The user cannot access it. Menu of Actions Table Alarm-6. External Alarm Card (8403) Switches Screen Menu of Actions Action Refresh dEfault pgUp pgDn Main (10-97) Function Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated. Returns all settings to the default state. Returns user to previous page. Advances user to next page. Returns to the main sensor screen. Page 6-B-9 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 Voice An RJ11 FXS voice port is situated on the front of the card between the two Amphenol connectors. The initial voice screen is shown in Figure Alarm-4. The options and defaults are shown in Table Alarm-7. Node_1 | U1 ALR 8403 Rev A0-0 Ser 0101 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 actv w1-1 20 plar d3-m1 -5.0 2.0 u-law off STATE WAN/SRV TS MODE TYPE Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING RINGBK Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure Alarm-4. External Alarm Card (8403) Voice Screen Table Alarm-7. External Alarm Card (8403) Voice Screen Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN/SRV TS MODE TYPE RX TLP TX TLP CODING RINGBK User Options stdby actv none w1-1 through w4-2 1-24 (1-31) fxs plar loop d3-m1 d4-m1 d3-m2 d4-m2 d3-m3 d4-m3 -10.0 to +2.0 -10.0 to +5.0 u-law a-inv a-law off on Default stdby none n/a fxs loop -5.0 2.0 u-law off STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to stdby (standby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use. The default value is stdby. Page 6-B-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. The default value is none. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link; see the System Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps. The default value is n/a. MODE The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which you are connecting the port. All options use two-wire balanced connections. The fxs (Foreign Exchange Station) option allows you to connect a telephone to the system. The plar (private line automatic ringdown) option provides point-to-point unswitched connections between two telephone sets. This configuration is usually not attached to an exchange or switch; rather, it provides a “hot line” between two locations. TYPE The Type setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXS equipment and the remote switch. The loop (Loop Start) option, which is used with POTS stations and simple PBX trunks, is only available when the MODE setting is fxs. If the MODE setting is plar, then the TYPE options are d3-m1, d4-m1, d3-m2, d4-m2, d3-m3, and d4-m3. Caution: Before activating this port, verify the behavior expected by both the station equipment and the remote central office equipment and ensure that you have the system properly configured. Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are decoded to analog signals. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB. The default value is 5.0. (10-97) Page 6-B-11 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 Tx TLP The Transmit Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are received from the local analog port and before they are encoded to digital PCM signals. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -3 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB. The default value is +2.0. CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. In general, in the T1/North American environment use µ-law coding. In the E1/International environment, use a-inv (inverted A-law) or a-law coding; a-inv provides greater 1s density than a-law. The coding default is determined by the type of card in the WAN port you select. The default value is u-law (Note: On the system screens, "u" is used in place of "µ" because of ASCII character limitations, but should be read as "mu-law."). RINGBK The ringback setting specifies whether a ringback tone is generated by the system and sent towards the network. This option should be turned on when the network does not provide an audible ringing tone to the calling party. The default value is off. Menu of Actions Table Alarm-8. External Alarm Card (8403) Voice Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main Page 6-B-12 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated on the screen. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards Features Diagrams of the 8403 External Alarm Card are shown in Figure Alarm-5. Earlier versions of the card have the alarm sensor jumpers set at angles, as shown in the diagram on the left, while later versions have the alarm sensor jumpers grouped in pairs, as shown in the diagram on the right. Otherwise, the two cards are functionally equivalent. The features identified in the drawings are discussed in detail below. Earlier Version Later Version J4 JP3 JP4 JP63 S1 S Y S T A B US/Euro Jumper PASV RJ-11 S2 J P6 3 Voltage Control Switches J3 J3 JP1 JP2 Onboard Buzzer Alarm Sensor Jumpers for Connector J3 Buzzer Volume Control US EUR ACTV Alarm Sensor Jumpers for Connector J3 S1 BAT US EUR S2 SYS RJ-11 S I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J4 S I 15 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Alarm Sensor Jumpers for Connector J4 Alarm Sensor Jumpers for Connector J4 US/Euro Jumper Voltage Control Switches Onboard Buzzer Buzzer Volume Control Figure Alarm-5. External Alarm Card (8403). Onboard Buzzer The 8403 alarm card contains an onboard buzzer for audible alarms. The buzzer can be set to activate when a particular sensor signals an alarm condition. The buzzer volume is set by a control dial marked "VOL," which can be adjusted using a small screwdriver. US/Euro Jumper The card may be set either to US or European configuration by moving a jumper located on J64. Setting the jumper on the left two pins establishes US configuration. On the right two pins, the jumper is configured for European voltage. This property should match the configuration of your particular chassis, or the card will not operate properly. The factory default is US position. (10-97) Page 6-B-13 External Alarm Cards Reference Guide v3.6 Voltage Control Switches Switches S1 and S2 are used to control the voltage supplied to each group of active sensors. When either of these switches are set to "SYS," the board supplies ±12vDC system power to the sensor group specific to that Amphenol connector. When either of the switches are set to "BAT," the board supplies telco power to the sensors in that group. The switches can be set individually (meaning one can be set to "SYS" and the other to "BAT") but doing so will affect all 14 sensors in the respective group. Switch S1 controls the sensors on the J3 (lower) connector, while Switch S2 controls the sensors on the J4 (upper) connector. The factory default for these switches is SYS. Alarm Sensor Jumpers Each sensor relates to a pair of jumpers on the board, which controls whether the sensor is powered from the card (active mode) or from an external device (passive mode). Passive mode provides 2500V isolation. Figure Alarm-6 displays these options. Current Source Alarm Card External Device Active Mode Current Source External Device Alarm Card Passive Mode Figure Alarm-6. Active Mode vs. Passive Mode. Page 6-B-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Cards The jumper pairs are set at a slight angle (see Figure Alarm-7). The jumpers are separated into two groups of 28 jumpers each. The upper group is associated with the sensors on the upper Amphenol connector (J4), while the lower group is associated with the sensors on the lower Amphenol connector (J3). Earlier Version Later Version Figure Alarm-7. Jumper Pair (Active Mode). Note: All jumper pairs are set by factory default to active mode. The default setting, as shown above, is active mode, in which the sensors are powered by the card. This setting provides surge protection for the sensors. To set the jumper pair to passive mode, users must remove both jumpers and then insert a single jumper across the pair, as shown in Figure Alarm-8. The other jumper should be stowed on one of the unused pins. (The pairs are set at an angle so that the extra jumper will not fit across the outside pins.) This provides full isolation (to 2500V) for the sensor. Earlier Version Later Version Figure Alarm-8. Jumper Pair (Passive Mode). (10-97) Page 6-B-15 External Alarm Cards Page 6-B-16 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card Introduction E&M cards manage the flow of voice traffic over the network. The E&M card translates an analog signal to a digital bitstream at the local system and digital to analog at the remote system. E&M signaling types I, II, IV and V are supported. Each card controls four or eight units or channels. Normal E&M, Transmission Only and E&MR2 modes are supported. E&M cards can use voice-compression features of the ADPCM server card. 8118 E&M Card The 8118 is a 4-wire 600 Ω E&M/TO card with eight ports. This card has the same extended range feature as the 8115. All normal E&M features are supported by this card. 8119 E&M Card The 8119 is a 4-wire 600 Ω E&M/TO card with eight ports. This card has an extended TX TLP range (-17.5 to +14.5dB) to support dedicated 4-wire modem applications (this is especially important for data transmission speeds of 19.2kbps or higher). This card supports all normal E&M features. UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTRA-BUILDING CONNECTIONS ONLY In addition to the cards shown above, whose operation will be discussed in this chapter, the following discontinued models are supported by v3.6 software: 8104 E&M Card The 8104 is a 2-wire E&M car with four ports and 600Ω impedance. 8108 E&M Card The 8108 is a 2-wire E&M card with eight ports and 600Ω impedance. UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTRA-BUILDING CONNECTIONS ONLY (10-97) Page 7-A-1 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 8112 E&M Card The 8112 is a 4-wire E&M card with two ports and 600Ω impedance. 8113 E&M Card The 8113 is a 4-wire E&M card with two ports and 600Ω. 8114 E&M Card The 8114 is a 4-wire E&M card with four ports and 600Ω impedance. 8115 E&M Card The 8115 is a 4-wire E&M card with four ports and 600Ω. Page 7-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card E&M Card Settings E&M voice cards require hardware and software setup. Each E&M card has four switches (see Figure E&M-1), labeled S1 through S4, that control the type of E&M signaling the card uses. All ports on a card must use the same type of signaling. Table E&M-1 defines the switches. Table E&M-1. E&M Card Switch Definitions Switch S1 S2 S3 S4 Definition Source of the Earth lead; can be either internal (INT) or external (EXT). Type of internal source for the Earth lead; can be either battery (-48VDC) or ground (GND). Type of internal source for the Magnetic lead; can be either battery (-48VDC) or ground (GND). Normal state of the Earth lead; can either be grounded (ON) or open (OFF). Each card port number is designated on the 8 place rocker switch. All eight switches must be set to the same position (i.e., all ON or all OFF). Switch #1 Power Bus Switch #2 Edge Connector Switch #3 Switch #4 Figure E&M-1. Positions of the four E&M Card Switches Table E&M-2 lists the switch settings based on the E&M type and the signaling direction. (10-97) Page 7-A-3 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table E&M-2. E&M Card Switch Settings E&M Type I II IV V Direction Normal E&M* Trunk** Normal E&M* Trunk** Normal E&M* Trunk** Normal E&M* Trunk** S1 INT INT EXT EXT EXT EXT INT INT INT Factory Settings (default) S2 GND BAT BAT GND GND GND GND GND GND S3 GND BAT GND BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT GND S4 (all switches) OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF *Indicates the port is attached to a device that generates signaling, such as a PBX. **Indicates the port is attached to a device that does not generate signaling, such as a channel bank. In this case, the system emulates a PBX and generates signaling. Also called Reverse E&M or Pulse Link Repeater (PLR) orientation. The eight units or channels that each E&M card can control are listed on the screen in columns, as shown in Figure E&M-2. Table E&M-3 lists the setting on the E&M voice card screen along with the possible and default values. Node_1 STATE WAN TS MODE R2 TYPE Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID SIG CONV RATE ADPCM | U1 E&M 1 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 4Wx8ER 2 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 8119 3 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a Rev A2-0 4 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 5 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a Ser 00101 | 6 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 7 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a 12-31-99 14:33 8 stdby w1-1 01 e&m n/a 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64k n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure E&M-2. E&M Card Screen Page 7-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card Table E&M-3. E&M Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS MODE R2 TYPE RX TLP TX TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTERN HYBRID SIG CONV RATE ADPCM User Options stdby act w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 01-24 01-31 e&m to e&mR2 R2mod n/a -16.3 dB to +7.5 dB -16.3 dB to +7.5 dB u-law a-inv a-law idle busy off dgtl anlg none D-mW quiet n/a set1 to set8 user off on 64K 24K,1 32K,1 40K,1 24K,2 32K,2 40K,2 n/a P1 P2 P3 Notes Default stdby w1-1 1 01 e&m n/a 0 0 u-law idle off none n/a off 64K 2 3 4 5 6 n/a NOTES 1. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose TS 16 is programmed for cas or ccs. 2. The default is sl-1 if the mode selected is e&mR2 or R2mod. 3. Extended settings for 8119 card are -17.5 to +14.5dB. 4. The default is a-inv for E1 and µ-law for T1. 5. Only the 8108 E&M card (which provides a two-wire interface) supports the HYBRID parameter. 6. Choosing a RATE other than 64K allows the user to select an ADPCM slot. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the state setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. (10-97) Page 7-A-5 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available for E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link selected. (See the System Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps.) MODE The Mode setting specifies if the port uses E&M (e&m) signaling or if it operates in Transmission Only (to) mode. Use to mode if connecting to four-wire dedicated-line modems that do not require E&M signaling. The signaling type for all eight ports on an E&M card is selected by setting hardware switches S1 through S4 as described earlier in this chapter. Select e&m if you want standard Type I, II IV or V signaling. Select e&mR2 for symmetrical R2 signaling from either the digital or analog side. R2mod provides modified R2 signaling for Motorola paging terminal equipment. R2 TYPE The R2 Type setting is reserved for future use. The value of n/a is unchangeable by the user. Signaling type for all eight E&M ports on a card is selected by setting hardware switches S1-S4 as described earlier. If the Mode selected for the port is e&mR2, then the R2 Type will automatically default to sl-1. Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are decoded to analog signals. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +3 dB. Acceptable values range from -16.3 dB to +7.5 dB. Tx TLP The Transmit Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are received from the local analog port and before they are encoded to digital PCM signals. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -3 dB. Acceptable values for the extended range 8119 E&M Card comprise -17.5 dB to +14.5 dB. Acceptable values for normal range E&M Cards comprise -16.5 dB to +7.3 dB. Page 7-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. In general, in the T1/North American environment use µ-law coding. In the E1/International environment use a-law or a-inv (inverted A-law) coding; a-inv provides greater 1s density than a-law. The coding default is determined by the type of card in the WAN port you select. TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning during Carrier Group Alarm setting defines whether the E&M port should be placed in idle or busy mode upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link to which the port is assigned. The TC CGA setting has no effect on Transmission Only (to) circuits. In most cases, you should set this parameter to busy. If a call is in progress when the CGA alarm is received, the system will hold the call for two seconds, drop it and then busy out the port to the attached PBX for the duration of the alarm. Once the alarm clears, the system will automatically place the port back in idle mode thereby making it available to the attached PBX. LB The LB setting sets the loopback for this circuit to off, digital (dgtl), or analog (anlg). Figure E&M-3 illustrates the loopback options. Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Digital Loopback E&M Voice Card CODEC Digital to Analog Converter Analog Loopback Figure E&M-3. E&M Card Loopbacks (10-97) Page 7-A-7 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 PATTRN The Pattern setting sets the outgoing test pattern, generated by the system, that is sent to the selected port. A different pattern can be set for each port. The none option disables sending a test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The setting of the Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal level. The quiet option places a 600Ω termination on the line so that no analog signal is sent. HYBRID Available for the two-wire 8108 E&M card only, the Hybrid option assigns a three byte pattern to define the adjustment for return loss (similar to Build Out Capacitors). The default, set1, balances to the ideal termination of 900Ω @ 2.15mF. The other settings are reserved for future use. SIG CONV The Signaling Conversion parameter allows the user to change the ABCD signaling bits from CCITT (E1) to ANSI (T1) standards. This conversion is completed regardless of the type of WAN aggregate (CSU/DSX or CEPT) to which it is attached. The options are off (which means that ANSI signaling is used) and on (which converts transmit signaling from ANSI to CCITT format according to the Interface Card Conversion Table for E&M signaling, and also converts receive signaling from CCITT to ANSI). RATE The Rate parameter allows the user to utilize the voice compression capabilities of the ADPCM server card. If that card is not present in the system, changes cannot be made to this setting. The 64K option (default) does not use ADPCM resources (it is the normal operation rate for voice circuits). ADPCM voice channels are assigned in pairs by designating two voice ports (E&M, FXO or FXS) to the same WAN link and timeslot and selecting rate settings for the pair that add up to 64kbps (i.e. [24K,1+40K,2],[ 32K,1+32K,2] and [40K,1+24K,2]). The numeral 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. The numeral 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. For more information about voice port assignments to the ADPCM card, please consult the ADPCM section of the manual. ADPCM The ADPCM parameter lets the user choose which ADPCM card to which this E&M port is assigned. The default setting is n/a and only changes when a Rate smaller than 64k is selected (see above). The user is then allowed to select which ADPCM card to use for the port (assignment is made by chassis slot number). The options are P1, P2 and P3. Page 7-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card Menu of Actions Table E&M-4 shows the Menu of Actions for the E&M Card. Table E&M-4. E&M Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Initiates and monitors testing of all E&M card ports. Refer to Test section below. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Test The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing the user to monitor and set the status of the analog interface leads as well as monitoring and setting the value of the A, B, C and D signaling bits of all E&M circuits on that card. In cross-connect systems only, the test option can also apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system. The Test screen also shows the signaling type assigned to this card via the switch settings described earlier. Figure E&M-4 shows the E&M Card Test parameters and Table E&M-5 shows the settings for each. (10-97) Page 7-A-9 E&M Card Node_1 | U1 SIG MON = OFF Reference Guide v3.6 E&M 4Wx8ER 8119 Rev A2-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD E-lead TO USER TO NTWK 1 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 2 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 3 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 4 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 5 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 6 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 7 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 8 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a Tx ABCD Rx ABCD E-lead M-lead MODE STATUS n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb n/a n/a off off e&m W stb E&M Signaling Type: I-t Save | Undo | Refresh | Main | siG mon Figure E&M-4. E&M Card Test Screen Table E&M-5. E&M Card Test Screen Options Parameter SIG MON TEST TX ABCD RX ABCD E-LEAD TO USER TO NTWK TX ABCD RX ABCD E-LEAD M-LEAD MODE STATUS User Options off on off on mon set mon set mon set PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input quiet quiet Default off off mon mon mon PCM PCM n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a SIG MON The Signaling Monitor feature works with the user card alarm system (see Basic Operations section) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The system will generate alarms if the number of transitions of any signaling bit in transmit or receive direction for an active port exceeds 255 in any four-second interval. The options are off and on. They are toggled using the “G” command in the Menu of Actions. Page 7-A-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card TEST The Test parameter shows if the port is in test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active ports are off and on. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to transmit. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to receive. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. The Rx ABCD bits cannot be set in bus-connect systems and the only option is mon (monitor). E-lead The E-lead setting allows the user to either monitor or set the E lead. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up the options off (which drops the E lead) and on (which raises the E lead). TO USER In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the user side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the user and that the PCM signal received from the network should continue to be sent to the user port in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. TO NTWK In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the network side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the network and that the PCM signal received from the user port should continue to be sent to the network in the normal manner. (10-97) Page 7-A-11 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD information field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD information field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. E-Lead The E-lead information field shows the current status of the E-lead of this port. The settings are either on or off. M-Lead The M-lead information field shows the current status of the M-lead of this port. The settings are either on or off. MODE The Mode informational field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main E&M card screen. Valid settings are e&m, to, e&mR2 and R2mod. STATUS The Status information field shows the current status of the port. Table E&M-6 lists and describes all of the possible conditions that are reported in this field. Page 7-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card Table E&M-6. Status Information Field Settings Setting stdby W stb W tst W OOS noWAN OOS Call Busy idle TC test maint Meaning The E&M port is in standby. The WAN that the E&M port is assigned to is in standby. The WAN that the E&M port is assigned to is in test. The WAN that the E&M port is assigned to is Out Of Service. No WAN card configured in the slot to which the E&M port is assigned. The E&M card is Out of Service. Call set-up is in progress. A call is in progress. The E&M circuit is not being used and is available. The E&M circuit is undergoing Trunk Conditioning because of a CGA alarm on the WAN to which it is assigned. The operator is actively controlling the circuit by setting values for Tx ABCD, Rx ABCD or E-lead. The E&M port is undergoing maintenance. E&M Signaling Type The E&M signaling type that was set by the switch configuration mentioned earlier is displayed in this field. The user can check the switch settings without having to remove the card. The E&M Signaling types are I, II, IV and V, followed by a “-t” if the card is set to provide trunk signaling. Menu of Actions Table E&M-7 shows the Menu of Actions for the E&M card test screen. Table E&M-7. E&M Card Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main siG mon (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Returns to the E&M card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Works with the user card alarm system (see Basic Operations section) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The options are off and on. They are toggled using the “G” command in the Menu of Actions. Page 7-A-13 E&M Card Reference Guide v3.6 Page 7-A-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card Introduction Foreign Exchange Station Cards manage the flow of FXS voice traffic over the network. The FXS card translates an analog signal to a digital bitstream at the local system and digital to analog at the remote system. All cards have a two-wire interface that supports Foreign Exchange Station, Private Line Automatic Ringdown, Foreign Exchange Software Defined Network, Dial Pulse Originating and Wink operations. FXS cards can use the voice-compression features of the ADPCM server card. FXS Cards also support digital to analog conversion as outlined in TR-TSY-000008 for circuits using Subscriber Loop Carriers (SLC96) facilities. 8129 FXS Card The 8129 FXS Card has eight ports and provides 600Ω terminating impedance. All FXS features are supported by this card. UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTRA-BUILDING CONNECTIONS ONLY In addition to the card shown above, whose operation will be discussed in this chapter, the following discontinued models are supported by v3.6 software: 8122 FXS Card 8122 FXS Card has two ports and provides 900Ω terminating impedance. 8123 FXS Card 8123 FXS Card has two ports and provides 600Ω terminating impedance. 8124 FXS Card 8124 FXS Card has four ports and provides 900Ω terminating impedance. 8125 FXS Card 8125 FXS Card has four ports and provides 600Ω terminating impedance. 8128 FXS Card 8128 FXS Card has eight ports and provides 900Ω terminating impedance. (10-97) Page 7-B-1 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card Settings FXS card setting options are displayed in columns on the FXS card screen, as shown in Figure FXS-1. Table FXS-1 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with the possible and default values. The settings are similar to those for other voice cards. Node_1 14:33 STATE WAN TS MODE TYPE Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID RINGBK SIG CONV RATE ADPCM | 1 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a U1 FXS 2 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 2Wx8-9 3 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 8129 4 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Rev A8-0 5 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Ser 00101 6 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a | 7 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 12-31-99 8 stdby w1-1 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure FXS-1. FXS Card Screen Page 7-B-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card Table FXS-1. FXS Card Setting Options and Defaults PARAMETER STATE WAN TS MODE TYPE RX TLP TX TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTERN HYBRID RINGBK SIG CONV RATE ADPCM USER OPTIONS stdby act w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 01-24 01-31 fxs fxsdn wink plar dpo slc96 loop lp-fd gs gs-i gs-a ls-R2 -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB u-law a-inv a-law idle busy off dgtl anlg none D-mW quiet set1 to set8 user off on off on 64k 24k,1 32k,1 40k,1 24k,2 32k,2 40k,2 n/a P1 P2 P3 NOTES DEFAULT stdby w1-1 1 2 3 4 01 fxs loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a NOTES 1. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose TS 16 is programmed for cas or ccs. 2. These options are only valid if the Mode selected is fxs or wink. If the Mode is fxsdn, then the Type options are the same as above with the addition of fgd and boa. If the Mode is plar, then the Type options are d3 or d4. If the Mode is dpo, then the Type setting will automatically default to dpo. 3. The default is a-inv for E1 and µ-law for T1. These values will change depending upon the WAN link selected. 4. Choosing RATE other than 64k allows the user to select an ADPCM slot. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. (10-97) Page 7-B-3 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link; see the Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps. MODE The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which you are connecting the port. All options use two-wire balanced connections. The fxs (Foreign Exchange Station) option allows you to connect the system to a 2 way (both inbound and outbound calls) PBX trunk or a key system trunk. The system requires a ringing generator for this option. The fxsdn (Foreign Exchange Software Defined Network) option provides access to new services offered by advanced networks from many major carriers. The system requires a ringing generator for this option. The wink option uses the same type of signaling as fxsdn and provides a 150MS delay, then a 200MS "wink" back to the central office when the FXS card sees an off-hook condition from the central office. The system requires a ringing generator for this option. The plar (private line automatic ringdown) option provides point-to-point unswitched connections between two telephone sets. This configuration is usually not attached to an exchange or switch; rather it provides a “hot line” between two locations. The unit requires a ringing generator for this option. The dpo (Dial Pulse Originating) option allows the unit to attach to out-going one-way trunks from a PBX, key system, or a telephone set. This option is very similar to the fxs option; however, the system does not require a ringing generator. The slc96 (Subscriber Loop Carrier 96) option allows the unit to attach to out-going one-way trunks from a PBX, CENTREX, key system, or a telephone set to a SLC96 channel. The slc96 mode must be active on the WAN card selected. TYPE The Type setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXS equipment and the remote switch. Use the loop (Loop Start) option with POTS stations and simple PBX trunks. Use the lp-fd (Loop Start - Forward Disconnect) option with automated answering equipment. Use the gs (Ground Start) option with two-way PBX trunks because it helps to prevent glaring or call collisions. Use the gs-i (Ground Start Immediate) option for equipment requiring fast-response time to the station or PBX. Use the gs-a (Ground Start Automatic) option for equipment requiring fast-response time to the central office. The selection you choose must match the behavior of both the station equipment and the remote central office or PBX equipment. If you selected the fxsdn mode, the choice of fgd is offered to make the circuit compatible with Feature Group "D" high-speed modem services that require special software. An additional choice of boa (bill on answer) sends a signal back to the office when the customer answers the phone to start billing for the call. Page 7-B-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card If you selected the plar option for the Mode of this port, then the two options that are supported under Type are d3 and d4 which meet the pre-1988 and post-1988 specifications for PLAR circuits. If you selected dpo as the Mode, the Type will automatically default to dpo. If slc96 is selected for Mode, the two options supported are sp (single party) and uvg (universal voice grade). Caution: Before activating this port, verify the behavior expected by both the station equipment and the remote central office equipment and ensure that you have the system properly configured. Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are decoded to analog signals. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB. Tx TLP The Transmit Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are received from the local analog port and before they are encoded to digital PCM signals. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -3 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB. CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. In general, in the T1/North American environment use µ-law coding. In the E1/International environment use a-law or a-inv (inverted A-law) coding; a-inv provides greater 1s density than a-law. The coding default is determined by the type of card in the WAN port you select. TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning during Carrier Group Alarm setting defines whether the FXS port should be placed in idle or busy mode upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link to which the port is assigned. In most cases, you should set this parameter to busy. If a call is in progress when the CGA alarm is received, the system will hold the call for two seconds, drop it and then busy out the port to the attached PBX for the duration of the alarm. Once the alarm clears, the system will automatically place the port back in idle mode thereby making it available to the attached PBX. (10-97) Page 7-B-5 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 LB The Loopback setting sets the loopback for this circuit to off, digital (dgtl), or analog (anlg). Figure FXS-2 illustrates the loopback options. Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Digital Loopback FXS Voice Card CODEC Digital to Analog Converter Analog Loopback Figure FXS-2. FXS Card Loopbacks PATTR The Pattern setting sets the outgoing test pattern for this analog port. The pattern, generated by the system, is sent to the selected port. A different pattern can be set for each port. The none option disables sending a test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The setting of the Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal level. The quiet option places a 900Ω termination on the line so that no analog signal is sent. HYBRID The Hybrid option assigns a three byte pattern to define the adjustment for return loss (similar to Build Out Capacitors). The default, set1, balances to the ideal termination of 900Ω @ 2.15mF in the case of the 8124 and 8128 cards 600Ω @ 2.15mF in the case of the 8125 and 8129 cards. The other settings are reserved for future use. RINGBK The ringback setting specifies whether a ringback tone is generated by the system and sent towards the network. The options are off and on. This option should be turned on when the network service does not provide an audible ringing tone to the calling party. Page 7-B-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card SIG CONV The Signaling Conversion parameter allows the user to change the ABCD signaling bits from CCITT (E1) to ANSI (T1) standards. This conversion is completed regardless of the type of WAN aggregate (CSU/DSX or CEPT) to which it is attached. The options are off (which means that ANSI signaling is used) and on (which converts transmit signaling from ANSI to CCITT format according to the Interface Card Conversion Table for FXS signaling, and also converts receive signaling from CCITT to ANSI). RATE The Rate parameter allows the user to utilize the voice compression capabilities of the ADPCM server card. If that card is not present in the system, changes cannot be made to this setting. The 64k option (default) does not use ADPCM resources (it is the normal operation rate for voice circuits). ADPCM voice channels are assigned in pairs by designating two voice ports (E&M, FXO or FXS) to the same WAN link and timeslot and selecting rate settings for the pair that add up to 64kbps (i.e. [24k,1+40k,2],[ 32k,1+32k,2] and [40k,1+24k,2]). The numeral 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. The numeral 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. For more information about voice port assignments to the ADPCM card, please consult the ADPCM section of the manual. ADPCM The ADPCM parameter lets the user choose which ADPCM card to place this E&M port. The default setting is n/a and only changes when a Rate smaller than 64k is selected (see above). The user is then allowed to select which ADPCM card to use for the port (assignment is made by chassis slot number). The options are P1, P2 and P3. (10-97) Page 7-B-7 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table FXS-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the FXS Card. Table FXS-2. FXS Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Initiates and monitors testing of all FXS card ports. Refer to Test section below. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Test The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing the user to monitor and set the status of the analog interface leads as well as monitoring and setting the value of the A, B, C and D signaling bits of all FXS circuits on that card. In cross-connect systems only, the test option also allows the user to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system. Figure FXS-3 shows the FXS Card Test parameters and Table FXS-3 shows the settings for each. Page 7-B-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card Node_1 | 14:33 SIG MON = OFF U1 FXS 2Wx8-9 8129 Rev A8-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK 1 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 2 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 3 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 4 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 5 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 6 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 7 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 8 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb Save | Undo | Refresh | Main | siG Mon Figure FXS-3. FXS Card Test Screen Table FXS-3. FXS Card Test Parameters Parameter SIG MON TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS User Options off on off on mon set mon set mon set PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input quiet quiet Default off off mon mon mon PCM PCM n/a n/a RbTo off fxs loop W stb SIG MON The Signaling Monitor feature works with the user card alarm system (see Basic Operations section) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The system will generate alarms if the number of transitions of any signaling bit in transmit or receive direction for an active port exceeds 255 in any four second interval. The options are off and on, and they are toggled using the G command in the Menu of Actions. (10-97) Page 7-B-9 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 TEST The Test parameter shows if the port is in test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active ports are off and on. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field to input the ABCD pattern you want to transmit. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to receive. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. The Rx ABCD bits cannot be set in bus-connect systems and the only option is mon (monitor). T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control setting allows the user to either monitor (mon) or set (set) the state of the Tip and Ring leads of an FXS port. Choosing set will bring up the following options (b=battery, o=open, g=ground): RbTo -48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open TbRo -48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is open RbTg -48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg -48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded TO USER In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the user side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the user and that the PCM signal received from the network should continue to be sent to the user port in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. Page 7-B-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card TO NTWK In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the network side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the network and that the PCM signal received from the user port should continue to be sent to the network in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control informational field shows the current status of the Tip and Ring leads of the FXS port from the perspective of the system. The possible values are (b=battery, o=open, g=ground): RbTo -48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open TbRo -48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is open RbTg -48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg -48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded ring ringing voltage is applied between Tip and Ring T-R-STAT The Tip and Ring Status informational field describes what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXS port. The possible values are: (10-97) loop attached device is connecting Tip and Ring together rgnd the Ring lead is grounded by the attached device open the Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip lead or to ground Page 7-B-11 FXS Card Reference Guide v3.6 MODE The Mode informational field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main FXS card Screen. Valid settings are fxs, fxsdn, wink, plar, dpo or slc96. TYPE The Type informational field shows the current status of the signal field selected on the main FXS card screen for this port. Valid settings for fxs and wink modes are loop start (loop), loop start - forward disconnect (lp-fd), ground start (gs), ground start immediate (gs-i) and ground start automatic (gs-a). Valid settings for fxsdn modes are loop start (loop), loop start - forward disconnect (lp-fd), ground start (gs), ground start immediate (gs-i), ground start automatic (gs-a) and fgd (Feature Group "D"). Valid settings for the plar mode are (d3) and (d4). The only valid setting for the dpo mode is dial pulse originating (dpo). STATUS The Status informational field shows the current status of the port. Table FXS-4 lists and describes all of the possible conditions that are reported in this field. Table FXS-4. Status Information Field Settings Setting stdby W stb W tst W OOS noWAN call busy idle TC test maint Page 7-B-12 Meaning The FXS port is in standby. The WAN that the FXS port is assigned to is in standby. The WAN that the FXS port is assigned to is in test. The WAN that the FXS port is assigned to is Out Of Service. There is no WAN card configured in the slot to which the FXS port is assigned. Call set-up is in progress. A call is in progress. The FXS circuit is not being used and is available. The FXS circuit is undergoing Trunk Conditioning because of a CGA alarm on the WAN to which it is assigned. The operator is actively controlling the circuit by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD. The FXS port is in maintenance condition. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card Menu of Actions Table FXS-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the FXS Card Test Screen. Table FXS-5. FXS Card Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main siG mon (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Returns to the FXS card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. The signal monitor is used with the user card alarm system to notify the user of excessive transitions of signaling bits. Page 7-B-13 FXS Card Page 7-B-14 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card Introduction Foreign Exchange Office Cards manage the flow of FXO voice traffic over the network. The FXO card translates an analog signal to a digital bitstream at the local system and digital to analog at the remote system. All FXO cards have a two-wire interface and support Foreign Exchange Office functions, Manual Ringdown, Foreign Exchange Defined Network and Dial Pulse Terminating operations. FXO cards can use the voicecompression features of the ADPCM server card. 8139 FXO Card The 8139 FXO Card is an eight port card with 600Ω terminating impedance. All FXO features are supported by this card. UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTRA-BUILDING CONNECTIONS ONLY In addition to the card shown above, whose operation will be discussed in this chapter, the following discontinued models are supported by v3.6 software: 8132 FXO Card The 8132 FXO Card is a two port card with 900Ω terminating impedance. 8133 FXO Card The 8133 FXO Card is a two port card with 600Ω terminating impedance. 8134 FXO Card The 8134 FXO Card is a four port card with 900Ω terminating impedance. 8135 FXO Card The 8135 FXO Card is a four port card with 600Ω terminating impedance. 8138 FXO Card The 8138 FXO Card is a four port card with 900Ω terminating impedance. (10-97) Page 7-C-1 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card Settings FXO card setting options are displayed in columns on the FXO card screen, as shown in Figure FXO-1. Table FXO-1 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with the possible and default values. The settings are similar to those for other voice cards. Node_1 STATE WAN TS MODE SIGNAL Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID WK DLY WINK SIG CONV RATE ADPCM | U1 FXO 1 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a 2Wx8-9 2 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a 8139 3 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a Rev C2-0 4 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a 5 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a Ser 00101 6 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a | 12-31-99 14:33 7 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a 8 stdby w1-1 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure FXO-1. FXO Card Screen Table FXO-1. FXO Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS MODE SIGNAL RX TLP TX TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTERN HYBRID WK DLY WINK SIG CONV RATE Page 7-C-2 User Options stdby act w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w4-2 01-24 01-31 fxo fxodn dpt mrd loop gs lp-fd R2 gs-a lp-em -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB u-law a-law a-inv idle busy off dgtl anlg none D-mW quiet set1 to set8 user 00-99 00-199 off on 64k 24k,1 32k,1 40k,1 24k,2 32k,2 40k,2 Notes Default stdby w1-1 1 2 3 4 4 01 fxo loop 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 0 0 off 64k (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card ADPCM n/a P1 P2 P3 5 n/a NOTES 1. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose TS 16 is programmed for cas or ccs. 2. These options are only valid if the Mode selected is fxo, or fxodn. If the mode is dpt, then the Type options are dpt (default), R2 or i-R2. If the Mode is mrd, then the Type setting will automatically default to mrd. 3. The default is a-inv for E1 and m-law for T1. These values will change depending upon the WAN link selected. 4. These settings should be used with fxodn and dpt modes only. 5. Choosing a RATE other than 64k allows the user to select an ADPCM slot. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link. See the System Operations chapter for information about defining cross-connect maps. MODE The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which you connect the port. All options use two-wire balanced connections. The fxo (Foreign Exchange Office) option allows you to connect the system to a 2 way PBX trunk (both inbound and outbound calls) or a key system trunk. The fxodn (Foreign Exchange Office Defined Network) option provides access to new services offered by advanced networks from many major carriers. The dpt (Dial Pulse Terminating) option allows the unit to attach to incoming one-way trunks from a PBX, key system, or a telephone set. This option is similar to the fxo option. (10-97) Page 7-C-3 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 The mrd (manual ringdown) option provides point-to-point unswitched connections between two telephone sets. This configuration is usually not attached to an exchange or switch; rather it provides a “hot line” between two locations. The system requires hardware changes and a ringing generator for this option (see instructions later in this chapter). SIGNAL The Signal setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXO equipment and the remote switch. Use the loop (Loop Start) option with telephone sets and simple PBX trunks. Use the gs (Ground Start) option with two-way PBX trunks because it helps to prevent glaring or call collisions. Use the lp-fd (Loop Start - Forward Disconnect) option with automated answering equipment. The R2 option is provided for a CCITT R2 interface. The selection you choose must match the behavior of the station equipment and the remote central office or PBX equipment. If you selected the dpt option for the Mode of any port, then the three options that are supported under Type are dpt for standard Dial Pulse Termination signaling used in North America, R2 for CCITT signaling used internationally and i-R2 (immediate R2) which provides immediate seizure acknowledgment to the network. If you selected mrd as the Mode, then Type will automatically default to mrd. Caution: Before activating a port, verify the behavior expected by both the station equipment and the remote central office equipment and ensure that you have the system properly configured. Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are decoded to analog signals. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB. Tx TLP The Transmit Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are received from the local analog port and before they are encoded to digital PCM signals. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -3 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB. Page 7-C-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. In general, in the T1/North American environment use m-law coding. In the E1/International environment use a-law or a-inv (inverted A-law) coding; a-inv provides greater 1s density than a-law. The coding default is determined by the type of card in the WAN port you select. TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning during Carrier Group Alarm setting defines whether the FXO port should be placed in idle or busy mode upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link to which the port is assigned. In most cases, you should set this parameter to busy. If a call is in progress when the CGA alarm is received, the system will hold the call for two seconds, drop it and then busy out the port to the attached PBX for the duration of the alarm. Once the alarm clears, the system will automatically place the port back in idle mode thereby making it available to the attached PBX. LB The Loopback setting sets the loopback for this circuit to off, digital (dgtl), or analog (anlg). Figure FXO-2 illustrates the loopback options. Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Digital Loopback FXO Voice Card CODEC Digital to Analog Converter Analog Loopback Figure FXO-2. FXO Card Loopbacks (10-97) Page 7-C-5 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 PATTRN The Pattern setting sets the outgoing test pattern for this analog port. The pattern, generated by the system, is sent only to the currently selected port. The none option disables sending a test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal level. The quiet option places a 900Ω termination on the line so that no analog signal is sent. HYBRID The Hybrid option assigns a three byte pattern to define the adjustment for return loss (similar to Build Out Capacitors). The default, set1, balances to the ideal termination of 900Ω & 2.15mF, in the case of the 8134 and 8138 cards and to 600Ω @ 2.15mF, in the case of the 8135 and 8139 cards. The other settings are reserved for future use. WK DLY The Wink Delay setting allows the user to set the wink delay time. The options are units of 100 milliseconds. Settings are 1-99 (100 milliseconds to 9.9 seconds). The Wink Delay and Wink options are applicable to CCITT systems for determining the delay of the R2 state machine. They should only be used with modes fxodn and dpt (R2 and i-R2). WINK The Wink setting allows the user to set the wink duration time. The options are units of 100 milliseconds. Settings are 1-99 (100 milliseconds to 9.9 seconds). This option is only applicable with modes fxodn and dpt (R2 and i-R2). SIG CONV The Signaling Conversion parameter allows the user to change the ABCD signaling bits from CCITT (E1) to ANSI (T1) standards. This conversion is completed regardless of the type of WAN aggregate (CSU/DSX or CEPT) to which it is attached. The options are off (which means that ANSI signaling is used) and on (which converts transmit signaling from ANSI to CCITT format according to the Interface Card Conversion Table for FXO signaling, and also converts receive signaling from CCITT to ANSI). RATE The Rate parameter allows the user to utilize the voice compression capabilities of the ADPCM server card. If that card is not present in the system, changes cannot be made to this setting. The 64k option (default) does not use ADPCM resources (it is the normal operation rate for voice circuits). Page 7-C-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card ADPCM voice channels are assigned in pairs by designating two voice ports (E&M, FXO or FXS) to the same WAN link and timeslot and selecting rate settings for the pair that add up to 64kbps (i.e. [24k,1+40k,2],[ 32k,1+32k,2] and [40k,1+24k,2]). The numeral 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. The numeral 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. For more information about voice port assignments to the ADPCM card, please consult the ADPCM section of the manual. ADPCM The ADPCM parameter lets the user choose the ADPCM card on which to place this FXO port. The default setting is n/a and only changes when a Rate smaller than 64k is selected (see above). The user is then allowed to select which ADPCM card to use for the port (assignment is made by chassis slot number). The options are P1, P2 and P3. Menu of Actions Table FXO-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the FXO Card. Table FXO-2. FXO Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Initiates and monitors testing of all FXO card ports. Refer to Test section below. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Test The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing the user to monitor and set the status of the analog interface leads as well as monitoring and setting the value of the A, B, C and D signaling bits of all FXO circuits on that card. In cross-connect systems only, the test option also allows the user to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system. Figure FXO-3 shows the FXO Card Test parameters and Table FXO-3 shows the settings for each. (10-97) Page 7-C-7 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | U1 SIG MON = OFF FXO 2Wx8-9 8139 Rev C2-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 14:33 2 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 3 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 4 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 5 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a 6 7 8 TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK 1 n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a n/a mon mon mon n/a n/a Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb n/a n/a n/a n/a fxo loop W stb Save | Undo | Refresh | Main | siG mon Figure FXO-3. FXO Card Test Screen Table FXO-3. FXO Card Test Screen Parameters Parameter SIG MON TEST TX ABCD RX ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK TX ABCD RX ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS User Options off on off on mon set mon set mon set PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input Information only - no user input quiet quiet Default off off mon mon mon PCM PCM n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a SIG MON The Signaling Monitor feature works with the user card alarm system (see Basic Operations section) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The system will generate alarms if the number of transitions of any signaling bit in transmit or receive direction for an active port exceeds 255 in any four second interval. The options are off and on, and they are toggled using the G command in the Menu of Actions. Page 7-C-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card TEST The Test Parameter shows if the port is in the test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active ports are off and on. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to transmit. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to receive. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. The Rx ABCD bits cannot be set in bus-connect systems and the only option is mon (monitor). T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control setting allows the user to either monitor (mon) or set (set) the state of the Tip and Ring leads of an FXO port. Choosing set will bring up the following options: loop the Tip and Ring leads are tied together open the Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip or to ground TO USER In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone toward the user side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the user and that the PCM signal received from the network should continue to be sent to the user port in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. (10-97) Page 7-C-9 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 TO NTWK In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone toward the network side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the network and that the PCM signal received from the user port should continue to be sent to the network in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD information field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD information field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control information field shows the current status of the Tip and Ring leads of the FXO port from the perspective of the system. The possible values are: loop the Tip and Ring leads are tied together open the Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip or to ground rgnd the Ring lead is grounded lpgnd the Tip and Ring leads are tied together and the Tip is grounded ring ringing voltage is being applied between the Tip and Ring T-R-STAT The Tip and Ring Status information field describes what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXO port. The possible values are: Page 7-C-10 ring attached device is applying ringing voltage between Tip and Ring TbRg attached device is applying -48V battery to the Tip lead and is grounding the Ring lead ToRo attached device is leaving both the Tip and Ring leads open TgRo attached device is grounding the Tip lead and leaving the Ring lead open RbTg attached device is applying -48V battery to the Ring lead and is grounding the Tip lead (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card RbTo attached device is applying -48V battery to the Ring lead and is leaving the Tip lead open TgR* attached device is grounding the Tip lead and the state of the Ring lead is unknown ToR* attached device is leaving the Tip lead open and the state of the Ring lead is unknown RoT* attached device is leaving the Ring lead open and the state of the Tip lead is unknown n/a information is not available MODE The Mode information field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main FXO card Screen. Valid settings are fxo, fxodn, dpt or mrd. TYPE The Type information field shows the current status of the signal field selected on the main FXO card screen for this port. Valid settings for both fxo and fxodn modes are loop (loop), ground start (gs), loop start-forward disconnect (lp-fd) and R2 (R2). Valid settings for the dpt mode are dial pulse terminating (dpt), R2 (R2) and immediate R2 (i-R2). The only valid setting for the mrd mode is manual ringdown (mrd). STATUS The Status information field shows the current status of the port. Table FXO-4 lists and describes all of the possible conditions that are reported in this field. Table FXO-4. Status Information Field Settings Setting stdby W stb W tst W OOS noWAN call busy idle TC test maint (10-97) Meaning The FXO port is in standby. The WAN that the FXO port is assigned to is in standby. The WAN that the FXO port is assigned to is in test. The WAN that the FXO port is assigned to is Out Of Service. There is no WAN card configured in the slot to which the FXO port is assigned. Call set-up is in progress. A call is in progress. The FXO circuit is not being used and is available. The FXO circuit is undergoing Trunk Conditioning because of a CGA alarm on the WAN to which it is assigned. The operator is actively controlling the circuit by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD. The FXO port is in maintenance condition. Page 7-C-11 FXO Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table FXO-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the FXO Card Test Screen. Table FXO-5. FXO Card Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main siG mon Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Returns to the FXO card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. The signal monitor is used with the user card alarm system to notify the user of excessive transitions of signaling bits. Setting Jumpers on the FXO Card Setting or resetting jumpers is necessary for conversion of individual ports on the FXO card to mrd (Manual Ringdown) mode. To make this conversion, remove the FXO card from its slot and connect shorting jumpers (ordered separately) vertically from #1 to #2 on both sets of pins next to the front edge of the card as shown in Figure FXO-4. The numbers (#1 and #2) are not stenciled on the card, but they are shown here to clarify the procedure. Ports can be set individually for the mrd feature, but once set, remain in the mrd mode until the jumpers are removed. This information is repeated in the Installation chapter. Page 7-C-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card Jumpers to Reset Port #8 Port #7 Port #6 ∧ 1 1 ∧ 1 1 Power Bus 2 2 Edge ∧ 1 1 2 2 Connector 2 2 Port #5 Port #4 Port #3 ∧ 1 1 2 2 ∧ 1 1 ∧ 1 1 2 2 2 2 Port #2 ∧ 1 1 2 2 Port #1 ∧ 1 1 2 2 Jumpers to Reset Figure FXO-4. Jumpers for mrd Mode (10-97) Page 7-C-13 FXO Card Page 7-C-14 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card Introduction This chapter provides connector pinout, configuration, and troubleshooting information for the Foreign Exchange - Station (FXSC) Coin Voice Cards. These cards manage the flow of FXS voice traffic over the network. Each card encodes analog (voice, VF) signals to a digital bitstream at the local system for transmission over a T1 or E1 network. It also decodes the digital signals to analog at the remote system. Each FXS coin card has two-wires interfaces that support FXS, Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR), Foreign Exchange Station-Defined Network (FXSDN), Dial-Pulse Originating (DPO), and Wink-start operations. The FXS cards also can use the voicecompression features of an ADPCM card. 8149 FXS Coin Card The 8149 FXS Coin Card has six ports and two wires, providing a 600-ohm terminating impedance. The card consists of backplane interface circuitry, serial EEPROM for card identification and adjustment parameters storage, metering pulse interface extension between Coin Box Office (CO) and coin phone on the side of the coin phone, and six voice line interface circuits. Each line interface circuit consists of a codec, a hybrid circuit. FXS Coin Card Settings External Card Connectors and Pinouts Refer to the Pinout Chapter in this manual. Card Jumper/Switch Settings The FXS Coin Card does not have any jumpers or switches on its motherboard. Installing the FXS Coin Card Install the FXS Coin Card in any user card slot. These slots are U1 to U8 on the twosided chassis and front-loading chassis with power supplies on top, or P1 to P4 and W1 to W4 on the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the side. (10-97) Page 7-D-1 FXS Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card User Screens and Settings Main Screen You must configure the FXS Coin Card for operation after installing it into the system chassis. This is done from the FXS Coin Card Main Screen (see Figure FXSC-1). To go to that screen, highlight the desired card in the System Main Screen and press . This screen shows one configuration column for each port on the card. Node_1 STATE WAN TS MODE TYPE Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID RINGBK SIG CONV RATE ADPCM | U2 FXSC 6-600 1 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-laq idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 2 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 3 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Rev D1-0 4 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Ser 00061 5 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 6 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a | 7 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a 12-31-99 14:33 8 stdby w1-1 01 fxsc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 off off 64k n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure FXSC-1. Typical FXS Coin Card Main Screen The bottom highlighted line of this screen shows various actions that you can perform from the screen. You perform the desired action by pressing the associated capital letter key. Table FXSC-1 summarizes these actions. For example, after you configure the FXS coin card ports, press “s” to save your settings. Page 7-D-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card Menu of Actions Table FXSC-1. Main Screen Actions Action Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e., test status). Copy Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Test Initiates and monitors testing of all FXS coin card ports. Refer to the Test section of this chapter. Main Returns to the Systems Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to either save or lose your changes. Table FXSC-2 summarizes the configuration settings for the FXS coin card, along with the available and factory-default option settings. The parameters and settings are also described in the following paragraphs. Table FXSC-2. Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults Parameter User Options stdby actv Notes STATE Default stby WAN w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-3 w4-1 w4-2 1 w1-1 TS 01-24 2 01 MODE fxsc fxsc TYPE hf-a1 hf-a2 hf-cb rb-a1 rb-a2 rb-cb hf-a1 RX TLP -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB 0.0 TX TLP -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB 0.0 CODING u-law TC CGA idle busy idle LB off dgtl anlg off PATTERN none D-mW quiet HYBRID set1 to set8 user RINGBK off on RATE 64K, 24K,1 32K,1 40K,1 24K,2 32K,2 40K,2 ADPCM n/a 01-31 a-law P1 a-inv 3 u-law none 4 set1 off P2 5 P3 64K n/a NOTES (10-97) 1. Choosing wan allows you to choose a WAN port (w1-1 through w4-2). 2. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose time slot 16 is programmed for CAS or CCS. Page 7-D-3 FXS Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 3. The default is a-inv for E1 and u-law for T1. These values will change depending upon the WAN link selected. 4. The default (set1) is the only active option. It balances to the ideal termination of 600 ohms + 2.15 uF. The other settings are reserved for future use. 5. Choosing a Rate other than 64K allows you to select an ADPCM. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to stdby (standby) for ports that are not to be used or that have not yet been configured. Set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. If you choose wan, you also must select the desired port (w1-1 through w4-2) of a WAN card for transmission over a T1 or E1 link. This can be an ATM or FRS card, which resides in chassis slot P1, P2, or P3. You must then choose a logical port on that card. The user option is not used. It is not necessary to assign all ports of the same FXS coin card to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1 to 24 for T1 links and 1 to 31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to the cross-connect map for the WAN link; see the Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps. MODE The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which the user is connecting the port. All options use two-wire balanced connections. The fxsc (Foreign Exchange Station-Coin) option allows users to connect the system to a two-way (both inbound and outbound calls) PBX trunk or a key system trunk. TYPE The Type setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXSC equipment and the remote switch. These settings are hf-a1 (high frequency - 12kHz), hf-a2 (high frequency - 16kHz), hf-cb (high frequency-clear back), rb-a1 (reverse battery-answer 1), rb-a2 (reverse battery-answer 2), and rb-cb (reverse battery-clear back). Page 7-D-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point (TLP) setting controls the amount of gain or loss added to the incoming signal after it is decoded to analog. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive value (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative value (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. The Rx TLP range is -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB. Tx TLP The Transmit TLP setting controls the amount of gain or loss added to a voice signal from the CPE before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative value (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive value (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting the Tx TLP to -3 dB. The Tx TLP range is -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB. CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. Generally, the North American T1 environment uses m-law coding, and the International E1 environment uses a-law or a-inv (inverted A-law) coding. The a-inv setting provides a higher ones density than a-law. The default coding setting is determined by the type of associated WAN card. TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning during Carrier Group Alarm setting defines whether the FXS port should be forced idle or busy upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link to which the port is assigned. In most cases, you should set this parameter to busy. If a call is in progress when the CGA alarm is received, the system will hold the call for two seconds, drop it, and then busy out the port to the attached PBX for the duration of the alarm. Once the alarm clears, the system will automatically place the port back in the idle mode, making it available to the PBX. LB The Loopback field lets you loop the port back toward the network and far end. The dgtl (digital) loopback sends the incoming digital DS0 signal back to the far end without decoding it. The anlg (analog) loopback sends the decoded analog signal back to the far end after decoding and then re-encoding it. Figure FXSC-2 shows the loopback options, which allow you to test and troubleshoot the FXS card. To disable a loopback, set this field to off. (10-97) Page 7-D-5 FXS Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Digital Loopback CODEC Digital to Analog Converter Analog Loopback Figure FXSC-2. FXS Coin Card Loopbacks PATTRN The Pattern field selects an outgoing test pattern for the current card port. The test pattern is generated by the system and sent to the selected port. You can select a different pattern for each port. The none option disables the test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The setting of the Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal level. The quiet option places a 600-ohm termination on the line so that no analog signal is sent (idle mode). HYBRID The Hybrid option assigns a three byte pattern to define the adjustment for return loss (similar to Build Out Capacitors). The default, set1, balances to the ideal termination of 600 ohms + 2.15 uF. The other settings are reserved for future use. RINGBK The ringback setting specifies whether a ringback tone is generated by the system and sent towards the network. Turn this option off when the network service does not provide an audible ringing tone to the calling party. RATE The Rate parameter allows you to use the voice compression capabilities of an ADPCM card. If that card is not present in the system, the Rate stays at 64k and cannot be changed. The 64k option is the normal encoding/decoding rate for voice circuits. Page 7-D-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card ADPCM voice channels are assigned in pairs by designating two voice ports (E&M, FXO, or FXS) to the same WAN link and timeslot, and selecting rate settings for the pair that add up to 64 kbps. The following combinations are possible: 24K,1+40K,2 (24 kb coding on one side of the time slot and 40 kb coding on the other side of the same time slot) 32K,1+32K,2 (32 kb encoding on each side of a time slot) 40K,1+24K,2 (40 kb coding on one side of the time slot and 24 kb coding on the other side) Number 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. Number 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. For more information about voice port assignments to an ADPCM card, please consult Chapter 7A of this guide. The number 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. The number 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. For more information about voice port assignments to the ADPCM card, please consult the ADPCM section of the manual. ADPCM The ADPCM parameter lets the user choose which ADPCM card to place this E&M port. The default setting is n/a and only changes when a Rate smaller than 64k is selected (see above). The user is then allowed to select which ADPCM card to use for the port (this assignment is made by chassis slot number). The options are slots P1, P2, and P3. Test Screen The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing you to monitor and set the status of the analog interface leads, and to monitor or set the value of the A, B, C, and D signaling bits of all FXS circuits on that card. In cross-connect systems, the test option also allows you to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system. Figure FXSC-3 shows the FXS Coin Card Test Screen parameters, Table FXSC-3 lists some actions you can perform from this screen, and Table FXSC-4 shows the settings for each parameter. (10-97) Page 7-D-7 FXS Coin Card Node_1 SIG MON=OFF Reference Guide v3.6 | U2 FXSC 6-600 Rev D1-0 Ser 00061 | 12-31-99 TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK 1 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 2 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 3 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 4 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 5 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 6 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 7 off mon mon mon n/a n/a 8 off mon mon mon n/a n/a Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN n/a n/a RbTo off fxsc hf-a1 noWAN 14:33 Save | Undo | Refresh | Main | siG mon Figure FXSC-3 Typical FXS Coin Card Test Screen Page 7-D-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card Menu of Actions Table FXSC-3. Test Screen Actions Action Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Main Returns to the FXS Coin Card Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. siG mon Used with the user card alarm system to notify you of excessive transitions of signaling bits. Table FXSC-4. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults Parameter (10-97) SIG MON User Options off on Default off TEST off on off TX ABCD mon mon RX ABCD mon mon T-R-CNTL mon mon TO USER n/a n/a TO NTWK n/a n/a TX ABCD Status information only; not editable n/a RX ABCD Status information only; not editable n/a T-R-CNTL Status information only; not editable n/a T-R-STAT Status information only; not editable n/a MODE Status information only; not editable n/a TYPE Status information only; not editable n/a STATUS Status information only; not editable n/a Page 7-D-9 FXS Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 SIG MON The Signaling Monitor feature works with the user card alarm system (see Chapter 3-A) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The system will generate alarms if the number of transitions of any signaling bit in transmit or receive direction for an active port exceeds 255 in any four second interval. The options are off and on, and they are toggled by pressing “g” (siGmon command) in the Test Screen. TEST The Test parameter shows if the port is in test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active ports are off and on. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows you to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The option for this field is mon (monitor). Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The option for this field is mon (monitor). T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control setting allows you to mon (monitor) the state of the Tip and Ring leads of an FXS port: RbTo (-48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open) TbRo (-48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is open) RbTg (-48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded) TbRg (-48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded) TO USER In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the user side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, and quiet. Choose PCM if you do not want to inject a tone toward the CPE. In this case, the PCM signal received from the network is still sent to the CPE in the normal manner. Page 7-D-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card TO NTWK In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone on the network side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, and quiet. Choose PCM if you do not want to inject a tone toward the network. In this case, the PCM signal received from the CPE is still sent to the network in the normal manner. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here. T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control informational field shows the current status of the Tip and Ring leads of the FXS port from the perspective of the system. The possible values are as follows (b = battery, o = open, g = ground): RbTo (-48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open) TbRo (-48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is open) RbTg (-48V is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded) TbRg (-48V is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded) ring (the ringing voltage is applied between Tip and Ring) T-R-STAT The Tip and Ring Status informational field describes what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXS port. The possible values are: loop (attached device is connecting Tip and Ring together) rgnd (the Ring lead is grounded by the attached device) open (Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip lead or to ground) (10-97) Page 7-D-11 FXS Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 MODE The Mode informational field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main FXS coin card Screen. Valid settings are fxsc. TYPE The Type setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXSC equipment and the remote switch. These settings are hf-a1 (high frequency - 12kHz), hf-a2 (high frequency - 16kHz), hf-cb (high frequency-clear back), rb-a1 (reverse battery-answer 1), rb-a2 (reverse battery-answer 2), and rb-cb (reverse battery-clear back). STATUS The Status field shows the current status of the port. Table FXSC-5 lists and describes all of the possible conditions reported by this field. Table FXSC-5. Status Information Field Settings Setting Page 7-D-12 STDBY Meaning The FXS port is in standby. W STB WAN card to which the FXS port is assigned is in standby. W TST WAN card to which the FXS port is assigned is under test. W OOS WAN card to which the FXS port is assigned is out of service. NOWAN There is no WAN card configured in the slot to which the FXS port is assigned. CALL Call set-up is in progress. BUSY Call is in progress. IDLE No call is in progress (port is available for a call). TC The port is in Trunk Conditioning because a CGA alarm occurred on the associated WAN port. TEST A test is in progress on the port (i.e., you are actively controlling the circuit by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD). MAINT The port is in a maintenance condition. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card Introduction The Foreign Exchange Office Coin Card manages the flow of FXOC voice traffic over the network. The FXOC card translates an analog signal to a digital bitstream at the local system and digital to analog at the remote system. All FXOC cards have a twowire interface and support Foreign Exchange Office functions, Manual Ringdown, Foreign Exchange Defined Network and Dial Pulse Terminating operations. FXOC cards can use the voice-compression features of the ADPCM resource card. 8159 FXO Coin Card The 8159 FXO Coin Card has eight ports and two wires, providing a 600-ohm terminating impedance. The card consists of backplane interface circuitry, serial EEPROM for card identification and adjustment parameters storage, metering pulse interface extension between Coin Box Office (CO) and coin phone on the CO side, and eight voice line interface circuits. Each line interface circuit consists of a codec, a hybrid circuit (2 to 4 wire converter), line feed circuitry and relays to control modes of operation. FXO Coin Card Settings External Card Connectors and Pinouts Refer to the Pinout Chapter in this manual. Card Jumper/Switch Settings Setting or resetting jumpers is necessary for conversion of individual ports on the FXOC card to mrd (Manual Ringdown) mode. To make this conversion, remove the FXOC card from its slot and connect shorting jumpers (ordered separately) vertically from #1 to #2 on both sets of pins next to the front edge of the card as shown in Figure FXOC-1. The numbers (#1 and #2) are not stenciled on the card, but they are shown here to clarify the procedure. Ports can be set individually for the mrd feature, but once set, remain in the mrd mode until the jumpers are removed. This information is repeated in the Installation chapter. (10-97) Page 7-E-1 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 Jumpers to Reset Port #8 Port #7 Port #6 ∧ 1 1 ∧ 1 1 Power Bus 2 2 Edge ∧ 1 1 2 2 Connector 2 2 Port #5 Port #4 Port #3 ∧ 1 1 2 2 ∧ 1 1 ∧ 1 1 2 2 2 2 Port #2 ∧ 1 1 2 2 Port #1 ∧ 1 1 2 2 Jumpers to Reset Figure FXOC-1. Jumpers for mrd Mode Installing the FXO Coin Card Install the FXO Coin Card in any user card slot. These slots are U1 to U8 on the twosided chassis and front-loading chassis with power supplies on top, or P1 to P4 and W1 to W4 on the front-loading chassis with power supplies on the side. Page 7-E-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card FXO Coin Card User Screens and Settings Main Screen FXOCoin Card setting options are displayed in columns on the FXO Coin Card screen, as shown in Figure FXOC-2. Table FXOC-1 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with the possible and default values. The settings are similar to those for other voice cards. Node_1 STATE WAN TS MODE SIGNAL Rx TLP Tx TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID RATE ADPCM | U1 FXOC 8-600 1 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a 2 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a 3 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a Rev A2-0 4 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a Ser 00003 5 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a 6 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a | 12-31-99 7 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a 14:33 8 stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 n/a idle off none set1 64k n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure FXOC-2. Typical FXO Coin Card Main Screen The bottom highlighted line of this screen shows various actions that you can perform from the screen. You perform the desired action by pressing the associated capital letter key. Table FXOC-1 summarizes these actions. For example, after you configure the FXO coin card ports, press “s” to save your settings. (10-97) Page 7-E-3 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table FXOC-1. Typical FXO Coin Card Main Screen Actions Action Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e., test status). Copy Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Test Initiates and monitors testing of all FXO coin card ports. Refer to the Test section of this chapter. Main Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Table FXOC-2 summarizes the configuration settings for the FXO coin card, along with the available and factory-default option settings. The parameters and settings are also described in the following paragraphs. Table FXOC-2. Typical FXO Coin Card Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults Parameter User Options stdby actv w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w41 w4-2 01-24 01-31 fxoc hf-a1 hf-a2 hf-cb rb-a1 rb-a2 rb-cb -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB u-law a-inv a-law idle busy off dgtl anlg none D-mW quiet set1 to set8 user STATE WAN TS MODE SIGNAL RX TLP TX TLP CODING TC CGA LB PATTRN HYBRID RATE ADPCM n/a P1 P2 P3 Notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 Default stdby w1-1 01 fxoc hf-a1 0.0 0.0 u-law idle off none set1 64K n/a NOTES Page 7-E-4 1. Choosing wan allows you to choose a WAN port (w1-1 through w4-2). The user option is not used. 2. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose TS 16 is programmed for cas or ccs. 3. The default is hf-a1. 4. The default is a-inv for E1 and m-law for T1. These values will change depending upon the WAN link selected. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card 5. The default, set1, is the only active option. It balances to the ideal termination of 600 ohms +2.15uF. The other settings are reserved for future use. 6. Choosing a Rate other than 64K allows you to select an ADPCM slot. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to stdby (standby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link. MODE The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which you connect the port. All options use two-wire balanced connections. The fxoc (Foreign Exchange Office Coin) option allows you to connect the system to a 2 way PBX trunk (both inbound and outbound calls) or a key system trunk. The fxodn (Foreign Exchange Office - Defined Network) option provides access to new services offered by advanced networks from many major carriers. The dpt (Dial Pulse Terminating) option allows the unit to attach to incoming one-way trunks from a PBX, key system, or a telephone set. This option is similar to the fxoc option. The mrd (manual ringdown) option provides point-to-point unswitched connections between two telephone sets. This configuration is usually not attached to an exchange or switch; rather it provides a “hot line” between two locations. The system requires hardware changes and a ringing generator for this option (see instructions later in this chapter). SIGNAL The Signal setting matches the signaling behavior of the FXOC equipment and the remote switch. These settings are hf-a1(high frequency - 12kHz), hf-a2 (high frequency - 16kHz), hf-cb (high frequency-clear back), rb-a1 (reverse battery-answer 1), rb-a2 (reverse battery-answer 2), and rb-cb (reverse battery-clear back). (10-97) Page 7-E-5 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 Rx TLP The Receive Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are decoded to analog signals. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +2.0 dB. Tx TLP The Transmit Transmission Level Point setting controls the amount of gain or attenuation added to signals after they are received from the local analog port and before they are encoded to digital PCM signals. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e., the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to -2 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -3 dB. Acceptable values range from -10.0 dB to +5.0 dB. CODING The Coding setting sets the PCM companding method used for a port. Generally, the North American T1 environment uses m-law coding. The International E1 environment uses a-law or a-inv (inverted A-law) coding, and a-inv provides a higher ones density than a-law. The coding default is determined by the type of card in the WAN port you select. TC CGA The Trunk Conditioning during Carrier Group Alarm setting defines whether the FXOC port should be placed in idle or busy mode upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link to which the port is assigned. In most cases, you should set this parameter to busy. If a call is in progress when the CGA alarm is received, the system will hold the call for two seconds, drop it and then busy out the port to the attached PBX for the duration of the alarm. Once the alarm clears, the system will automatically place the port back in idle mode thereby making it available to the attached PBX. LB The Loopback setting sets the loopback for this circuit to off, dgtl (digital), or anlg (analog). Figure FXOC-3 illustrates the loopback options. Page 7-E-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Digital Loopback FXO Voice Card CODEC Digital to Analog Converter Analog Loopback Figure FXOC-3. FXO Coin Card Loopbacks PATTRN The Pattern setting sets the outgoing test pattern for this analog port. The pattern, generated by the system, is sent only to the currently selected port. The none option disables sending a test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal level. The quiet option places a 900Ω termination on the line so that no analog signal is sent. HYBRID The Hybrid option assigns a three byte pattern to define the adjustment for return loss (similar to Build Out Capacitors). The default, set1, balances to the ideal termination of 900Ω @ 2.15mF, in the case of the 8134 and 8138 cards and to 600Ω @ 2.15mF, in the case of the 8135 and 8139 cards. The other settings are reserved for future use. RATE The Rate parameter allows you to utilize the voice compression capabilities of the ADPCM resource card. If that card is not present in the system, changes cannot be made to this setting. The 64K option (default) does not use ADPCM resources (it is the normal operation rate for voice circuits). ADPCM voice channels are assigned in pairs by designating two voice ports (E&M, FXOC or FXS) to the same WAN link and timeslot and selecting rate settings for the pair that add up to 64Kbps (i.e., [24K,1+40K,2],[ 32K,1+32K,2] and [40K,1+24K,2]). The numeral 1 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the odd side of the ADPCM pair. The numeral 2 after the rate setting assigns that portion of the voice port pair to the even side of the ADPCM pair. (10-97) Page 7-E-7 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 For more information about voice port assignments to the ADPCM card, please consult the ADPCM section of the manual. ADPCM The ADPCM parameter lets you choose the ADPCM card on which to place this FXO port. The default setting is n/a and only changes when a Rate smaller than 64k is selected (see above). You can then select which ADPCM card to use for the port (assignment is made by chassis slot number). The options are P1, P2, and P3. Test Screen The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing the user to monitor and set the status of the analog interface leads as well as monitoring and setting the value of the A, B, C and D signaling bits of all FXOC circuits on that card. In cross-connect systems only, the test option also allows the user to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system. Figure FXOC-4 shows the FXO Coin Card Test parameters and Table FXOC-4 shows the settings for each. Node_1 SIG MON=OFF | U5 FXOC 8-600 Rev D6-0 Ser 05027 | 12-31-99 14:33 TEST Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL TO USER TO NTWK 1 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 2 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 3 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 4 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 5 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 6 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 7 on mon mon mon PCM PCM 8 on mon mon mon PCM PCM Tx ABCD Rx ABCD T-R-CNTL T-R-STAT MODE TYPE STATUS n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan n/a n/a open n/a fxoc hf-a1 noWan Save | Undo | Refresh | Main | siG mon Figure FXOC-4. Typical FXO Coin Card Test Screen Page 7-E-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card Menu of Actions Table FXOC-3. Test Screen Actions Action Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Main Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. siG mon The signal monitor is used with the user card alarm system to notify the user of excessive transitions of signaling bits. Table FXOC-4. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults Parameter SIG MON User Options off on Default off TEST off off TX ABCD mon set mon RX ABCD mon set mon T-R-CNTL mon set mon TO USER PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz quiet PCM TO NTWK PCM 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz quiet PCM TX ABCD Status information only; not editable n/a RX ABCD Status information only; not editable n/a T-R-CNTL Status information only; not editable n/a T-R-STAT Status information only; not editable n/a MODE Status information only; not editable n/a TYPE Status information only; not editable n/a STATUS Status information only; not editable n/a on SIG MON The Signaling Monitor feature works with the user card alarm system (see Basic Operations section) to detect excessive signaling bit transitions. The system will generate alarms if the number of transitions of any signaling bit in transmit or receive direction for an active port exceeds 255 in any four second interval. The options are off and on, and they are toggled using the G command in the Menu of Actions. TEST The Test Parameter shows if the port is in the test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active ports are off and on. (10-97) Page 7-E-9 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows you to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The option for this field is mon (monitor). Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows you to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The option for this field is mon (monitor). The Rx ABCD bits cannot be set in bus-connect systems and the only option is mon (monitor). T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control setting allows you to only monitor mon the state of the Tip and Ring leads of an FXO port. TO USER In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone toward the user side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the user and that the PCM signal received from the network should continue to be sent to the user port in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. TO NTWK In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and send a test tone toward the network side of the system. The options for this field are PCM, 300Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and quiet. Selecting PCM means that you do not want to inject a tone toward the network and that the PCM signal received from the user port should continue to be sent to the network in the normal manner. This parameter is not supported in bus-connect systems and will always appear as n/a. Tx ABCD The Transmit ABCD setting allows you to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to transmit. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. Page 7-E-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Coin Card Rx ABCD The Receive ABCD setting allows you to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up a four-digit field for you to input the ABCD pattern you want to receive. Any four digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting. T-R-CNTL The Tip and Ring Control information field shows the current status of the Tip and Ring leads of the FXOC port from the perspective of the system. The possible values are: loop open rgnd lpgnd ring the Tip and Ring leads are tied together the Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip or to ground the Ring lead is grounded the Tip and Ring leads are tied together and the Tip is grounded ringing voltage is being applied between the Tip and Ring T-R-STAT The Tip and Ring Status information field describes what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXO port. The possible values are: ring (attached device is applying ringing voltage between Tip and Ring) TbRg (attached device is applying -48V battery to Tip and grounding Ring) ToRo (attached device is leaving both the Tip and Ring leads open) TgRo (attached device is grounding the Tip lead and is leaving the Ring lead open) RbTg (attached device is applying -48V battery to Ring and grounding Tip) RbTo (attached device is applying -48V battery to Ring and leaving Tip open) TgR* (attached device is grounding Tip, and the Ring lead state is unknown) ToR* (attached device is leaving Tip open, and the Ring lead state is unknown) RoT* (attached device is leaving Ring open, and the Tip lead state is unknown) n/a (information is not available) MODE The Mode information field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main FXOC card Screen. Valid settings are fxoc. (10-97) Page 7-E-11 FXO Coin Card Reference Guide v3.6 TYPE The Type information field shows the current status of the signal field selected on the main FXOC card screen for this port. Valid settings for both fxo and fxodn modes are loop (loop), gs (ground start), lp-fd (loop start-forward disconnect) and R2 (R2). Valid settings for the dpt mode are dpt (dial pulse terminating), R2 (R2) and (i-R2) immediate R2). The only valid setting for the mrd mode is mrd (manual ringdown). STATUS The Status information field shows the current status of the port. Table FXOC-5 lists and describes all of the possible conditions that are reported in this field. Table FXOC-5. Status Information Field Settings Page 7-E-12 Setting Meaning STDBY The FXOC port is in standby. W STB The WAN that the FXOC port is assigned to is in standby. W TST The WAN that the FXOC port is assigned to is in test. W OOS The WAN that the FXOC port is assigned to is Out Of Service. NOWAN There is no WAN card configured in the slot to which the FXOC port is assigned. CALL Call set-up is in progress. BUSY A call is in progress. IDLE The FXOC circuit is not being used and is available. TC The FXOC circuit is undergoing Trunk Conditioning because of a CGA alarm on the WAN to which it is assigned. TEST The operator is actively controlling the circuit by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD. MAINT The FXOC port is in maintenance condition. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card Introduction HSU cards allow you to connect high speed data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communications equipment (DCE) to WAN links, server cards (ADPCM) or another HSU card. 8202 High-Speed Unit Card The 8202 HSU Card supports two RS530/RS449 data ports. It can also support V.35 and RS232 data through the use of the appropriate Personality Module (See the end of this chapter for instructions on the personality modules). 8203 High Speed Unit Card The 8203 HSU Card supports two ANSI/EIA/TIA-530 ports. Each of the two ports can be configured to operate as DCE or DTE at data rates from 56 Kbps to 2.048 Mbps. 8212 High-Speed Unit Card The 8212 HSU Card supports two V.35 data ports. 8214 High-Speed Unit Card V.35 Trunk / User The 8214 HSU Card supports two V.35 data ports. Each of the two ports can be configured to operate as DCE or DTE at data rates from 56 Kbps to 2.048 Mbps in 56Kbps or 64 Kbps steps. 8215 High-Speed Unit Card The 8215 HSU Card supports four RS530 or V.35 data ports. The selection of RS530 or V.35 is made on a port-by-port basis using on-board switches (see Installation chapter). It can also support RS232 data at 56kbps through the use of the 1252 and 1253 Personality Modules and 1240 cable adapter (See the end of this chapter for instructions on using the personality modules). Caution: When using modes without B8ZS and Pulse set to transparent, HSU card ports assigned to multirate circuits greater than or equal to 4x64kbps must have DTE connected to the port prior to activation. Failure to attach DTE will cause a false carrier alarm. Using Alternate Channel AMI will avoid this problem. HSU Card Settings Figure HSU-1 shows the high-speed data unit (HSU) screen. Table HSU-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. (10-97) Page 8-A-1 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE Tx CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN | U2 HSU-530x2 1 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 8202 Rev C0-0 Ser 00054 | 12-31-99 2 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Dial | Perf | Main Figure HSU-1. HSU Card Screen Page 8-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE Tx CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN HSU Card | W1/U5 1 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no HSU-dte 8203 Rev D6-0 Ser 05027 | 12-31-99 2 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Dial | Perf | Main Figure HSU-2. HSU Card Screen (dte) (10-97) Page 8-A-3 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 | W1/U5 HSU-trunk STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE Tx CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN 1 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 8214 Rev D6-0 Ser 05027 | 12-31-99 2 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Dial | Perf | Main Figure HSU-3. HSU Card Screen (trunk) Table HSU-1. HSU Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE TX CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN User Options stdby actv wan serv user dce dte table 64k 56k int ext norm inv norm inv perm rlocal ignor 0 30 60 100 off dte net dds v.54 ft1 off ocu csu dsu w/to on off no Notes 1 2 local ds0 3 4 Default stdby w1-1 dce table 56k int norm norm perm 0 off dds off wto no NOTES 1. Page 8-A-4 The WAN/SERVER parameter has three choices: wan, serv and user. In wan mode, the options are w1-1 through w4-2. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card 2. If the WAN selected above has a CSU or DSX module connected, the values range from 1-24. If a CEPT module is installed the values are 1-31. 3. These options are only valid if the Loopback Generation Mode selected is dds. If the Loopback Generation Mode is v.54 or ft1, then the LB GEN options are off and on. 4. This is an information-only field, there are no user selections. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. The control leads assume the status shown in Table HSU-2 for the different states. Table HSU-2. HSU Card State Status Control Leads RLSD DSR CTS Active High or follows remote RTS High Definable WAN Link Down Low High Definable Standby Low Low High WAN/SRV The WAN/SERVER setting identifies the card to which the output of this port is directed. If wan is chosen, the data from this port will be directed to a WAN port (the options are w1-1 through w4-2). MODE This parameter allows you to identify how the HSU port appears to the device on the other end of the circuit. The dce option causes the port to be recognized as a DCE (data circuit-terminating equipment) device. The dte option causes the port to be recognized as a DTE (data terminal equipment) device. Note that the choices appearing for some of the parameters that follow will depend on whether you choose dce or dte as the Mode. Those parameters and their available settings are described below. TS The TS (time slot) setting identifies the time slots on the WAN link when wan is selected in the previous setting. Unlike the other user cards, the HSU card can use many time slots on a single WAN port to create a super-rate circuit for an individual HSU port. One or all DS0s on a single T1/E1 link can be assembled for use by the HSU port according to the speed requirements of the DTE. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available for E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. Figure HSU-4 shows the display when table is selected. Using the space bar to select and deselect the time slot, this example shows time slots 11-16 on WAN 1-1 assigned to this port. Time slot assignments do not need to be contiguous. (10-97) Page 8-A-5 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 | U2 HSU-530x2 STATE WAN/SRV MODE TS RATE Tx CLOCK CLOCK PLRTY DATA PLRTY CTS CTS DELAY LOCAL LB LB GEN MODE LB GEN LB DET ISDN CONN 1 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 8202 Rev C0-0 Ser 00054 | 12-31-99 2 stdby w1-1 dce table 64K int norm norm perm 0 off dds off w/to no 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 x x x x x x Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Dial | Perf | Main Figure HSU-4. HSU Table Option RATE The Rate setting allows you to select the bandwidth for all time slots assigned to this port. Choices are 56k or 64k. This choice, multiplied by the number of time slots assigned to the port define the port speed. Tx CLOCK The Transmit Clock setting identifies the clock source for the transmit data (SD) stream. The internal (int) option requires the DTE to synchronize its transmitted data with the clock on the SCT leads. The external (ext) option requires the DTE to synchronize the transmitted data with the clock on the SCTE leads. Use the external option with a long V.35 cable to make sure the data and clock are in phase when they arrive at the system. The DTE must loop back the clock on the SCT leads to the SCTE leads. If the external option is selected and the system does not detect a clock on the SCTE leads, then the HSU automatically generates a clock internally. If this clock is not synchronized with the data, then the CLK PLRTY can be changed to attempt to synchronize. Page 8-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card CLOCK PLRTY The Clock Polarity setting provides another way to compensate for long V.35 cables in those cases where the DTE equipment does not provide SCTE. When using inverted (inv) mode, the relationship between clock and data is altered to compensate for the long cable distance that the signals must travel. The other option, normal (norm), means that the relationship between clock and data is left unchanged. If you use inverted (inv) Clock Polarity, set the Transmit Clock (Tx CLK) to (int). DATA PLRTY The Data Polarity option allows you to invert all bits in the transmitted data stream. The default, normal (norm), means that the data is left untouched while inverted (inv) means that all bits will be inverted. This can be helpful in ensuring ones density on T1 links when the data is known to contain long strings of zeros. By inverting those zeros, you reduce the likelihood that the composite T1 stream will not meet the ones density requirement. Both systems must have this parameter set to the same option. CTS The Clear To Send setting controls when a CTS signal is sent. Some DTE equipment must receive a CTS signal before transmitting data. Change the CTS setting to permanent (perm) to make the CTS signal always High or on. The remote-local (rlocal) option allows RTS to control both the CTS of the local equipment and RLSD of the remote DTE equipment. Set the CTS setting to ignore (ignor) to make the CTS signal always Low or off. The CTS signal is always High (enabled) when the port is in standby state, regardless of the CTS setting. Set the CTS setting to local (locl) to make the CTS signal follow the RTS signal from the local DTE. CTS DELAY The Clear To Send Delay setting delays the changes in the CTS signal in local mode. Enter the value that you need in milliseconds. The options are 0, 30, 60, and 100 ms. If you do not know what value you need, start with 0 ms and increase the value if you experience problems. The CTS setting must be set to local before the CTS Delay setting has any effect. LB The dte option loops back data to the local DTE device. It tests the local cabling and most of the circuitry in the HSU card (see Figure HSU-5). (10-97) Page 8-A-7 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Network T1/E1 PCM bus DSO HSU Port Figure HSU-5. Data Card DTE Loopback The network (net) option loops back data toward the remote device. It tests some of the HSU card circuitry, the system common equipment, the WAN link card, the remote equipment, and the WAN line between the two sites (see Figure HSU-6). This option also drops the DSR control signal output on the HSU port. T1/E1 PCM bus DSO Page 8-A-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card LB GEN MODE The Loopback Generation Mode setting defines the type of in-band loop-up and loopdown codes that will be sent to the remote equipment. Three industry-standard codes are supported: dds, which will send a DDS-compatible latching loopback code in each of the DS0s that make up the circuit; v.54, which is compatible with CCITT V.54 standard and ft1, which is compatible with ANSI Fractional T1 standard. The final option, perf (performance monitoring), activates an 8kbps performance monitoring channel (isolated from the total bandwidth of the circuit) that collects end-to-end performance statistics from a local HSU card to a remote HSU card. (See Performance Monitoring section later in this chapter.) LB GEN If you selected v.54, ft1 or perf in the previous setting, the Loopback Generation setting allows you to send a loop-up command (on) or a loop-down command (off). If you selected dds as the Loopback Generation Mode, then this setting allows you to define the type of DDS loopback that you wish to generate. The four options are ocu (Office Channel Unit), dsu (Data Service Unit), csu (Channel Service Unit) and ds0 (a full 64kbps loopback). Figures HSU-7, -8, and -9 illustrate where the loopbacks will take place. You can also turn all DDS remote loopbacks off. Loop-up or loop-down commands cannot be implemented for two ports on the same card simultaneously. The user must finish all loopback operations on one port before attempting to perform any loopback operations on another port. Local System Local DTE Remote System HSU Card Card Carrier's DDS Network Local Site Remote DTE OCU-DP CSU DSU Remote Site Figure HSU-7. A Remote OCU or DS0 Loopback Commanded by the System Local System Local DTE Remote System HSU Card Local Site Remote DTE OCU-DP Card Carrier's DDS Network CSU DSU Remote Site Figure HSU-8. A Remote CSU Loopback Commanded by the System (10-97) Page 8-A-9 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Local System Local HSU DTE Card Local Site Remote System Remote OCU-DP Card Carrier's DDS Network CSU DTE DSU Remote Site Figure HSU-9. A Remote DSU Loopback Commanded by the System LB DET Depending on the selection you made for Loopback Generation Mode above, the HSU port will respond to any of the loopback codes generated by a remote system. The Loopback Detection setting does not affect local loopback commands from the local control terminal. The off option causes the system to ignore remote loopback commands. The on option causes the system to monitor ports for loopback commands from the remote equipment, but only in the format selected in LB GEN MODE. If the system detects a loopback code, it loops the data back until the remote equipment releases the loopback. The with time-out (w/to) option is the same as the on option, except that after ten minutes the system automatically releases loopbacks initiated by the remote equipment. EER The Excessive Error Rate parameter is only available on the 8213 HSU card. This option selects the error rate at which an alarm is declared. If the number of errors exceeds the value set by this option an "E" will be placed in the Status Column of the Performance Monitoring screen. The options are 10e-4 through 10e-9 or none. Page 8-A-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card Menu of Actions Table HSU-3 shows the Menu of Actions for the HSU Card. Table HSU-3. HSU Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Test Dial Perf Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Initiates and monitors testing of all HSU card ports. Refer to Test section below. Enables the user to identify the HSU port by telephone number, download and modify call profiles from the Interface card, dial and broadcast ISDN calls. Not supported. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Test Selection of "Test" from the Menu of Options will bring up the screen shown in Figure HSU-10. From this screen, users are allowed to create test situations between HSU Cards or between a single HSU Card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table HSU-4 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. (10-97) Page 8-A-11 HSU Card Node_1 Reference Guide v3.6 | U2 HSU-530x2 1 n/a norm norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** BERT CTS RLSD DSR SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP RTS DTR LB ST 8202 Rev C0-0 Ser 00054 | 12-31-99 14:33 2 n/a norm norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Save | Undo | Refresh | InsertErr | Clear | Main Figure HSU-10. HSU Card Test Screen Table HSU-4. HSU Card Test Screen Setting Options and Defaults Parameter BERT CTS RLSD DSR SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP RTS DTR LB ST User Options off mark space 1:1 1:7 511 qrss 2047 ds0 ff 7e 32 40 ocu-a csu-a dsu-a csu1a csu2a norm off on norm off on norm off on information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options information only - no user options Default off norm norm norm BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected HSU port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (1111), space (0000), 1:1 (1010), 1:7 (0100-0000), 511 (511 test pattern), qrss (quasi-random pseudo signal) and 2047 (2047 test pattern). Page 8-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card On the model 8215 HSU only, selection of BERT pattern ds0 will display another set of BERT patterns. Additional nonlatching loopback patterns are ff (1111-0000), 7e (01111110), 32 (0011-0010), 40 (0100-0000), ocu-a (ocu-alternating byte), csu-a (csualternating byte), dsu-a (dsu-alternating byte), csu1a (csu - one repeater - alternating byte) and csu2a (csu - two repeaters - alternating byte). The results of the alternating patterns (ocu-a, csu-a, dsu-a, csu1a and csu2a) will display on the test screen. CTS The Clear To Send (CTS) option allows you to define whether the CTS control lead should be held high (on) or low (off). Selecting either on or off will override the selection made in the HSU Card screen. The third option is normal (norm) which means that CTS will operate in the mode selected in the HSU Card screen. RLSD The Receive Level Signal Detect (RLSD) option allows you to define whether the RLSD control lead is held high (on) or low (off). The third option is normal (norm) which means that RLSD will behave as described in Table HSU-2. DSR The Data Set Ready (DSR) option allows you to define whether the DSR control lead should be held high (on) or low (off). The third option is normal (norm) which means that DSR will behave as described in Table HSU-2. SYNC The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment. This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. BE The Bit Error field shows the total number of bit errors logged. This is an informationonly field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ES The Errored Seconds field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were detected. This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. SES The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an informationonly field, there are no user-selectable parameters. (10-97) Page 8-A-13 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 CSES The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive nonSeverely Errored Seconds. This it an information-only field there ore no user-selectable parameters. OSS The Out of Synchronization Seconds field shows the number of seconds that the HSU BERT has been out of synchronization. This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. BER The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. This is an information-only field, there are no userselectable parameters. ELAP The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the test. This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. RTS The Request To Send (RTS) field shows the current status of the RTS control lead. The two values that can be displayed are "on" and "off." This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. DTR The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) field shows the current status of the DTR control lead. The two values that can be displayed are "on" and "off." This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. The DTR field will always show "on" for the 8212 HSU card (Revision A and earlier) but it will toggle between "off" and "on" all other HSU cards. LB ST The Loopback State field indicates, whether there are any remotely-initiated loopbacks currently active on the HSU port. This field will display both latching and non-latching loopbacks that are initiated from a remote device via in band loop-up codes. In addition to "none," the six messages that can be displayed in that field are "l-ocu," "ldsu" and "l-csu" for latching loopbacks, and "ocu," "dsu" and "csu" for non-latching loopbacks. This is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. Page 8-A-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card Menu of Actions Table HSU-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the Test Screen of the HSU Card. Table HSU-5. Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh InsertErr Clear (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Allows the user to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal. Clears the testing screen and resets all counters to zero. Page 8-A-15 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Setting On-board Option Switches Setting Switches on the 8215 HSU Card Setting or resetting switches is necessary for conversion of the operation of all four ports on the 8215 HSU card from RS-530 to V.35. To make this conversion, remove the HSU card from its slot and toggle the slide switches between RS530 and V.35 as shown in Figure HSU-11. Ports can be set individually for either RS530 or V.35 operation features, but once set, remain in that mode until the slide switches are reset. This information is repeated in the Installation chapter. RS-530 Power Bus Edge Connector Xilinx V.35 RS-530 Xilinx V.35 RS-530 V.35 Xilinx Xilinx RS-530 V.35 Figure HSU-11. Switches for Conversion from RS530 to V.35 Page 8-A-16 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card Using the 1251, 1252 and 1253 Personality Modules When using the 8202, and 8215 HSU cards, you may wish to connect the RS530 output to V.35 (for the 8202) or RS232 equipment (for the 8202, and 8215). The 1251 (V.35), 1252 (RS232) and 1253 (RS232-E) Personality Modules were developed to assist in this process. Shaped like a "gender changer," these modules plug into the female DB-25 port connector on the HSU card and then attach via a male cable connector to the other equipment. For RS232 operation, the recommended length of cables should be less than 25' and the speed no greater than 56kbps. Figure HSU-12 shows a drawing with the dimensions (in inches) of a Personality Module. 2.50" 1251 2.125" Figure HSU-12. The RS530 to V.35 Personality Module The 8215 HSU cards have internal switch settings (see Figure HSU-11) for changing signals from RS530 to V.35. (10-97) Page 8-A-17 HSU Card Reference Guide v3.6 RS232 Personality Module Description Signals can be converted from RS530 to RS232 with the use of the 1252 Personality Module. Since the 8215 HSU card is equipped with DB-26 connectors, a special cable must be used to connect to the 1252 module (with DB-25 connectors). Figure HSU-13 shows a drawing with the dimensions (in inches) of a Personality Module. 2.50" 2.125" 1252 Figure HSU-13. The RS530 to RS232 Personality Module RS232-E Personality Module Description The RS232-E Personality Module similarly converts RS530-A (balanced signal) to RS232-E (unbalanced signal) format which allows the HSU cards to interoperate with equipment employing an interface conforming to the ANSI/EIA/TIA-232-E electrical characteristics. Figure HSU-14 shows this module. 2.50" 1253 2.125" Figure HSU-14. RS530-A to RS232-E Personality Module Page 8-A-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card Introduction 8220 Sub-Rate Data Card Each 8220 Sub-Rate Data card allows you to connect up to 10 low and medium speed (300bps-38.4Kbps) data equipment to the system. Since an SRU port does not require a complete 64Kbps time slot, the Sub-Rate card allows you to multiplex a number of devices into a single, subdivided time slot on a WAN card. SRU card ports can also be multiplexed with voice traffic on an ADPCM engine. Each port can receive timing from either the DTE device or the system clock. If the DTE supplies the transmit clocking, it must be synchronized with the system clocking source. SRU Card Settings Figure SRU-1 shows the sub-rate data unit (SRU) screen. The ten ports correspond to the ten RJ-48C connectors on the back of the card. Table SRU-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Note: BCON Systems will not allow same timeslot on two different WANS to reside on same SRU Card, XCON will allow this. Node_1 STATE WAN TS FRAME RATE SR TS INTF COM CF CTS TX CLK LB LB GEN LB DET DL OPT ADPCM MAJ EC | U1 1 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off SRU-232x10 2 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off 3 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off 8220 4 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off RevAB-0 5 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off 6 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off SER 00101 7 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off 8 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off | 12-31-99 9 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off 14:33 10 stdby 01 n/a a 0.3 01 01 8,1,N perm n/a off off w/to off n/a off Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Test | Main Figure SRU-1. SRU Card Default Screen (10-97) Page 8-B-1 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table SRU-1. SRU Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS FRAME RATE SR TS INTF COM CF CTS TX CLK LB LB GEN LB DET DL OPT ADPCM MAJ EC User Options stdby act w1-1 through w4-2 01-24 01-31 a b-5 b-10 b-20 x.50 adpcm hlink nlink 0.3 1.2 2.4 4.8 9.6 14.4 19.2 28.8 38.4 n/a 1 1-5 1-10 1-20 asyn sync v.14 8 7 6 5 1 2 none odd even space mark perm l0 l30 l60 l100 rl0 rl3 rl6 rl10 off n/a int ext off dte net n/a off ocu csu dsu n/a w/to on off off on n/a P1 P2 P3 off on none 10e-3 10e-4 10e-5 10e-6 10e-7 Notes 1 2 3 Default stdby w1-1 01 a 0.3 1 asyn 8 1 none perm n/a off off w/to off n/a 4 off NOTES 1. Time slot 16 is not available if the port is assigned to an E1 WAN link whose TS 16 is programmed for cas or ccs. 2. Speeds of .3, 1.2 and 14.4 are not supported for synchronous channels (except 14.4 sync with Frame of adpcm, hlink or nlink). 3. Communication Configuration is a three step process. This field will show n/a when sync is chosen for the INTF option. 4. Majority Error Correction is a two step process. The user will see only choices off and on. When on is chosen the other alternatives will appear. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. The control leads assume the status shown in Table SRU-2 for the different states. Page 8-B-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card Table SRU-2. SRU Card State Status Control Leads RLSD CTS Active High or follows remote RTS definable WAN Link Down Low definable Standby Low Low WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The Time Slot setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is connected. Values range from 01-24 for T1 links and 01-31 (excluding #16 in cas or ccs mode) for E1 links. The Sub-Rate card can further subdivide the WAN time slot into smaller segments for transmission of low speed data. Each WAN time slot can be further divided into a maximum of 20 2.4Kbps time slots (see Figure SRU-2). FRAME The Frame setting allows you to define the sub-rate format that the port will use and to set the usable space allotted to each WAN time slot. The choices are DSO-A (a) that allows one sub-rate time slot, DSO-B with a limit of five sub-rate time slots (b-5), DSO-B with a limit of ten sub-rate time slots (b-10) and DSO-B with a limit of twenty sub-rate time slots (b-20). Figure SRU-2 shows the DS0-A and DS0-B framing sub-rate time slot interaction. In b-20 frame, two or more SRU cards can be configured to occupy the same WAN time slot. Additional choices include x.50 (an ITU standard), adpcm (used to multiplex sub-rate data on an ADPCM card) and hlink (a proprietary format used when far end of the circuit has an ADPCM card while the near end does not). The adpcm frame uses a 24Kbps portion of the ADPCM engine. (See the ADPCM chapter for information on using the ADPCM engines.) RATE The Rate setting allows you to select the rate in thousands of bits per second (kbps) for transmission of data. The selection will change depending upon the framing mode and interface selected. In no case can the maximum total bandwidth of any SRU card exceed 115.2Kbps. The maximum bandwidth of the SRU card depends upon the mode of operations for each port. The maximum bandwidth for the sync Interface setting is 115.2Kbps and the host will not allow more than this to be assigned. The maximum bandwidth for async and v.14 is harder to compute because the computation depends upon the amount of data being sent. (10-97) Page 8-B-3 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 At a minimum, async ports have a multiplication factor of 1.2 times a sync port and v.14 has a multiplication factor of 1.6 times that of a sync port. Using the Delay Optimization feature will also degrade the maximum bandwidth by a factor of 1.5 times the maximum bandwidth figure. These computation factors suggest a maximum of 96Kbps (96Kbps x 1.2 = 115.2Kbps) for async ports and 72Kbps (72Kbps x 1.6 = 115.2Kbps) for v.14 ports be used. However, due to the nature of async and v.14 data transmission, we do not enforce these limits because the user will not be transmitting data at the full rate. The Delay Optimization feature will also degrade the maximum bandwidth by a factor of 1.5 times the total bandwidth. BERT adds another 2x multiplication factor to the data rates shown above. WAN CARD #1 PORT #1 (w1-1) TS #1 1 Framing Maximum Speed per SR TS (Kbps) a TS #2 1 2 3 b-5 38.4 38.4* 4 5 TS #3 TS #4 1-10 1-20 b-10 SRU TS b-20 4.8 2.4 * Speeds greater than 9.6Kbps will occupy contiguous SRU Time Slots in 9.6Kbps increments (i.e. a 19.2Kbps circuit would take SRU time slots #1 and #2) Figure SRU-2. Time Slot Integration SR TS The Sub-Rate Time Slot (SR TS) indicates the sub-rate position within the DS0 time slot that the port will occupy (see Figure SRU-2). If a framing is selected, only one sub-rate time slot is supported and the SR TS setting will default to 1. If b-5 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-5. If b-10 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-10. If b-20 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-20. Portions of sub-rate time slots can be assigned to any SRU port from any SRU card within the system (see Example later in this chapter). If adpcm or hlink are chosen for the frame parameter, this field will show n/a. In b-5 framing, if circuits with speeds greater than 9.6Kbps are assigned to the sub-rate time slot, adjacent sub-rate time slots must be available to accommodate their size. A 19.2Kbps circuit would occupy two contiguous sub-rate time slots (leaving space for up to three 9.6Kbps circuits) and a 38.4Kbps circuit would occupy four contiguous sub-rate time slots (leaving space for one 9.6Kbps circuit). The SR TS number selected will be the first segment occupied by this circuit. If a 28.8Kbps circuit occupies three segments of the b-5 frame, selecting SR TS #1 will assign it to segments 1, 2 and 3. Segments 4 and 5 may be assigned either independently to 9.6 (or less)Kbps circuits in SR TS #4 and #5 or combined for a 19.2Kbps circuit assigned to SR TS #4. Page 8-B-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card If a circuit exceeds the slots necessary to accommodate it, such as a 38.4Kbps circuit to SR TS #3 in b-5 framing, the message, "Invalid SR TS," will be displayed. If a circuit requires more space than the SR TS has available, such as having a 38.4Kbps circuit in SR TS #1 and then attempting to assign a 19.2Kbps circuit to SR TS #4, the message "SR TS overlapping," will be displayed. The number of sub-rate timeslots available for x.50 will depend upon the Rate selected. If the 2.4 Rate is selected, the number available will be 20. If the 4.8 Rate is selected, the number available will be 10. If the 9.6 Rate is selected, the number available will be 5. When multiplexing different rate circuits on the same timeslot, the following formula is necessary to compute the position in the sub-rate timeslot: a 9.6 circuit will occupy slots n, n+5, n+10 and n+15; a 4.8 circuit will occupy slots n and n+10; a 2.4 circuit will occupy slots n (where n = the timeslot selected). INTF The Interface setting allows you to choose the protocol necessary for the terminal associated with this port. The choices are Asynchronous (asyn), Synchronous (sync) and v.14 (v.14). If Synchronous transmission is selected, the choices for STOP, DATA and PAR will show as not applicable (n/a). Both asyn and v.14 options provide asynchronous to synchronous conversion. The v.14 option is an industry standard which will allow the SRU card to interoperate with many DSUs. The asyn option is a streamlined proprietary algorithm which will increase the performance of the SRU card. COM CF The Communication Configuration setting is a three step process that allows the user to choose the Data bits, Stop bits and Parity settings. The Data setting allows you to change the bits-per-byte number depending upon the type of terminal associated with this particular port. The options are 8, 7, 6, 5. The second option allows you to select the number of Stop bits that check data sampling for the terminal associated with this port. The choices are 1 and 2. The third choice is the Parity setting that changes the data parity for the terminal associated with this particular port. The options are none, odd, even, space and mark. CTS The Clear To Send setting allows you to define how the port should respond to receipt of Request to Send (RTS) from the attached equipment. This setting also allows you to change the delay time (in milliseconds) from when the SRU receives the RTS until it issues the CTS. The local option allows RTS to control CTS. The remote-local options allows RTS to control both the CTS of the local equipment and RLSD of the remote equipment. The options are permanent (perm), local - immediate (l0), local -30 mS (l30), local -60 mS (l60), local -100 mS (l100), remote/local - immediate (rl0), remote/local - 30 mS (rl3), remote/local - 60 mS (rl6), remote/local - 100 mS (rl10) and off. (10-97) Page 8-B-5 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 TX CLK The Transmit Clock setting allows the user to select the clocking source for this port. The options are n/a, if async INTF is chosen and internal (int), if sync INTF is chosen. The int setting uses the system for the clock source and the ext setting allows the DTE to generate the transmit clocking information. LB The Loopback setting allows you to activate local loopbacks on the SRU. The settings are off, toward the DTE (dte) and toward the network (net). Figure SRU-3 shows a diagram of the two loopback conditions. DTE SRU WAN Link Network dte Loopback Option DTE SRU WAN Link Network net Loopback Option Figure SRU-3. SRU Card Loopbacks LB GEN The Loopback Generate setting generates in-band diagnostic codes that are sent to the remote equipment These codes are compatible with DDS networks and allow you to command a latching loopback at remote DDS equipment. You can start loopbacks at the remote ocu (Office Channel Unit), the dsu (Data Service Unit) or the csu (Channel Service Unit). Figures 8B-4, 8B-5 and 8B-6 show the loopback locations. You can also turn all of the loopbacks off. This field will show n/a if adpcm or hlink are chosen for the FRAME parameter. Loop-up or loop-down commands cannot be implemented for two ports on the same card simultaneously. The user must finish all loopback operations on one port before attempting to perform any loopback operations on another port. Page 8-B-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card Local System Local SRU DTE Card Remote System OCU-DP Card Carrier's DDS Network Local Site CSU Remote DTE DSU Remote Site Figure SRU-4. A Remote SRU Loopback Commanded by the System Local System Local DTE Remote System SRU Card Local Site OCU-DP Card Carrier's DDS Network CSU Remote DTE DSU Remote Site Figure SRU-5. A Remote CSU Loopback Commanded by the System Local System Local SRU DTE Card Local Site Remote System OCU-DP Card Carrier's DDS Network Remote CSU DSU DTE Remote Site Figure SRU-6. A Remote DSU Loopback Commanded by the System LB DET The Loopback Detection setting determines how the SRU Card will respond to latching and non-latching loopback commands from remote equipment. The SRU reacts only to the in-band DDS format loopback commands for OCU Loop, CSU Loop, and DSU Loop. The Loopback Detection setting does not affect local loopback commands from the local control terminal. The (on) option causes the SRU Card to monitor ports for DDS format loopback commands from the remote equipment. If the SRU Card detects a loopback command, it loops the data back until the remote equipment sends a stop loopback command. The with time-out (w/to) option is the same as the on option, except that after ten minutes the SRU Card automatically releases loopbacks commanded by the remote equipment. The off option causes the SRU Card to ignore all remote loopback commands. This field will show n/a if adpcm or hlink are chosen for the FRAME parameter. (10-97) Page 8-B-7 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 DL OPT Delay Optimization decreases the end-to-end delay time for applications that require lower delay time. The options are off and on. The cost for using Delay Optimization is a decrease in total bandwidth for the card by a factor of 1.5. For example, a user that has 10 ports using the sync Interface will have 115.2Kbps maximum bandwidth available. If delay optimization is used on all 10 ports, the maximum bandwidth available will be 76.8Kbps. ADPCM If adpcm is chosen for the FRAME parameter, this field will allow the user to select the ADPCM card to direct this traffic. The options are P1, P2 or P3. These are the communications server card slot designations that are stamped on the chassis. If any other option is selected this field will show n/a. MAJ EC The Majority Vote Error Correction parameter is available for ports using DSOA framing and having speeds of 9.6Kbps and lower. Option selection is done in a two step operation. The initial options are off and on. If the on option is chosen, a new set of options will appear at the bottom of the screen. The new options are used to select the error threshold, above which the card will generate an alarm. The choices are none, 10e-3, 10e-4, 10e-5, 10e-6 and 10e-7. While the majority vote algorithm is capable of correcting error rates in excess of 10e-3, the Excessive Error Rate alarm is designed to give system administrators advanced notice of problems before users detect them. Table SRU-3 shows the bit error rates for Majority Vote error correction. Table SRU-3. Bit Error Rates for Majority Vote Error Correction Threshold none 10e-3 10e-4 10e-5 10e-6 10e-7 Page 8-B-8 EER Set none 64 or more errors 64 or more errors or any of the above 38 or more errors or any of the above 3 or more errors or any of the above 17 or more errors or any of the above EER Reset none 63 or fewer errors Period none 1 second 63 or fewer errors 10 seconds 37 or fewer errors 60 seconds 2 or fewer errors 60 seconds 16 or fewer errors three 15 minute time intervals (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card Menu of Actions Table SRU-4 shows the Menu of Actions for the SRU Card. Table SRU-4. The SRU Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Initiates and monitors testing of all SRU card ports. Refer to Test section below. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Examples Figure SRU-7 shows some of the ways SRU cards can be used to network low-speed data using the DS0-A and DS0-B framing. In this diagram, five SRU Cards are connected to eight WAN time slots, on one WAN port, on one WAN card (many combinations of cards/ports/time slots are possible). Each SRU card is separated to show the ten ports on each card. Each port is assigned to a low-speed data device and the transmission speed of that device is shown in the center of the SRU port. The diagram sometimes shows only one connection to eliminate unnecessary lines in the diagram. Each port is a direct connection and will not support interchange of data transmission between ports. The first time a WAN card/port/time slot is used, the framing selected on the SRU port will segregate that WAN time slot into SRU time slots. Once selected, those SRU TSs will apply to all ports assigned to that WAN time slot. Once the framing is selected for the WAN card/port/time slot, low-speed data devices can be arranged and selected on the SRU card settings to maximize the system capabilities. In this example, the first port on SRU #1 assigned a framing to WAN 1-1, TS 1, and selected a 38.4Kbps device for its use. The second port has b-5 framing to WAN 1-1, TS 2. Of the five SRU time slots on that WAN time slot, the first three are used to support a 28.8Kbps device (three 9.6Kbps contiguous SRU time slots). The 9.6Kbps device on SRU #1 port #3 occupies the fourth SRU time slot and another 9.6Kbps from SRU #3, port #10, is placed in the fifth slot. WAN 1-1, TS 3 was segregated into ten SRU time slots by the selection of b-10 framing that supports either .3, 1.2, 2.4 or 4.8Kbps transmission. Six 4.8Kbps ports are assigned to the first six SRU time slots. The diagram shows only one connection to eliminate unnecessary lines in the diagram. The six ports are six direct connections and will not support interchange of data transmission. The other four SRU time slots are used by ports 1-4 on SRU #4. Again, the single line does not imply interexchange. (10-97) Page 8-B-9 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 WAN 1-1, TS 4 has b-20 framing and will support up to twenty .3, 1.2 or 2.4Kbps circuits from two (or more) SRU cards. In this example, SRU #1, port #10 is assigned to SRU TS #1, SRU #2, ports 1-10 are assigned to SRU TS 2-11. The nine SRU time slots left are used by SRU #3, ports 1-9. As mentioned earlier, SRU #3, port #10 is a 9.6Kbps circuit assigned to WAN 1-1, TS 2, SRU time slot #5. WAN 1-1, TS 5, has a framing. Only one device can transmit data in this SRU time slot. In this example, a 2.4Kbps circuit was assigned to SRU #4, port #5. WAN 1-1, TS 6 has b-5 framing, so five SRU time slots are available. The first two 9.6Kbps slots are used by a 19.2Kbps circuit on SRU #4, port #6, while the other three are used by 9.6Kbps circuits on SRU #4, ports 7-9. WAN 1-1, TS 7 has the same characteristics as TS 6, except that the first SRU time slot is used by a 9.6Kbps circuit on SRU #4, port #10, SRU time slots 2-4 are assigned to the single 28.8 port on SRU #5. WAN 1-1, TS 8 was designated as b-10 framing and the first eight SRU time slots are associated with the 2.4 and 4.8Kbps circuits on SRU #5, ports 3-10. Page 8-B-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Port # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 WAN CARD #1 PORT #1 38.4 28.8 9.6 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 2.4 SRU #1 Port # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SRU Card TS #1 1 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 9.6 SRU #3 Port # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 TS #3 TS #4 1-10 1-20 5 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 SRU TS SRU #2 Port # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TS #2 WAN CARD #1 PORT #1 TS #5 1 TS #6 1 2 3 4 TS #7 5 1 2 3 4 TS #8 5 1-10 SRU TS 4.8 4.8 2.4 2.4 2.4 19.2 9.6 9.6 9.6 9.6 SRU #4 Port # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 28.8 9.6 4.8 4.8 2.4 4.8 4.8 2.4 4.8 4.8 SRU #5 Figure SRU-7. SRU-WAN Timeslot Assignments (10-97) Page 8-B-11 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 Test Selection of "Test" from the Menu of Options will bring up the screen shown in Figure SRU-8. From this screen, users are allowed to create test situations between SRU Cards or between a single SRU Card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table SRU-5 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 BERT DIR CTS RLSD SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP RTS SR OSS LB ST EER | U1 1 n/a net norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** SRU-232x10 2 n/a net norn norn no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 3 n/a net norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8220 4 n/a net norn norn no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Rev B-0 5 n/a net norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 6 n/a net norn norn no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** SER 00101 7 n/a net norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8 n/a net norn norn no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** | 12-31-99 9 n/a net norm norm no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 14:33 10 n/a net norn norn no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Save | Undo | Refresh | InsertErr | Clear | Main Figure SRU-8. SRU Card Test Screen Table SRU-5. SRU Card Test Screen Setting Options and Defaults Parameter BERT DIR CTS RLSD SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP RTS SR OSS Page 8-B-12 User Options n/a off mark space 1:1 1:7 net user norm off on norm off on information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options information only – no user options 511 2047 Default n/a net norm norm (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card LB ST EER information only – no user options information only – no user options BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected SRU port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space (all zeros), 1:1 (one-zero-one-zero), 1:7 (one-7 zeros-one-7 zeros), 511 (511 test pattern) and 2047 (2047 test pattern). DIR The Direction (DIR) setting allows you to specify where the BERT test signal should be directed. The first option is net (network) which means that the test signal will be transmitted through the system toward the Wide Area Network (WAN). The user option means that the signal will be directed toward the attached DTE device over the RS232 interface. CTS The Clear To Send (CTS) option allows you to define whether the CTS control lead should be held high (on) or low (off). Selecting either on or off will override the selection made in the SRU Card screen. The third option is normal (norm) which means that CTS will behave as described in Table SRU-2. RLSD The Receive Level Signal Detect (RLSD) option allows you to define whether the RLSD control lead should be held high (on) or low (off). The third option is normal (norm) which means that RLSD will behave as described in Table SRU-2. SYNC The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. BE The Bit Error field shows the total number of bit errors logged. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ES The Errored Seconds field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were detected. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. (10-97) Page 8-B-13 SRU Card Reference Guide v3.6 SES The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an informationonly field, there are no user-selectable parameters. CSES The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive nonSeverely Errored Seconds. Since this it an information-only field there are no userselectable parameters. OSS The Out of Synchronization Seconds field shows the number of seconds that the SRU BERT has been out of synchronization. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. BER The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ELAP The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. RTS The Request To Send (RTS) field shows the current status of the RTS control lead. The two values that can be displayed are "on" and "off." Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. SR OSS The Subrate Out of Synchronization Seconds (SR OSS) field shows how many seconds in which there was a Subrate framing loss. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. Page 8-B-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card LB ST The Loopback State (LB ST) field indicates whether there are any remotely-initiated loopbacks currently active on the SRU port. This field will display both latching and non-latching loopbacks that are initiated from a remote device via in-band loop-up codes. In addition to "none," the six possible messages that can be displayed in that field are "l-ocu," "l-dsu" and "l-csu" for latching loopbacks, and "ocu," "dsu" and "csu" for non-latching loopbacks. Since this is an information-only field, there are no userselectable parameters for this option. EER The Excessive Error field will display the computed the DS0 error rate for each port where that option was selected. The Majority Error Rate will be computed based on the integration period for the selected threshold. For example, if the 10e-4 threshold was selected, the integration would be ten seconds. Menu of Actions Table SRU-6 shows the Menu of Actions for the Test Screen of the SRU Card. Table SRU-6. Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh InsertErr Clear Main (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Allows the user to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal. Clears the testing screen and resets all counters to zero. Returns to the SRU card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Page 8-B-15 SRU Card Page 8-B-16 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Cards Introduction The OCU-DP (Office Channel Unit–Data Port) is used to interface directly to Data Service Units (DSUs)/Channel Service Units (CSUs) supporting data traffic up to and including 64kbps. A four-wire circuit can connect the OCU-DP card to a DSU/CSU that can be located up to four miles away. In Switched 56kbps mode, users access the network on an as-needed basis by dial-up commands. The system must be equipped to provide -48VDC power to fully support the functionality of the OCU-DP card. 8249 OCU-DP Card The 8249 OCU-DP card supports two ports, each of which may be connected to a DSU/CSU operating at 64kbps, 56kbps, Switched 56kbps, 19.2kbps, 9.6kbps, 4.8kbps or 2.4kbps. Secondary channel operation is supported from 2.4 to 56kbps. 8247 OCU-DP Card The 8247 OCU-DP card supports ten ports, five of which require installation of the 845 child card to become operational. The 8247 supports all the features and functions of the 8249 two-port OCU-DP card with the following exceptions: • BCH Error correction is not supported • Performance monitoring is not supported • Operation in CSU mode is not supported 845 OCU-DP Child Card The 845 OCU-DP Child Card is a piggy-back addition to the 8247 OCU-DP card that activates the additional five data ports on the 8247. 8248 OCU-DP Card The 8248 OCU-DP card is an older version of the 8247 OCU-DP that supports five ports with the installation of the 845 child card. (10-97) Page 8-C-1 OCU-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card Settings Figure OCU-1 shows the OCU-DP screen. Table OCU-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 | U1 OCU-DPx2 1 stdby w1-1 01 a 2.4 01 ocu off off d off off w/to STATE WAN/SRV TS FRAME RATE SR TS MODE ERR COR SECOND USER LB LB LB GEN LB DET 8249 Rev AC-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 2 stdby P1-C3 n/a a 64k 01 ocu n/a n/a d off off w/to Save | Undo | Refresh | Perf | Test | Main Figure OCU-1. The Main Card Screen Table OCU-1. Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS FRAME RATE SR TS MODE ERR COR SECOND USER LB LB LB GEN LB DET Page 8-C-2 User Options stdby act w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w4-1 w4-2 01-24 01-31 a b-5 b-10 b-20 2.4 4.8 9.6 19.2 56k 01 01-05 01-10 01-20 ocu csu off maj-v bch off on d o off dte net-d net-a off ocu-n cha-n cha-u w/to on off Notes w3-1 64k w3-2 sw56k 1 Default stdby w1-1 01 a 2.4 01 ocu off off d off off w/to (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card NOTES 1. The maj-v option is supported on all cards if the Rate is 2.4, 4.8 or 9.6. The bch option is supported only if the Rate is 19.2 , 56k or 64k in systems using the 8800 and 8804 CPU Cards or the Rate is 19.2 with systems using the 8801 CPU Card. Error Correction is not supported if the Rate is sw56k. BCH Error Correction is not supported on the 5-port and 10-port OCU-DP card. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the state setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to be assigned to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is connected. Values range from 01 to 24 for T1 links and 01 to 31 (excluding TS 16 in cas or ccs mode) for E1 links. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link; see the Operations chapter for information about viewing crossconnect maps. FRAME The Frame setting allows you to set up the framing of the DS0 to which the OCU-DP port is connected. The choices, as diagrammed in Figure OCU-2, are DSO-A (a), DSOB with a limit of five ports (b-5), DSO-B with a limit of ten ports (b-10), DSO-B with a limit of twenty ports (b-20). RATE The Rate setting identifies the highest data transmission rate for the OCU-DP port. Values are 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56k, 64k and sw56k (switched 56kbps). See Figure OCU-2. (10-97) Page 8-C-3 OCU-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 SR TS The Sub-Rate Time Slot (SR TS) indicates the sub-rate position within the DS0 time slot that the port will occupy (see Figure OCU-2). If a framing is selected, only one sub-rate time slot is supported and the SR TS setting will default to 1. If b-5 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-5. If b-10 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-10. If b-20 framing is selected, then the sub-rate time slots available are 1-20. In b-5 framing, if circuits with speeds greater than 9.6kbps are assigned to the sub-rate time slot, adjacent sub-rate time slots must be available to accommodate their size. A 19.2kbps circuit would occupy two contiguous sub-rate time slots (leaving space for up to three 9.6kbps circuits from other OCU-DP cards and ports). The SR TS number selected will be the first segment occupied by this circuit. If a 19.2kbps circuit occupies two segments of the b-5 frame, selecting SR TS #1 will assign it to segments 1 and 2. Segments 3, 4 and 5 may be assigned either independently to 9.6kbps (or less) circuits from other OCU-DP cards. If a circuit is assigned that exceeds the slots necessary to accommodate it, such as a 19.2kbps circuit to SR TS #5 in b-5 framing, the message, "Invalid SR TS," will be displayed. If a circuit requires more space than the SR TS has available, such as a having a 19.2kbps circuit assigned to SR TS #1, a 19.2kbps circuit assigned to SR TS #3 and then attempting to assign a 19.2kbps circuit to SR TS #4, the message "SR TS overlapping," will be displayed. WAN #1, Port #1 (w1-1) Framing Maximum Speed TS #1 TS #2 TS #3 TS #4 a b-5 b-10 b-20 56k 19.2k* 4.8k 2.4k * A 19.2 kbps circuit will occupy two contiguous 9.6 kbps subrate time slots Figure OCU-2. Frames, Rates and Time Slots MODE The Mode setting options are ocu and csu. You should select ocu (which is by far the more common) whenever the OCU-DP port is attached to a CSU/DSU over a 4-wire circuit. In that mode, the OCU-DP port will generate the necessary sealing current and the CSU/DSU will terminate it. The csu mode should not be used unless you have two back-to-back OCU-DP ports. In that case, to achieve proper orientation and sealing current, one of two OCU-DP ports should be configured for ocu mode and the other for csu mode. The csu mode is not supported on the 5-port and 10-port OCU-DP card. Page 8-C-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card ERR COR The Error Correction setting provides for different methods of error correction depending upon the Rate selected. The default ERR COR setting is off. When sub-rate speeds of 9.6k or less are chosen in the Rate setting, the Error Correction setting of maj-v (majority vote) is available. Using the majority vote option allows the system to do error-polling and decision-making based upon the repeated bit pattern. The bch error correction is available for rates of 19.2, 56k and 64k on the 8800 and 8804 CPU Cards or a 19.2 rate on the 8801 CPU Card. Using bch with either 56k or 64k requires an additional WAN timeslot to carry the error correction information. The WAN timeslot selected must be larger than the one chosen in the TS option (e.g., if timeslot #17 is chosen for TS, the timeslot used for error correction must be #18-24 for T1 systems and #18-31 for E1 systems). Error Correction is not supported on the 5-port and 10-port OCU-DP card. SECOND Secondary channel allows the CSU/DSU to establish a separate lower speed data circuit with the OCU-DP port. When synchronized, this special circuit can be used for testing and maintenance of the main circuit or for the transmission of other low-speed data. The settings are on and off. The secondary channel is transported in the 8th bit position of the DS0 to which the OCU-DP is assigned. The following chart shows the secondary channel rate associated with the various primary port rates supported on the OCU-DP card. For a further description of the secondary channel function refer to Pub 62310 and TA TSY 000077 and TA TSY 000083. Primary Port Rate 56kbps 19.2kbps 9.6kbps 4.8kbps 2.4kbps Secondary Port Rate 2666 bps 1,066 bps 533 bps 266 bps 133 bps USER LB The User Loopback (USER LB) is a specialized code conversion function that is only relevant in Taiwan and some other countries in the Far East. The two options are d and o, neither of which has any effect in North America. LB The OCU-DP card supports three Loopback options that act on the card itself. The dte option loops the 4-wire analog interface of the OCU-DP port towards the attached CSU/DSU. It is used to test the local cabling and the analog drivers in the OCU-DP card (see Figure OCU-3). (10-97) Page 8-C-5 OCU-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 The network A (net-a) option loops the 4-wire OCU-DP interface towards the network. It is used to test all of the OCU-DP card circuitry, the system common equipment, the WAN link card, the remote equipment, and the WAN line between the two sites (see Figure OCU-4). The network D (net-d) option puts a loopback towards the network at the point where the OCU-DP card interfaces with the system bus. It serves to separate the OCU-DP card circuitry from the system common equipment, the WAN link card, the remote equipment, and the WAN line between the two sites (see Figure OCU-5). System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU CSU/DSU OCU Local Remote DTE DTE Local Site Remote Site Carrier's DDS Network Figure OCU-3. OCU Local Loopback (dte option) System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU OCU CSU/DSU Local Remote DTE DTE Carrier's Local Site Remote Site DDS Network Figure OCU-4. OCU Local Loopback (net-a option) System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU OCU CSU/DSU Local Remote DTE DTE Local Site Carrier's Remote Site DDS Network Figure OCU-5. OCU Local Loopback (net-d option) LB GEN The Loopback Generate settings initiate various in-band diagnostic codes sent to the remote equipment. These codes are compatible with DDS networks and allow you to command a latching loopback at remote DDS equipment. The ds0-n loopback loops the analog interface of the remote OCU-DP device back towards the network for circuits using the 64k Rate. The ocu-n loopback loops the analog interface of the remote OCU-DP device back towards the network for circuits using the 56k or less Rates. The csu-n loopback loops the 4-wire interface of the remote CSU/DSU device back towards the network. A 48V converter is required for this loopback. Page 8-C-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card The csu-u loopback loops the 4-wire interface of the local CSU/DSU device towards the network. Figures OCU-6, -7, and -8 show the loopback locations. You can also turn all remote loopbacks off. Loop-up or loop-down commands cannot be implemented for two ports on the same card simultaneously. The user must finish all loopback operations on one port before attempting to perform any loopback operations on another port. System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU OCU CSU/DSU Local Remote DTE DTE Local Site Carrier's Remote Site DDS Network Figure OCU-6. OCU Remote Loopback (ds0-n and ocu-n options) System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU OCU CSU/DSU Local Remote DTE DTE Local Site Carrier's Remote Site DDS Network Figure OCU-7. OCU Remote Loopback (csu-n option) System Unit with OCU-DP Card CSU/DSU OCU CSU/DSU Local Remote DTE DTE Local Site Carrier's Remote Site DDS Network Figure OCU-8. OCU Remote Loopback (csu-u option) LB DET The Loopback Detection setting determines how the system responds to latching and non-latching loopback commands from remote equipment. The OCU-DP reacts only to the in-band DDS format loopback commands for Channel Loop, OCU Loop, and DSU Loop. The Loopback Detection setting does not affect local loopback commands from the local control terminal. The settings are off, on and w/to (on with time out). The off option causes the system to ignore all remote loopback commands. The on option causes the system to monitor for DDS format loopback commands from the remote equipment. If the system detects a loopback command, it loops the data back until the remote equipment sends a stop loopback command. The with time-out (w/to) option is the same as the on option, except that after ten minutes the system automatically releases loopbacks commanded by the remote equipment. When using the OCU-DP port for a clear-channel, 64kbps circuit in DS0A mode, you should set the loopback detection to off to prevent unintentional loopback activation. (10-97) Page 8-C-7 OCU-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table OCU-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the OCU-DP Card. Table OCU-2. The OCU-DP Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Perf Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Brings up the performance monitoring screen. See below. Initiates and monitors testing of all OCU-DP card ports. Refer to Test section below. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Test Selection of "Test" from the Menu of Options will bring up the screen shown in Figure OCU-9. From this screen, users are allowed to create test situations between OCU-DP cards or between a single OCU-DP card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table OCU-3 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 BERT DIR DATA SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP LB ST 4W DDS | U1 OCU-DPx2 1 n/a net pri no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8249 Rev AC-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 2 n/a net pri no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Save | Undo | Refresh | insertErr | Clear | Main Figure OCU-9. The OCU-DP Test Card Screen Page 8-C-8 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card Table OCU-3. Setting Options and Defaults Parameter BERT DIR DATA SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP LB ST 4W DDS User Options off mark space 1:1 1:7 511 2047 qrss net user pri sec information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options information only—no user options Notes Default off net pri BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected OCU-DP port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space (all zeros), 1:1 (1010), 1:7 (0100-0000), 511 (511 test pattern), 2047 (2047 test pattern) and qrss (quasi-random pseudo signal). DIR The Direction (DIR) setting allows you to specify where the BERT test signal should be directed. The first option is net (network) which means that the test signal will be transmitted through the system toward the Wide Area Network (WAN). The user option means that the signal will be directed toward the attached CSU/DSU device over the 4-wire interface. DATA The DATA setting specifies whether the BERT test signal should be connected to the Primary (pri) or the Secondary (sec) channel of the OCU-DP port. If there is no Secondary channel associated with the OCU-DP port, then the only option available is pri. SYNC The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. (10-97) Page 8-C-9 OCU-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 BE The Bit Error field shows the total number of bit errors logged. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ES The Errored Seconds field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were detected. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. SES The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an informationonly field, there are no user-selectable parameters. CSES The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive nonSeverely Errored Seconds. Since this it an information-only field there ore no userselectable parameters. OSS The Out of Synchronization Seconds field shows the number of seconds that the OCUDP BERT has been out of synchronization. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. BER The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ELAP The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option. 4W DDS The 4-wire DDS setting shows if the 4-wire interface is both present and operational. The field will show norm if the interface is connected or nos for No Signal. Page 8-C-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card Menu of Actions Table OCU-4 shows the Menu of Actions for the Test Screen of the OCU Card. Table OCU-4. Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh InsertErr Test Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Since the informational fields on this screen are not updated in “real time,” the Refresh command is used to obtain the latest statistics. Allows you to manually insert a single error into a clear data signal. Clears the test screen. Returns to the OCU-DP card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. OCU-DP Error Correction and Performance Monitoring If "majority vote" or "BCH" error correction is enabled on the two-port OCU-DP card, then the system will support performance monitoring of the data traffic. The performance monitoring screen is accessed by selecting one of the two ports from the OCU-DP card main screen and typing "p." Error correction and performance monitoring are not supported on the 5-port and 10-port OCU-DP card. If the BCH method of error correction is selected, then the OCU-DP card will monitor the data traffic coming in from the T1 network and use the BCH polynomial values that accompany the data to log the number of errors and to attempt to correct such errors. Any data errors that are observed are considered "input" data errors and contribute to the input error statistics such as Input Errored Seconds (IES), Input Severely Errored Seconds (ISES) and Input Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (ICSES). Depending upon the severity of the input errors, the BCH algorithm may be able to correct the data prior to transmitting it over the four-wire DDS circuit. If an error is so severe that it cannot be corrected, then it will also be logged as an "output" data error and will increment the Output Errored Seconds (OES), Output Severely Errored Seconds (OSES) and Output Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (OCSES) counters. If the majority vote method of error correction is selected, then the OCU-DP card will monitor the data traffic coming in from the T1 network and use the majority vote algorithm to determine if any data errors have occurred. Any data errors that are observed are considered "input" data errors and contribute to the input error statistics such as Input Errored Seconds (IES), Input Severely Errored Seconds (ISES) and Input Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (ICSES). Since the majority vote algorithm assumes that it can correct any data input errors, the "output" data error category has no meaning in this context. Consequently, the Output Errored Seconds (OES), Output Severely Errored Seconds (OSES) and Output Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (OCSES) fields do not apply to the majority vote mode. Figure OCU-10 shows the OCU-DP performance monitoring screen. Performance statistics covering the previous twenty-four hours are available and are totaled-up at the bottom of the screen. (10-97) Page 8-C-11 OCU-DP Card Node_1 14:33 Reference Guide v3.6 | U1 OCU-DPx2 8249 Rev AC-0 Ser 00101 | 12-31-99 UNIT 1 PERFORMANCE CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL IES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ISES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICSES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OSES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OCSES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Refresh | Clear | pgUp | pgDn | Main Figure OCU-10. Performance Monitoring Screen IES The Input Errored Seconds (IES) field shows the total number of seconds in which any input errors were detected. Since this is an information-only field, there are no userselectable parameters. ISES The Input Severely Errored Seconds (ISES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the input bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. ICSES The Input Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (ICSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Input Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the ICSES field will increment by one for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive seconds that are not severely errored. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. Page 8-C-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card OES The Output Errored Seconds (OES) field shows the total number of seconds in which any output errors were detected. This field only applies if the error correction method selected is BCH. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. OSES The Output Severely Errored Seconds (OSES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the output bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). This field only applies if the error correction method selected is BCH. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters. OCSES The Output Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (OCSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Output Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the OCSES field will increment by one for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive that are not severely errored. This field only applies if the error correction method selected is BCH. Since this is an information-only field, there are no userselectable parameters. Menu of Actions Table OCU-5 shows the Menu of Actions for the Performance Monitoring Screen of the OCU Card. Table OCU-5. Performance Monitoring Screen Menu of Actions Action Refresh Clear pgUp pgDn Main (10-97) Function Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Clears the test screen. Scrolls through data screens from the oldest to the newest. Scrolls through data screens from the newest to the oldest. Returns to the OCU-DP card main screen. Page 8-C-13 OCU-DP Card Page 8-C-14 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FRAD Card Introduction 8231 FRAD Card The 8231 FRAD (Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler) card is a plug-in user card for the system. It provides users access to the Frame Relay network of carriers through the use of ten on-board RS232 ports on the front panel of the card. Additionally, DS0-B traffic can be routed through the FRAD card across the backplane via WAN crossconnect and low speed data cards. 8231 FRAD Card Main Screen Figure FRAD-1 shows the 8231 FRAD main screen. Table FRAD-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 Version #:2.0 STATE PRT TYP SRC TS RATE DLCI SUB AD LMI DTE PRM DES PRT FORMAT COM CTF FLW CTL CTS TX CLK LB FRM LEN | U1 1 actv frad none 02 64k n/a no none n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a FRAD2-10 2 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 3 actv frad rs232 n/a 19.2 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 8231 Rev A2-0 4 actv frad rs232 n/a 9.6 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 5 actv frad rs232 n/a 14.4 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a Ser 01103 6 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 7 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a | 12-31-99 8 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 9 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a 14:33 10 stdby frad none n/a n/a 16 no n/a n/a 1 hdlc n/a n/a n/a int off n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Perf | Test | Main Figure FRAD-1. 8231 FRAD Card Main Screen (10-97) Page 8-D-1 FRAD Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table FRAD-1. 8231 Main Screen Options and Defaults Parameter STATE PRT TYP SRC TS RATE DLCI SUB ADR LMI DTE PRM DES PRT FORMAT COM CF CTS TX CLK LB FRM LEN User Options stdby actv frad conc wan serv rs232 wan: none w1-1 through w4-2 serv: P1 P2 P3 rs232: 2.4 4.8 9.6 14.4 19.2 28.8 38.4 n/a table table: 1-24 (T1) 56k 64k Enter number <1 - 1024> n/a n/a n/a 1 - 10 hdlc n/a n/a int ext off dte net 32 64 128 256 n/a Default stdby w1-1 table 56k 1-1024 n/a n/a n/a 1-10 hdlc n/a n/a int off n/a STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set the State setting to standby (stdby ) for a port you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv ) for a port that is ready for use. PRT TYPE The Port Type identifies the type of interface expected for this port. The selections are frad and conc. If frad is selected, the rs232 or serv is the usual input source. If conc is selected then wan is the usual input source. SRC The Source parameter allows the user to select the type and source of data input to that port. The options are wan, serv and rs232 . If rs232 is selected, the card will expect direct transmission of data through the corresponding RS232 input port (i.e. the eight numbers at the top of the screen are also associated with the eight user ports on the back of the card). The User card is set up as four groups of two ports each (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10). These ports are considered pairs so that if rs232 is selected for port #1, port #2 will also require RS232 input. Page 8-D-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FRAD Card TS The Timeslot (TS) setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which the Frame Relay port is connected. Highlight the table option and press the "Enter" key. At the bottom of the screen, the system will display the time slots that can be assigned to the WAN link selected in the previous selection (i.e. if w1-1 is chosen and the SRC option is either CSU or DSX, 24 timeslots will show available for assignment, if w1-1 is CEPT, 30 timeslots will show available for assignment). Only one timeslot can be selected for each Frame Relay port. RATE The Rate parameter is user selectable depending upon the SRC and the Format settings. If frad and rs232 is selected, the options (in Kbps) are 2.4 to 38.4. Since these ports are considered pairs, if rs232 is selected above for port #3, port #4 will also have choices for 2.4 to 38.4Kbps rates. If conc is selected the rate parameter selection options will be 56k and 64k DLCI The Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) identifies the frame's logical connection within the Frame Relay port. This number is assigned by the carrier. The options are 16 through 991. SUB AD n/a - not available - no user input LMI The Local Management Interface options are n/a when the Port Type is set to frad and none when Port Type is conc. DTE PRM n/a - not available - no user input DES PRT The Destination Port options are n/a if frad port type is selected and 1-10 if conc (concentrator) is selected. FORMAT The Format parameter is currently set to hdlc. COM CTF n/a - not available - no user input. (10-97) Page 8-D-3 FRAD Card Reference Guide v3.6 CTS n/a - not available - no user input TX CLK The Transmit Clock (TX CLK) setting is only available to users who selected rs232 in the SRC setting. The options are int (internal) and ext (external). If any other SRC setting was selected, this setting will show as n/a. (A special cable, available from your vendor, is necessary to enable the external clock.) LB The Loopback (LB) setting allows you to activate a number of different loopback options for RS232 (Figure FRAD-2). The off option is the default setting. The dte (DTE) loops data from the local DTE back to itself through the local FRAD card. The net (network) option loops data back toward the distant DTE through the local FRAD card. FRM LEN The Frame Length is the amount of data being transmitted over the data lines. DTE Loopback Local Frame Relay Remote DTE Network DTE Frame Relay Network Remote FRAD card Network Loopback Local DTE DTE FRAD card Figure FRAD-2. FRAD Loopback Options Page 8-D-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FRAD Card Menu of Actions Table FRAD-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the 8231 main screen. Table FRAD-2. 8231 Card Main Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Perf Test Main (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Allows the user to access the screen that contains performance statistics of the Frame Relay port. Refer to Performance section below. Allows the user to access the screen that initiates and measures testing statistics for highlighted user. Then refer to test section below. Returns to the main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Page 8-D-5 FRAD Card Reference Guide v3.6 8231 FRAD Card Performance Screen The 8231 Frame Relay card records performance statistics for the Frame Relay port. Measurements taken during the current hour and each of the previous 24 hours are displayed. A second counter at the top of the screen shows elapsed time from the last expired hour or in the current hour. Performance statistics are not updated in real time. Use the "R" (Refresh) command from the Menu of Actions at the bottom of the screen to update columns. The total for the entire 24 hour period (not including the current hour figure) is shown at the bottom of the column. Figure FRAD-3 shows the performance monitoring screen for the main Frame Relay card screen. Node_1 14:33 Port 01 CUR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TOTAL STATUS: | U1 FRAD2-10 PERFORMANCE SEC. FRAME Rx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T=DTE Down 8231 Rev A2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 00000 of 900 FRAME Tx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L=LOOPBACK OCTETS Rx OCTETS Tx DRPRx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DRPTx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS .LS S=STANDBY pgUp | pgDn | Refresh | Main Figure FRAD-3. The 8231 Port Performance Monitoring Screen BLOCK Rx The Block Receive column shows a total of Blocks received during that particular one hour period. BLOCK Tx The Block Transmit column shows a total of Blocks transmitted during that particular one hour period. OCTETS Rx The Octets Receive column shows a total of bytes received during that particular one hour period. Page 8-D-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 FRAD Card OCTETS Tx The Octets Transmit column shows a total of bytes received during that particular one hour period. DRPRX The Dropped (frame) Received column tabulates the total number of frames dropped before being received during the 15 minute period. DRPTX The Dropped (frame) Transmitted column tabulates the total number of frames dropped before being transmitted during the 15 minute period. STATUS The Status column shows an alphabetic character to describe the condition that caused the error in the last two columns. Conditions displayed are T (DTE port down), L (Loopback) and S (Standby). Menu of Actions Table FRAD-3 shows the Menu of Actions for the Main Performance Monitoring screen. Table FRAD-3. Main Performance Monitoring Screen Menu of Actions Action pgUp pgDn Refresh Main (10-97) Function View the first 12 hour period (current + 1-12). View the second 12 hour period (current + 13-24). Update performance and test data that are not automatically updated Return to the user port configuration screen. Page 8-D-7 FRAD Card Page 8-D-8 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 DS0-DP Card Introduction The 8254 DS0 Data Port/G.703 Contradirectional/Codirectional Data Unit (DS0DP/G.703) is a plug-in user card for the system. The DS0-DP/G.703 provides a 64kbps interface to a DS0 of a T1/E1 network. Since the byte alignment of the 64kbps data stream to the DS0 is essential, the interface provides a 64kbps bit clock and a 8KHz byte clock in the DS0-DP mode, and a composite clock/data signal in the G.703 mode. DS0-DP Card Settings Figure DS0-1 shows the DS0-DP screen. Table DS0-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 STATE WAN TS MODE CLK LB LBGEN LB DET | U1 1 stdby w1-1 01 ds0dp int off off off DS0DPx4 2 stdby w1-1 01 ds0dp int off off off 8254 Rev A01-0 3 stdby w1-1 01 ds0dp int off off off Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 4 stdby w1-1 01 ds0dp int off off off Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Main Figure DS0-1. The DS0-DP Card Screen UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTRA-BUILDING CONNECTIONS ONLY (10-97) Page 8-E-1 DS0-DP Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table DS0-1. DS0-DP Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS MODE CLK LB LB GEN LB DET User Options stdby actv w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w4-2 1-24 1-31 ds0dp contr codir int ext off dte net off ocu csu dsu ds0 off enab w/to Default stdby w3-1 w3-2 w4-1 w1-1 01 ds0dp int off off off STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the state setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 (excluding time slot 16 in cas or ccs mode) for E1 links. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link; see the Operations chapter for information about viewing crossconnect maps. MODE This option displays the selection of modes. In ds0dp mode, the port will provide a common bit and byte clock to be used by the attached DTE device for both receive and transmit. When one port is set to ds0dp all other ports will default to the DS0-DP mode as well. Similarly, when one port is changed to one of the G.703 modes (Codirectional or Contradirectional), any port set for the DS0-DP mode will default to the Contradirectional mode. The contr selection configures the port for the Contradirectional mode. In this mode, the card supplies both the transmit and receive clocks to the DTE. The codir selection configures the port for the Codirectional mode. In this mode, the clocks and data make up a composite signal. The clocks must be derived from the data. Page 8-E-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 DS0-DP Card CLK This option allows the selection of the desired clocking mode when in the DS0-DP mode. When set to int, the card generates the bit and byte clocks to the DTE. When set to ext, the card receives the bit and byte clocks from the attached device. All ports must have the same clock setting, therefore, when one port is changed, all ports are changed. When a G.703 mode is selected, this option defaults to n/a. LB This option allows the user to set local loopbacks. The off option is for no loopbacks. The dte selection loops data towards the DTE. The net option loops data towards the network. LB GEN This option allows the user to set local loopbacks. The off option is for no loopbacks. The other options (ocu, dsu, csu, ds0) force the card to send the appropriate DDS latching loopback code towards the remote end. This option will only function in the DS0-DP mode. LB DET This option allows the card to detect DDS latching loopbacks. When set to off, no loopbacks can be detected. When set to enab, loopbacks will be detected. When a loopback is detected, it will be maintained until a loop down is detected. w/to is the same as enab except that if no loop down is detected after 10 minutes, the loopback will self-terminate. This option only functions in the DS0-DP mode. Menu of Actions Table DS0-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the DS0-DP Card. Table DS0-2. The DS0-DP Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Main (10-97) Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Page 8-E-3 DS0-DP Card Page 8-E-4 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 B7R Card Introduction The B7R Data card enables the system to accept network management information from each of eight separate DS0s and multiplex them into a single 38.4kbps asynchronous bitstream running the Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP). (See the Network Management section of the CPU card chapter.) 8228 Bit-7-Redundant (B7R) Card The 8228 B7R Card will multiplex up to eight B7R formatted data channels from eight different DS0s. This card has a separate maintenance and testing channel (port #9) and a single aggregate channel (port #10) to redirect information from the DS0s to the single RS232 connector on the back of the card. Figure B7R-1 shows the part the B7R card plays in the Network Management System. SNMP alarm traps and TELNET configuration run over this path. Both formats can use the 4kbps FDL (Facility Data Link) on a T1 link using ESF format, a full DS0 on a T1 link or the computer port of the Interface card using SLIP protocol. If the FDL is used to transmit and receive information, a DACSII (6.1 or higher) must be used to convert the FDL/IP information to a full DS0. (On point-to-point circuits, a DACSII is not needed.) A B7R card is used at the NMS site to multiplex the contents of eight DS0 circuits into a single 38.4kbps asynchronous circuit using SLIP protocol for use by a communication server or terminal server for routing to a Local Area Network. System #1 4Kbps TCP/IP FDL Circuits System #2 Single 38.4Kbps Asynch SLIP Circuit System #3 Concentrator Unit DACSII System #4 B 7 R T1/E1 Terminal Server System #5 LAN System #6 Up to 8 DS0s Workstations System #7 System #8 Figure B7R-1. A Typical NMS Application (10-97) Page 8-F-1 B7R Card Reference Guide v3.6 B7R Card Settings Figure B7R-2 shows the B7R card screen. Table B7R-1 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 STATE WAN TS RATE COM CF CTS ADDR NETMSK | U1 1 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip B7R-8 2 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip 8228 3 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip 4 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip Rev A0-0 5 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip 6 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip Ser 00101 7 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip | 12-31-99 8 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip 9 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip 14:33 10 stdby w1-1 01 fdl n/a n/a Ip Ip Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | Main Figure B7R-2. SRU Card Default Screen Table B7R-1. B7R Card Setting Options and Defaults Parameter STATE WAN TS FORMAT COM CF CTS ADDR NETMSK User Options stdby actv w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 2 w4-1 w4-2 01-24 01-31 b7r b4r 9.6 19.2 28.2 38.4 8 7 6 5 1 2 none odd even space mark off on ip ip Notes w3- 1 2 3 4 Default stdby w1-1 01 b7r 8 1 none off 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 NOTES 1. Rate settings are only available for port #10. 2. Com CF is a three step process that is only available for port #9 and #10. Page 8-F-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 B7R Card 3. The IP address of ports #1-8 must match the IP address assigned to the remote system on that DS0. Port #9 does not require an IP address because it is a debug port. 4. Ports #1-8 share the same subnetwork mask, and the subnet address for ports #1-8 must be different from the one used for port #10. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. Set the State setting to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. Port #9 is used for debug purposes and is normally in the stdby position. WAN The WAN setting identifies the WAN link that carries the data for this B7R port (either from the DACS or directly from the WAN link). The choices for this setting are w1-1 through w4-2. Ports #9 and #10 do not require input from WAN links, therefore this field shows n/a for these ports. TS The TS (timeslot) setting identifies the timeslot on the WAN link carrying data for the B7R port (either from the DACS or directly from the WAN link). Acceptable values for this field are 01-24 for a T1 link or 01-15 and 17-31 for an E1 link. Generally, timeslots are assigned sequentially. For example, card #1 would be assigned to ports 1-8, card #2 to ports 9-16 and card #3 would be assigned to ports 17-24, but this is not required. RATE The Rate setting allows you to select the rate in thousands of bits per second (kbps) for transmission of data. The rate of ports #1-8 are preset to 4kbps. The rate of port #9 is preset to 9.6kbps. The options for port #10 are 9.6, 19.2, 28.8 and 38.4. Since the combined output of ports #1-8 are 32kbps, port #10 should be set to 38.4 to accommodate a full system. COM CF The Communication Configuration setting is not applicable for ports #1-8 and the n/a value cannot be changed. Ports #9-10 can be changed in a three step procedure that selects the data bits, parity and stop bits. The default values are 8, N, 1. (10-97) Page 8-F-3 B7R Card Reference Guide v3.6 CTS The Clear To Send setting selects an option that will allow hardware handshaking with the terminal server and the B7R card when enabled for port #10. Since it is not applicable for ports #1-8, the n/a value cannot be changed. Ports #9-10 can be changed. The values for this setting are off and on. All cabling must be terminated before activating the CTS feature. ADDR The Address setting defines the IP address for each Integrated Access Controller associated with the first eight ports and port #10. Port #9 does not require an IP address and cannot be changed from the n/a setting. This address must be the same as the address used in the PORT IP ADDR field on the Interface card of the system with which it is associated for ports #1-8. The IP address for port #10 is a unique address for each B7R card and must be on a different network than ports #1-8. This allows the user to "ping" each B7R card itself for system diagnostics. NETMSK The Network Mask setting defines the single subnet mask address for each system associated with the first eight ports and a different subnet mask for port #10. A change of subnet mask for any of the first eight ports will change all of the ports. Port #9 does not require a subnet mask and cannot be changed from the n/a setting. This address must be the same as the address used in the NETMASK field on the Interface card of the system with which it is associated for ports #1-8. Menu of Actions Table B7R-2 shows the Menu of Actions for the B7R card. Table B7R-2. The B7R Card Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Copy Main Page 8-F-4 Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Introduction The Basic Rate Interface (BRI) user card offers non-switched connectivity to sites located up to 18,000 feet from the system location. Factors such as wire gauge, bridge tap and loading patterns are described in ANSI T1.601-1992 specifications. The 8260 and 8261 BRI cards are equipped with eight (8) “U” interfaces, each of which can carry one BRI, 2B+D channel, providing either two 64Kbps or one 128Kbps bearer channels per interface. The 8262 four-wire BRI card supports the “S” and “T” interfaces. The connection distances for this card are largely dependent on the number of devices connected to the card. 8260 BRI Card The 8260 BRI Card has software selectable mode operations of LT and NT. The 8260 supports up to eight leased or BRI terminal extension (brite) applications. The 8260 does not support sealing current and does not provide any DC termination. 8261 BRI Card The 8261 BRI Card has all of the functionality of the 8260. Switching between the LT and NT modes requires both making a menu selection and changing jumper connections on the card (see Figure BRI-14). The 8261 supports sealing current of 7.5mA or 15.0mA for a number of different times and duration. To activate sealing current, set the jumpers on the card to the desired position (see Figure BRI-15 for jumper locations) also set SEAL CURR to on (see Figure BRI-2). The Sealing Current screen (see Figure BRI-3) provides for setting the start time, duration, and repeat interval. This card is shipped with jumpers attached that make the automatic default for the card LT and 15mA sealing current. (Sealing current is not applicable in NT mode.) The 8260 and 8261 are very similar in operation and will be discussed together at the start of the chapter. The 8262 BRI Card is sufficiently different that its screen and operation information is included separately. 8262 BRI Card The 8262 BRI Card is designed to support “S/T” 4-wire interface applications. It also supports both internal and external phantom power arrangements. Jumpers are available to select termination’s on the receive and transmit sides individually. UL Statement OPERATION OF THIS INTERFACE IS LIMITED TO INTER-BUILDING CONNECTIONS LESS THAN 1,000 METERS (10-97) Page 8-G-1 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Circuit Applications Figure BRI-1 shows the difference between the two circuit types, Leased line (lease) and BRI Terminal Extension (brite). The leased circuit can be any standard 2B1Q (U interface) NTU device that supports "nailed-up" (1 or 2 B channels) connections with no D channel signaling. The brite mode supports switched connectivity to ISDN capable switches and D channel signaling on either a full DS0 or multiplexed 4:1 on a single DS0. For both examples, B channels carrying voice traffic on the BRI card can be compressed through the ADPCM card to extend the user's resources (see Conversion section). The only limitation on BRI traffic is that NTUs or NT1s must be located less than 18,000 feet from the system unit. Near End System Unit DTE Far End System Unit DTE T1/E1 2B1Q NTU 2B1Q NTU Leased Line 2-wire BRI Eq ISDN Switch Near End System Unit Far End System Unit T1/E1 4-wire BRI Eq BRI Lines BRI Terminal Extension "U" NT1 "S/T" Figure BRI-1. Typical BRI System Application Page 8-G-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card 8260 and 8261 BRI Card Settings Figure BRI-2 shows the BRI main screen and Table BRI-1 lists the settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 | U1 BRI Ux8sc 8261 Rev D2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 Version: #1.5 STATE TERMINAL TYPE B MODE B1 WAN/SRV B1 TS B2 WAN/SRV B2TS D WAN D TS D SUBCHAN LOCAL LB LB CHAN LBGEN MD LB GEN SEAL CURR TR COND 1 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 2 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 3 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 4 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 5 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 6 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 7 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off 8 stdby lt lease none w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a w1-1 n/a off off B1 ddsT off off off Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | conVert | Eoc | Ntu | Test | Perf | Main Figure BRI-2. The BRI Main Screen (10-97) Page 8-G-3 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table BRI-1. BRI Card Parameter Options and Defaults (8260/8261) Parameter STATE TERMINAL TYPE B MODE B1 WAN/SERV B1 TS B2 WAN/SERV B2 TS D WAN D TS D SUBCHAN LOCAL LB LB CHAN LBGEN MD LB GEN SEAL CURR TR COND User Options stdby actv lt nt lease brite none B1 B2 B1+B2 128K w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w41 w4-2 n/a 01-24 01-31 w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w41 w4-2 n/a 01-24 01-31 w1-1 w1-2 w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 w41 w4-2 n/a 01-24 01-31 off 1 2 3 4 off ta net B1 B2 B1+B2 ddsT ddsN v54T v54N ft1T ft1N eoc off B1ocu B1csu B1ds0 B1dsu B2ocu B2csu B2ds0 B2dsu n/a off on off on Notes 3 Default stdby lt lease none w1-1 3 01 w1-1 1 01 w1-1 1 1 2 01 off off B1 ddsT off n/a off NOTES 1. D Channels will only show if brite is selected for Type. 2. These choices are only available for LBGEN Modes of ddsT and ddsN. See LB GEN paragraph below. 3. SRV functions will be activated in a future release. STATE The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State option to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. TERMINATION The 8260 and 8261 Terminal setting shows if the port is acting as a line termination (lt) or a network termination (nt). Generally, the line termination resides at the local central office, while the network termination is located at the customer location. Changing the termination from nt (the default) to lt on the 8261 BRI card requires changing jumper settings on the card itself. Instructions for this conversion are included at the end of this chapter. Page 8-G-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card TYPE The Type setting determines the type of BRI connection for this port. The options available are lease (a permanent circuit), brite (BRI Terminal Emulation), iw (interworking) and ntu_l (Network Terminating Unit - Lease, 8260 and 8261 only). If ntu_l is selected, the user is required to select either 64 (which corresponds to the Adtran NTU) or 2560 (which corresponds to the 2560/2561 NTUs). If the wrong type of NTU is selected, the user will not be able to perform remote configuration of the NTU. B MODE The B Channel Mode option determines the B channel usage for this port. Setting the port to none tells the system that the equipment associated with this port does not require a B channel and access to both B WANs is disabled. Setting the highlighted port to B1 tells the system that only one B channel is required for the BRI equipment. Selecting B1 enables the B1 WAN and B1 TS and disables the B2 WAN and B2 TS. Setting the port to B2 tells the system that only one B channel is required for the BRI equipment. Selecting B2 enables the B2 WAN and B2 TS and disables the B1 WAN and B1 TS. Setting the port to B1+B2 tells the system that two B channels are required for the BRI equipment. Selecting B1+B2 enables both the B1/B2 WANs and TSs. Any WAN and any timeslot can be assigned to either B channel. Setting the port to 128K tells the system that a 128Kbps "pipe" is required for the DTE equipment. Selecting 128K enables both the B1/B2 WANs and TSs. Both B channels must be assigned to the same WAN. B1 WAN/SERV The WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the first B channel assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all 8 ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. The serv port is set from conVert screen. B1 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the first B channel assigned to this port. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. For a display of the available time slots, refer to your cross-connect map for the WAN link. See the Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps. B2 WAN/SERV The WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the second B channel assigned to this port. If 128K is selected for the B Mode, the second B channel must be assigned to the same WAN link as the first B channel. (10-97) Page 8-G-5 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 B2 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the second B channel assigned to this port. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. D WAN The D WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the D channel assigned to this port for brite circuits. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. D TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the D channel assigned to this port for brite circuits. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. D SUBCHAN The D Subchannel option allows the user to use a full DS0 for the D channel or split the DS0 into four 16Kbps sections to allow D channels to be combined into a single 64Kbps DS0. D subchannels must be used on the same BRI card only. LOCAL LB The Local Loopback setting controls the direction of the local loopback. The settings are off (for no loopback), ta (for a loopback toward the terminal adapter) and net (for a loopback toward the network). LB CHAN The Loopback Channel setting places the local loopback on either the first B channel (B1), the second B channel (B2) or both B channels (B1+B2). LBGEN MD The Loopback Generation Mode specifies the type of loopback to be placed on the circuit. The BRI card only generates loopback codes, it does not detect loopback codes. The options are ddsT (a DDS loopback on the terminal side of the line), ddsN (a DDS loopback on the network side of the line), v54T (V.54 loopback toward the terminal), v54N (V.54 loopback toward network), ft1T (a fractional T1 loopback toward the terminal), ft1N (fractional T1 loopback toward the network) and eoc (Embedded Operations Channel loopback towards the U interface). Page 8-G-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card LB GEN The Loopback Generation option specifies different loopback codes depending on the selection of loopback generation mode above. The options for ddsT and ddsN are off (no loopback), B1ocu (an OCU loopback on the first B channel), B1csu (a CSU loopback on the first B channel), B1ds0 (a full DS0 loopback on the first B channel), B1dsu (a DSU loopback on the first B channel), B2ocu (an OCU loopback on the second B channel), B2csu (a CSU loopback on the second B channel), B2ds0 (a full DS0 loopback on the second B channel) and B2dsu (a DSU loopback on the second B channel). The options for v.54T, v,54N, ft1T and ft1N are off (no loopback), B1 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on the first B channel), B2 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on the second B channel) and B1+B2 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on both B channels). The options for eoc are off (no loopback), B1 (eoc loopback on the first B channel), B2 (eoc loopback on the second B channel), B1+B2 (eoc loopback on the both B channels) and 2B+D (eoc loopback on the both B channels and the D channel). If the loopback is directed toward the terminal, the loopback pattern selected will not start until the U-ST parameter on the test screen shows the status of "actv." (See the test section below for further information about the U-ST parameter.) SEAL CURR Sealing current (on the 8261 card only) is used to inhibit corrosion on wire splices in outside plant. The Sealing Current option on the BRI card allows the user to select sealing current on a port-by-port basis. Jumpers on the card allow the user to choose between a 15mA (the default) or 7.5mA current (provided by the -48VDC power converter). The jumper settings are shown at the end of this chapter. The setting for this parameter is n/a for the 8260 card. The settings are no and yes for the 8261 card. Choosing yes for this setting will automatically bring up the screen of Figure BRI-3. Table BRI-3 shows the parameter settings and defaults for this screen. RCVE The settings are noTst (no code violation test) and cdVol (code violation test). If cdVol is set and a code violation is detected, the card sends an interrupt toward the network line. TR COND The Trunk condition (TR COND) setting allows the BRI card to pass trunk conditions from the network to the U/ST interface when set to on. Setting the TR COND state to off prevents the condition to be passed through the card. (10-97) Page 8-G-7 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table BRI-2. BRI Card Main Screen Menu of Actions Action Page 8-G-8 Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copy Copies the contents of the current column (except timeslot) to the next column. Useful if a user changes a lot of entries in one column and wants to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. conVert The Conversion feature allows the B channels to be used with ADPCM compression features. See the Conversion section. Eoc Embedded Operations Channel (not yet supported) Ntu Network Terminating Unit programming. (not applicable to 8262). Test Initiates and monitors testing of all BRI card ports. See Test section. Perf Shows the performance statistics for the port highlighted. See the Performance Monitoring section. Not implemented in S/T card. Main Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, users will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card The Sealing Current Screen This screen applies to the 8261 only, and only in LT mode. Move the cursor to the SEAL CURR selection for the desired channel and press to bring up the screen of Figure BRI-3. Node_1 14:33 | U1 BRI Ux8sc 8261 Rev D2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 1 START (h) DURATION (m) REPEAT REP.EVRY (h) 0 0 0 0 Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure BRI-3. The Sealing Current Screen Table BRI-3. Sealing Current Options Parameter START (H) DURATION (M) REPEAT REP EVRY (H) User Options 0-24 1-60 no yes 0 1-24 Default 0 1 no 0 START (h) The Start parameter allows the user to set the time (in hours) that the sealing current is to be applied to the selected port. The values are 0 (zero) through 24. Selection of zero will start the sealing current as soon as the changes are saved. Selection of any other number between 1 and 24 turns on the sealing current on that many hours from now.(e.g. selection of six [6] turns on the current six hours from now). (10-97) Page 8-G-9 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 DURATION (m) The Duration parameter allows the user to set the duration of time (in minutes) the sealing current is to be applied to the port selected. The values are 1-60. REPEAT The Repeat parameter allows the user to repeat the application of sealing current to the line of the port selected. The values are yes and no. REP. EVRY (h) The Repeat Every parameter allows the user to set the time (in hours) that the sealing current is to be repeated on the port selected. The values are 1-24. Selection of any number between 1 and 24 repeats the sealing current on that interval (e.g. selection of one [1] repeats the current every hour). Menu of Actions Table BRI-4 shows the Menu of Actions for the Sealing Current Screen. Table BRI-4. Sealing Current Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh Main Function Save changes to settings. Return all settings to the last saved state. Update time-related information fields that are not automatically updated Return to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Conversion The conversion feature allows the user to compress B channel voice traffic to be used with the ADPCM card. Figure BRI-4 shows the Conversion screen and Table BRI-5 shows the options and default settings. It is not necessary to assign both B channels of a B1+B2 circuit to ADPCM engines. Furthermore, B channels can share an ADPCM timeslot with any other type of service. Page 8-G-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Node_1 14:33 | U1 BRI Ux8sc 8261 Rev D2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 Version: #1.8 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 B2 CNV RATE ADPCM CNV RATE ADPCM 1 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 2 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 3 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 4 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 5 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 6 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 7 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a 8 off n/a n/a off n/a n/a Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure BRI-4. Conversion Screen Table BRI-5. Conversion Screen Options and Defaults Parameter B1 CNV B1 RATE B1 ADPCM B2 CNV B2 RATE B2 ADPCM User Options off ad-u ad-A n/a 24K,1 32K,1 n/a P1 P2 P3 off ad-u ad-A n/a 24K,1 32K,1 n/a P1 P2 P3 40K,1 24K,2 32K,2 40K,2 40K,1 24K,2 32K,2 40K,2 Default off n/a n/a off n/a n/a B1 CNV The B Channel #1 Conversion parameter allows the user to choose Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) coding for B channel #1 voice traffic. The values are off, ad-u and ad-A. Use ad-u when converting from T1 carriers and use ad-A for E1 carriers (this signal is A-inv not A-law). B1 RATE The B Channel #1 Rate parameter allows the user to choose both the speed of the B Channel traffic and the position on the ADPCM time slot. There must be two ADPCM engines assigned to each WAN timeslot and the rate combination of both engines must equal 64Kbps. (10-97) Page 8-G-11 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 The values are n/a, 24K,1 (64Kbps to 24Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 32K,1 (64Kbps to 32Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 40K,1 (64Kbps to 40Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 24K,2 (64Kbps to 24Kbps on the second ADPCM engine), 32K,2 (64Kbps to 32Kbps on the second ADPCM engine), 40K,2 (64Kbps to 40Kbps on the second ADPCM engine). B1 ADPCM The B Channel #1 ADPCM parameter allows you to choose the ADPCM card to which you would like to assign this B channel. The options are n/a, P1 (the ADPCM card in slot P1), P2 (the ADPCM card in slot P2) and P3 (the ADPCM card in slot P3). B2 CNV The B Channel #2 Conversion parameter allows the user to choose Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) coding for B channel #2 voice traffic. The values are off, ad-u and ad-A. Use ad-u when converting from T1 carriers and use ad-A for E1 carriers (this signal is A-inv not A-law). B2 RATE The B Channel #2 Rate parameter allows the user to choose both the speed of the B Channel traffic and the position on the ADPCM time slot. There are two ADPCM engines assigned to each WAN timeslot and the rate combination of both engines must equal 64Kbps. The values are n/a, 24K,1 (64Kbps to 24Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 32K,1 (64Kbps to 32Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 40K,1 (64Kbps to 40Kbps on the first ADPCM engine), 24K,2 (64Kbps to 24Kbps on the second ADPCM engine), 32K,2 (64Kbps to 32Kbps on the second ADPCM engine), 40K,2 (64Kbps to 40Kbps on the second ADPCM engine). B2 ADPCM The B Channel #2 ADPCM parameter allows you to choose the ADPCM card to which you would like to assign this B channel. The options are n/a, P1 (the ADPCM card in slot P1), P2 (the ADPCM card in slot P2) and P3 (the ADPCM card in slot P3). Page 8-G-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Menu of Actions Table BRI-6 shows the Menu of Actions for the BRI Conversion Screen. Table BRI-6. Menu of Actions Action Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Redraws the screen. Returns to the BRI card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Save Undo Refresh Main Embedded Operations Channel Not currently supported Remote NTU Configuration The Ntu option on the BRI Main screen allows the user to configure up to 8 remote NTUs per card. This option is currently available only for 8260/8261 BRI cards with 1.8 firmware). Typing n (Ntu) on the 8260/8261 Main Screen brings up the NTU screen of Figure BRI-5. DEV TYPE: NTU560 DTE INTF TYPE DTE SYNC/ASYN DTE DATA RATE CLOCK MODE DCD OPTIONS DCD OFF DELAY DSR OPTIONS CTS OPTIONS CTS ON DELAY ASYN BAUDRATE RI INDICATION RL LINE LL LINE NTU CONSOLE | SW VER: 5.2 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 v.36 sync 64k int on n/a on on n/a offset off ena ena ena Save | Undo | Refresh | Load | Write | Test | stAtus | Main Figure BRI-5. Remote NTU Configuration Screen (10-97) Page 8-G-13 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 NTU Configuration Parameters and Options Use the arrow keys to scroll through the options of Figure BRI-5. Table BRI-7 shows the parameters and options available. Defaults are identified in parameter lists by bold type. Table BRI-7. Remote NTU Configuration Screen Options and Defaults Parameter DTE INTF TYPE DTE SYNC/ASYN DTE DATA RATE User Options Display only. v.36; for the 2561, it is v.24. sync asy8 asy9 asy10 asy11 Default display only sync sync: 1.2k 2.4k 4.8k 9.6k 14.4k 19.2k 28.8k 32k 38.4k 48k 56k 64k 72k 128k asyx: <1.2k 1.2k 2.4k 4.8k 9.6k 14.4k 19.2k 28.8k 38.4k CLOCK MODE Display only. display only DCD OPTIONS DCD OFF DELAY off on r_rts n/a 5-80 bits on n/a DSR OPTIONS off on on CTS OPTIONS off on l_rts on CTS ON DELAY n/a 0-60 bits 10-250 msec n/a ASYN BAUDRATE offset exact offset RI INDICATION off on off RL LINE dis dis LL LINE dis ena ena NTU CONSOLE dis ena ena DTE INTF TYPE Display only. The DTE Interface Type identifies the interface on the rear panel of the NTU. This parameter is detected automatically. For the 2560, it is v.36; for the 2561, it is v.24. DTE SYNC/ASYN Selects Synchronous (sync) or asynchronous (asy) transmission mode (Sync is the default). Asynchronous transmission has options for four character lengths: asy8 (8-bit), asy9 (9-bit), asy10 (10-bit), or asy11 (11-bit). DTE DATA RATE sync: 1.2k 2.4k 4.8k 9.6k 14.4k 19.2k 28.8k 32k 38.4k 48k 56k 64k 72k 128k asyx: <1.2k 1.2k 2.4k 4.8k 9.6k 14.4k 19.2k 28.8k 38.4k Page 8-G-14 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card CLOCK MODE Display only. CLOCK MODE is detected based on the Primary Clock setting on the Interface Card. DCD OPTIONS The Data Carrier Detect option can be off, on (default), or r_rts (Remote Ready To Send). r_rts option requires setting of the DCD OFF DELAY option. DCD OFF DELAY n/a if the DCD OPTIONS selection is on or off. If r_rts is selected, the options are 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, or 80 bits. DSR OPTIONS off or on. CTS OPTIONS The Clear To Send option can be off, on (default), or l_rts (Local Ready To Send). l_rts option requires setting of the CTS ON DELAY option. CTS ON DELAY n/a if the CTS OPTIONS selection is on or off. If l_rts is selected, the CTS ON DELAY is measured either in bits or milliseconds. The options are 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 bits, or 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, or 250 msecs. ASYN BAUDRATE The asynchronous baud rate can either be set as offset (default) or exact. RI INDICATION The ring indicator setting may be turned on or off (default) RL LINE The remote (network) loop line indicator is always disabled. This is the loop between the BRI card and the NTU (see Figure BRI-6). May be overridden locally by means of a switch on the front panel of the NTU. (10-97) Page 8-G-15 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 LL LINE Sets up loopback testing permission between the NTU and the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) (see Figure BRI-6). The setting may be ena (enable) (default) or dis (disable). This parameter can be overridden locally by means of a switch on the front panel of the NTU. NTU CONSOLE When this option is enabled (ena) (default), the NTU may be programmed locally by a line from the rear connector port to a DTE. When disabled, the NTU must be programmed remotely (e.g., through the BRI card). Lo c a l L oop NT U R e m o t e ( N e t w o r k ) L o o p DT E Chassi s w /BR I Card Figure BRI-6. Local and Remote NTU Loopback Testing. Menu of Actions Table BRI-8. Remote NTU Configuration Screen Menu of Actions. Page 8-G-16 Action Function Save Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Data is not automatically updated on screen. Pressing the "R" key will show updated statistics. Load Loads currently saved parameters from the NTU. Write Saves configuration information to the NTU. Test Brings up the Test Screen (see below). stAtus Brings up the Status Screen (see below). Main Returns to the BRI card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, users will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card NTU Test Figure BRI-7 shows the NTU Test screen, while Table BRI-9 shows the parameter options. DEV TYPE: NTU560 | SW VER: 5.2 | 12-31-99 14:33 1 off on off n/a n/a TEST TIMER STATUS ERROR TOTAL Save | Undo | Refresh | Main Figure BRI-7. NTU Test Screen Table BRI-9. NTU Test Screen Options and Defaults Parameter User Options Notes Default TEST off net off TIMER off on on STATUS off loc net loc_net 1 off ERROR n/a 2 n/a TOTAL n/a 2 n/a NOTES 1 The loc and loc_net options are included to support manual loopback override at the NTU site. 2 These parameters are not supported in this release. TEST Choosing net allows the user to start a loopback test in the network loop (between the BRI card and NTU). The default is off. (10-97) Page 8-G-17 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 TIMER This indicates whether the loopback test is set to time out, or whether it is ongoing. The options are off and on (default). This is a read-only parameter; it is not userselectable. STATUS This parameter indicates the direction of the loopback testing. The options are off (default), loc (local loop), net (network loop), and loc_net (local and network loops). The loc and loc_net parameters are included in the event that the local loopback testing is activated manually by selecting a switch on the front panel of the NTU. This is a read-only parameter; it is not user-selectable. ERROR This parameter is not supported in this release. TOTAL This parameter is not supported in this release. Menu of Actions Table BRI-10. NTU Test Screen Menu of Actions. Page 8-G-18 Action Function Save Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Test data is not automatically updated on screen. Pressing the "R" key will show updated statistics. Main Returns to the remote NTU configuration screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, users will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card NTU Status Figure BRI-8 shows the NTU Status screen, while Table BRI-11 identifies the status displays. DEV TYPE: NTU560 | SW VER: 5.2 ALARM CTS DSR DCD RTS DTR RX FIFO ERR TX FIFO ERR 1 none on on on off off no no HW CODE LINE TR ASIC REV EPLD REV 1 st5411 3 2 | 12-31-99 14:33 Refresh | Main Figure BRI-8. NTU Status Screen (10-97) Page 8-G-19 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table BRI-11. NTU Status Screen Displays Parameter Display ALARM none U L R M Displays active alarms, including: none, U (U interface is down), L (NTU has lost sync and is not yet configured), R (NTU has been reset and is not yet configured), and M (NTU is in the Master mode). CTS CTS Status: off on DSR DSR Status: off on DCD DCD Status: off on RTS RTS Status: off on DTR DTR Status: off on RX FIFO ERR Indicates a FIFO buffering error on the receive end; reports yes or no. TX FIFO ERR Indicates a FIFO buffering error on the transmit end; reports yes or no. HW CODE 0-255 LINE TR Line transceiver type: tp3410 or st5411 ASIC REV 0-255 EPLD REV 0-255 Menu of Actions Table BRI-12. NTU Status Screen Menu of Actions. Page 8-G-20 Action Function Refresh Data is not automatically updated on screen. Pressing the "R" key will show updated statistics. Main Returns to the remote NTU configuration screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, users will be prompted to save or lose changes. (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card BRI (8260/8261) Test Selection of "Test" from the Menu of Options will bring up the screen shown in Figure BRI-9. From this screen, users are allowed to create test situations between BRI Cards or between a single BRI Card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table BRI-15 lists the settings controlled on this screen along with their possible and default values. Node_1 14:33 BERT DIR CHAN SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP U-ST LB ST SEAL | U1 1 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** BRI Ux8sc 2 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8260 3 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Rev B1-0 4 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 5 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Ser 01103 6 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** | 12-31-99 7 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8 n/a ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Save | Undo | Refresh | InsertErr | Clear | Main Figure BRI-9. BRI Card Test Screen (8260 and 8261) (10-97) Page 8-G-21 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Table BRI-15. 8260/8261 Test Screen Options and Defaults Page 8-G-22 Parameter User Options Default BERT off mark p_1 p_0 DIR ta CHAN B1 SYNC see description below BE see description below ES see description below SES see description below CSES see description below OSS see description below BER see description below ELAP U-ST see description below stdby, init , actv, fail, deact, nos, los, b1eoc, b2eoc, 2beoc, bdeoc. actv LB ST off, ta, or net. off SEAL Indicates if the sealing current is selected or not (8261 BRI Card only). space p_1:1 1:1 1:7 p_1:7 net B2 off ta 128K D B1 no (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected BRI port. Depending upon whether the test is on B channels or D channels, the patterns can be sent as either raw data or as HDLC packets containing the patterns. BERT can only be sent on one port at a time. For a B channel test, the patterns that can be selected are off, mark (1111), space (0000), 1:1 (1010), 1:7 (0100-0000), p_1 (packet, 1111), p_0 (packet, 0000), p_1:1 (packet, 1010) and p_1:7 (packet, 0100-0000). If the D channel is selected, the patterns that can be selected are off, p_1 (packet, 1111), p_0 (packet, 0000), p_1:1 (packet, 1010) and p_1:7 (packet, 0100-0000). DIR Selects the direction of the test. The options are ta, toward the Terminal Adapter (customer site) or net, toward the Network (carrier). CHAN Selects the side of the line on which the BER pattern will be sent. The options are B1 (BERT on B channel #1), B2 (BER is on B channel #2), 128K (BERT is on the 128K pipe) and D (BERT is on the D channel). SYNC Synchronization (SYNC) displays yes if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment, no if it has not. BE Bit Error (BE) displays the total number of bit errors logged. ES Errored Seconds (ES) displays the total number of seconds in which errors were detected. SES Severely Errored Seconds (SES) shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). (10-97) Page 8-G-23 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds. OSS Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) shows the number of seconds that the BRI BERT has been out of synchronization. BER Bit Error Rate (BER) shows the rate at which errors are being logged. BER equals the number of bit errors (BE) divided by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. ELAP Elapsed time (ELAP) is the total number of seconds elapsed during the test. U-ST Displays the status of the U interface ports. Possible U interface states include stdby, init (initializing), actv, fail (failed to activate), deact (deactivated), nos (no signal), los (loss of signal), b1eoc (eoc loopback on B1), b2eoc (eoc loopback on B2), 2beoc (eoc loopback on both B channels), bdeoc (eoc loopback on both B and D channels). If the LB GEN option (on the previous screen) is set to ta, the U-ST field must show "actv" before any loopbacks selected become operational. LB ST Loopback State (LB STATE) indicates the local loopback selected on the main screen for this port. Possible states are: off, ta, or net. SEAL Indicates if the sealing current is selected or not (8261 BRI Card only). Page 8-G-24 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Menu of Actions Table BRI-16 shows the Menu of Actions for the BRI test screen. Table BRI-16. Test Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Undo Refresh InsertErr Clear Main Function Saves changes to settings. Returns all settings to the last saved state. Test data is not automatically updated in "real time." Pressing the "R" key will show updated statistics. Allows the user to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal. Clears the testing screen and resets all counters to zero. Returns to the BRI card main screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes. Performance Monitoring (8260/8261) The 8260 and 8261 BRI cards support proprietary performance monitoring, which continuously measures operation performance of the connection from the Integrated Access Controller to the NTU. Each one hour segment is divided into 3600 seconds and statistics are kept for the current hour and the past 24 one hour periods. To get statistics for a particular port, highlight the port on the BRI card main screen and press the P (Performance Monitoring) key. The screen shown as Figure BRI-10 appears. Table BRI-17 defines the parameters displayed. While viewing the performance monitoring screen, the user must press the R (refresh) command from the menu of actions to obtain updated statistics. (10-97) Page 8-G-25 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 14:33 | U1 BRI Ux8sc 8260 Rev D2-0 Ser 01103 | 12-31-99 Unit 1 PERFORMANCE CUR 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 TOTAL STATUS: ES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NOS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LOS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NEBE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEBE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T=Test; L=LOS; N=NOS; P=PS1; p=PS2; t=NTM; S=STDBY/SWITCH Save | Undo | Refresh | insertErr | Clear | Main Figure BRI-10. BRI Card Performance Monitoring Screen Table BRI-17. Performance Monitoring Displays Parameter User Options Default ES see description below display only UAS see description below display only NOS see description below display only LOS see description below display only DM see description below display only NEBE see description below display only FEBE see description below display only STATUS L (loss of synchronization), N (no signal), S (standby), T (test), P (power failure of primary source for NT), p (power failure of secondary source for NT) and t (network terminal test mode). see status options ES Errored Seconds registers the number of seconds for which the BRI card detected a Near End Block Error (NEBE) or a Far End Block Error (FEBE) greater than zero (0) Page 8-G-26 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card UAS Unavailable Seconds shows the number of seconds for which the U-Interface is not available (not active). NOS No Signal Seconds column shows the number of seconds for which the BRI card detected a NOS line condition (applicable for LT Terminal Type only). For NT Terminal Type, no signal seconds are reported in the Unavailable Seconds column. LOS Loss of Synchronization Seconds shows the number of seconds for which the BRI card detected a LOS line condition (applicable for LT Terminal Type only). For NT Terminal Type, the loss of synchronization seconds are included in the Unavailable Seconds column. DM The Degraded Minutes register shows the number of minutes for which the BRI card detected ES, UAS, NOS or LOS greater than zero (0). NEBE Near End Block Error shows transmission errors detected by the near end equipment. FEBE Far End Block Error shows transmission errors detected by the far end equipment. STATUS Status displays error codes for line conditions that occur during the one hour intervals. Identifying codes are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The values are L (loss of synchronization), N (no signal), S (standby), T (test), P (power failure of primary source for NT), p (power failure of secondary source for NT) and t (network terminal test mode). The last three codes (P, p and t) are not available for network terminal applications. (10-97) Page 8-G-27 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Menu of Actions Table BRI-18 shows the Menu of Actions for the BRI Performance Monitoring screen. Table BRI-18. Performance Monitoring Screen Menu of Actions Action Refresh Clear pgUp pgDn Main Function Since the BRI card does not show accumulated performance statistics in "real time" (i.e. second by second), the Refresh command must be used to show changes from the last recorded number. Clears the testing screen and resets all counters to zero. Allows the user to see the first 12 hour period (current + 1-12). Allows the user to see the second 12 hour period (current + 13-24). Returns to the main screen. 8262 BRI Card Settings Figure BRI-11 shows the 8262 BRI main screen. Node_1 | U1 BRI-STx8 Version: #1.8 1 2 STATE stdby stdby TERMINAL nt-pp nt-pp TYPE lease lease B MODE none none B1 WAN/SRV none none B1 TS n/a n/a B2 WAN/SRV none none B2 TS n/a n/a D WAN none none D TS n/a n/a D SUBCHAN n/a n/a LOCAL LB off off LB CHAN B1 B1 LBGEN MD ddsT ddsT LB GEN off off RCVE noTst noTst TR COND off off 8262 3 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off Rev E2-0 4 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off Ser 00047 5 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off 6 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off | 12-31-99 7 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off 14:33 8 stdby nt-pp lease none none n/a none n/a none n/a n/a off B1 ddsT off noTst off Save | Undo | Refresh | Copy | conVert | Eoc | Ntu | Test | Perf | Main Figure BRI-11. BRI Main Screen (8262) 8262 BRI Card Main Screen Parameter Options Table BRI-19 lists the parameters controlled on the screen along with their possible settings. Default values in the option lists are identified in bold type. Page 8-G-28 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Table BRI-19. 8262 BRI Card Parameter Options and Defaults Parameter User Options Default STATE stdby actv TERMINAL nt-pp nt-sb nt-eb TYPE lease brite iw B MODE none B1 B1 WAN/SRV none w4-1 w1-1 w4-2 stdby B2 te nt-pp lease B1+B2 w1-2 128K w2-1 w2-2 none w3-1 w3-2 none P1 P2 P3 B1 TS n/a B2 WAN/SRV none w4-1 01-24 01-31 w1-1 w4-2 w1-2 n/a w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 none P1 P2 P3 B2 TS n/a D WAN none w4-1 01-24 01-31 w1-1 w4-2 w1-2 n/a w2-1 w2-2 w3-1 w3-2 none P1 P2 P3 D TS n/a 01-24 D SUBCHAN n/a off 1 LOCAL LB off ta net LB CHAN B1 B2 LBGEN MD ddsT LB GEN off B1ocu B1csu B2ds0 B2dsu RCVE noTst cdVol TR COND n/a off 01-31 2 n/a 3 4 n/a off B1+B2 ddsN v54T B1 v54N B1ds0 ft1T B1dsu ft1N B2ocu on ddsT B2csu off noTst off NOTES (10-97) 1. SRV functions (P1, P2 and P3) may be activated from the conVert screen when an ADPCM server is installed. 2. D-Channels will only show if brite is selected for Type. 3. These choices are only available for LB GEN Modes of ddsT and ddsN. See LB GEN paragraph below. Page 8-G-29 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 STATE Set the State option to stdby (standby) for ports that are not in use or not yet configured; set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use. The default is stdby. TERMINAL The 8262 Terminal setting allows the port to be set as an nt-pp (network termination point-to-point), nt-sb (network termination short-bus), nt-eb (network termination extended-bus) or te (terminal equipment) device. The default for the 8262 is nt-pp. TYPE The Type setting determines the type of BRI connection for this port. The options available are lease (a permanent circuit), brite (BRI Terminal Emulation), iw (interworking) and ntu_l (Network Terminating Unit - Lease, 8260 and 8261 only). B MODE Determines the B channel usage for this port. none disables access to both B WANs. Setting the highlighted port to B1 assigns only one B channel. Selecting B1 enables the B1 WAN and B1 TS and disables the B2 WAN and B2 TS. Setting the port to B2 enables the B2 WAN and B2 TS and disables the B1 WAN and B1 TS. Selecting B1+B2 enables both the B1/B2 WANs and TSs. Any WAN and any timeslot can be assigned to either B channel. Setting the port to 128K tells the system that a 128kbps "pipe" is required for the DTE equipment. Selecting 128K enables both the B1/B2 WANs and TSs. Both B channels must be assigned to the same WAN. B1 WAN/SRV The WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the first B channel assigned to this port. It is not necessary for all 8 ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. The serv port is set from conVert screen. B1 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the first B channel assigned to this port. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the time slots. For a display of the available time slots, refer to the cross-connect map for the WAN link. See the Operations chapter for information about viewing cross-connect maps. There is no assignment to a server. Page 8-G-30 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card B2 WAN/SRV The WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the second B channel assigned to this port. If 128K is selected for the B Mode, the second B channel must be assigned to the same WAN link as the first B channel. The serv port is set from conVert screen. B2 TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the second B channel assigned to this port. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. The up and down arrow keys are used to scroll through the time slots. There is no assignment to a server. D WAN The D WAN setting identifies the WAN link for the D channel assigned to this port for brite circuits. It is not necessary for all ports on the same card to be assigned to the same WAN link, or to contiguous time slots on a WAN link. D TS The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link for the D channel assigned to this port for brite circuits. Values range from 1-24 for T1 links and 1-31 for E1 links. Time slot 16 is not available on E1 links that are programmed for cas or ccs signaling. D SUBCHAN The D Subchannel option allows users to employ a full DS0 for the D channel or split the DS0 into four 16kbps sections to allow D channels to be combined into a single 64kbps DS0. D subchannels must be used on the same BRI card only. LOCAL LB The Local Loopback setting controls the direction of the local loopback. The settings are off (no loopback), ta (loopback toward the terminal adapter) and net (loopback toward the network). LB CHAN The Loopback Channel setting places the local loopback on either B1 (the first B channel), B2 (the second B channel) or B1+B2 (both B channels). (10-97) Page 8-G-31 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 LBGEN MD The Loopback Generation Mode specifies the type of loopback to be placed on the circuit. The BRI card only generates loopback codes, it does not detect loopback codes. The options are ddsT (DDS loopback on the terminal side of the line), ddsN (a DDS loopback on the network side of the line), v54T (V.54 loopback toward the terminal), v54N (V.54 loopback toward network), ft1T (fractional T1 loopback toward the terminal), ft1N (fractional T1 loopback toward the network). LB GEN The Loopback Generation option specifies different loopback codes depending on the selection of loopback generation mode above. The options for ddsT and ddsN are off (no loopback), B1ocu (an OCU loopback on the first B channel), B1csu (a CSU loopback on the first B channel), B1ds0 (a full DS0 loopback on the first B channel), B1dsu (a DSU loopback on the first B channel), B2ocu (an OCU loopback on the second B channel), B2csu (a CSU loopback on the second B channel), B2ds0 (a full DS0 loopback on the second B channel) and B2dsu (a DSU loopback on the second B channel). The options for v.54T, v.54N, ft1T and ft1N are off (no loopback), B1 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on the first B channel), B2 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on the second B channel) and B1+B2 (v.54 or Ft1 loopback on the both B channels). If the loopback is directed toward the terminal, the loopback pattern selected will not start until the U-ST parameter on the test screen shows the status of actv. (See the Test section for further information about the U-ST parameter). RCVE The settings are noTst (no code violation test) and cdVol (code violation test). If cdVol is set and a code violation is detected, the card sends an interrupt toward the network line. TR COND The Trunk condition (TR COND) setting allows the BRI card to pass trunk conditions from the network to the U/ST interface when set to on. Setting the TR COND state to off prevents passing the condition through the card. Page 8-G-32 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Menu of Actions Table BRI-20. BRI Card Main Screen Menu of Actions Action Save Function Saves changes to settings. Undo Returns all settings to the last saved state. Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically updated (i.e. performance and test data). Copy Copies the contents of the current column (except timeslot) to the next column. Useful if a user changes a lot of entries in one column and wants to repeat those changes in subsequent columns. conVert The Conversion feature allows the B channels to be used with ADPCM compression features. See the Conversion section. Eoc Embedded Operations Channel (not yet supported) Ntu Network Terminating Unit programming. (not applicable to 8262). Test Initiates and monitors testing of all BRI card ports. See Test section. Perf Shows the performance statistics for the port highlighted. See the Performance Monitoring section. Not implemented in S/T card. Main Returns to the main terminal screen. If changes are made to settings and not saved, users will be prompted to save or lose changes. Conversion The conversion feature (conVert) for the 8262 is the same as for the 8260/8261 and will not be repeated here. Test Selecting Test from the Main Screen Menu of Actions for the 8262 brings up the screen shown in Figure BRI-12. The test screen lets users create test situations between BRI Cards or between a single BRI Card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table 8G-21 lists the options and displayed values on this screen. Values of parameters to be entered (if any) are listed at the top of the User option cell for the field, with the default shown in bold type. (10-97) Page 8-G-33 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Node_1 | U1 BRI-STx8 8262 Rev E2-0 Ser 00047 | 12-31-99 14:33 Version: #1.5 BERT DIR CHAN SYNC BE ES SES CSES OSS BER ELAP L1-ST LB ST 1 off ta B1 no 0 0 0 0 0 0e-0 0 actv off 2 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 3 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 4 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 5 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 6 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 7 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** 8 off ta B1 no ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Save | Undo | Refresh | InsertErr | Clear | Main Figure BRI-12. BRI 8262 Test Screen Table BRI-21. 8262 Test Screen Options and Defaults Parameter User Options BERT off mark space 1:1 p_1:1 p_1:7 ta net B1 B2 128K D yes no see description below see description below see description below see description below see description below see description below actv, fail, or init off, ta, or net DIR CHAN SYNC BE ES CSES OSS BER ELAP L1-ST LB ST Default 1:7 p_1 p_0 off ta B1 no actv off BERT Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the selected BRI port. Depending upon whether the test is on B channels or D channels, the patterns can be sent as either raw data or as HDLC packets containing the patterns. BERT can only be sent on one port at a time. Page 8-G-34 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card For a B channel test, the patterns that can be selected are off, mark (1111), space (0000), 1:1 (1010), 1:7 (0100-0000), p_1 (packet, 1111), p_0 (packet, 0000), p_1:1 (packet, 1010) and p_1:7 (packet, 0100-0000). If the D channel is selected, the patterns that can be selected are off, p_1 (packet, 1111), p_0 (packet, 0000), p_1:1 (packet, 1010) and p_1:7 (packet, 0100-0000). DIR Selects the direction of the test. The options are ta, toward the Terminal Adapter (customer site) or net, toward the Network (carrier). CHAN Selects the side of the line on which the BER pattern will be sent. The options are B1 (BERT on B channel #1), B2 (BER is on B channel #2), 128K (BERT is on the 128K pipe) and D (BERT is on the D channel). SYNC Synchronization (SYNC) displays yes if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment, no if it has not. BE Bit Error (BE) displays the total number of bit errors logged. ES Errored Seconds (ES) displays the total number of seconds in which errors were detected. SES Severely Errored Seconds (SES) shows the total number of seconds in which the bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) is triggered by the occurrence of ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds. (10-97) Page 8-G-35 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 OSS Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) shows the number of seconds that the BRI BERT has been out of synchronization. BER Bit Error Rate (BER) shows the rate at which errors are being logged. BER equals the number of bit errors (BE) divided by the total number of bits transmitted during the test. ELAP Elapsed time (ELAP) is the total number of seconds elapsed during the test. L1-ST L1-ST (L1-STATE) displays the condition for the selected port. Possible states are: actv, fail, or init. LB ST Loopback State (LB STATE) indicates the local loopback selected on the main screen for this port. Possible states are: off, ta, or net. Page 8-G-36 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Setting Terminal Type Jumpers on the 8261 Setting or resetting jumpers is necessary for conversion of individual ports on the 8261 from Network Terminal (nt) to Line Terminal (lt). Cards are shipped with Network Terminal as the default (jumpers closed). To make the conversion, remove the BRI card from its slot and remove shorting jumpers across the jumpers labeled J101-J801 (the first digit [e.g. 101] is the port number indicator) on both sets of pins next to the front edge of the card as shown in Figure BRI-13. Ports can be set individually for the lt feature, but once set, remain in the lt mode until the jumpers are reattached. Power Bus Edge Connector J801 J701 J601 J501 J401 J301 Amphenol Connector J201 J101 Figure BRI-13. LT-NT Jumper Locations on the 8261 BRI Card (10-97) Page 8-G-37 BRI Card Reference Guide v3.6 Setting Sealing Current Jumpers on the 8261 Setting or resetting jumpers is necessary for conversion of individual ports on the 8261 from 15mA to 7.5mA of sealing current. Cards are shipped with 15mA as the default (jumpers closed). To make the conversion, remove the BRI card from its slot and remove shorting jumpers across the pins labeled J102-J802 (the first digit [e.g. 102] is the port number indicator) on both sets of pins next to the front edge of the card as shown in Figure BRI-14. Ports can be set individually for 7.5mA but, once set, remain in that setting until the jumpers are reattached. Power Bus Edge Connector J802 J702 J602 J502 J402 J302 Amphenol J202 Connector J102 Figure BRI-14. Sealing Current Jumper Locations on the 8261 BRI Card Page 8-G-38 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card Setting Jumpers on the 8262 As shown in Figure BRI-15, there are 4 jumper options, JPx01, JPx02, JPx03 and JPx04, for each of the eight (8) BRI ports. (The “x” indicates the numbers 1 through 8.) Jumpers JPx02, when installed, applies the XMT 100 Ohm termination. Jumpers JPx03, are installed as the default to apply the RCV 100 Ohm termination. The actual network design determines the setting of these termination’s. Jumpers JPx01 and JPx04 are installed (ON) to provide either internal (INT) or external (EXT) -48v power to the phantom leads based upon the setting of JP5 and JP6 (see markings on the 8262 board). When the JPx01 and JPx04 jumpers are ON, they provide power out on the cable pair. When OFF, there is no power out on the cable pair. The jumper defaults are as follows: Phantom Power - ON/OFF (Jx01 and Jx04) are default = ON Phantom Power Source - Int/Ext (JP5 & JP6) are default = External 100 Ohm Term - Xmt OUT, Rcv IN If external power is used, jumpers JP5 and JP6 must be set to EXTERNAL mode. Failure to do so could damage or destroy the card or system. JP701 JP704 Power Bus Edge Connector JP5/6 Amphenol Connector JP103 JP102 Figure BRI-15. Jumper Locations on the 8262 BRI Card (10-97) Page 8-G-39 BRI Card Page 8-G-40 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Introduction This chapter describes the pinouts of the card connectors used to attach circuits and devices to the integrated access system complex. The front view of the two-sided chassis is shown in Figure Pinouts-1. The two-sided unit was designed so that all cabling would be done at the back of the chassis shown in Figure Pinouts-2. All frontloading chassis were designed so that all cabling would be done at the front of the chassis, as seen in Figure Pinouts-3 through Figure Pinouts-5. The number and type of connectors needed will vary with the card installed. Each card that requires cabling is shown in this chapter, the connector is described, and the pinouts labeled. EUR/US JP1 1 2 3 F1 C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 W3 F2 W4 Figure Pinouts-1. 891822/891823 Two-Side Chassis, Front View R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 AC R + - - + + - C G VN V A VB O R M IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Figure Pinouts-2. 891822/891823 Two-Sided Chassis, Back View (10-97) Page 9-A-1 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 S1 +V-V C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 S2 R C G O R M R1 AC W4 IF Figure Pinouts-3. 8916 Front-Loading Chassis. EUR/US JP1 1 2 3 F1 F2 R1 AC C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 P4 W1 W2 W3 W4 IF R + - - + + - C G VN V A VB O R M Figure Pinouts-4. 891620 Front-Loading Chassis. Page 9-A-2 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts AC RGR VN +VA + VB +COM R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 S1 S2 EUR/US JP1 C1 C2 P1 P2 P3 W1 W2 1 2 3 W3 W4 IF U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Figure Pinouts-5. 891920 Front-Loading Chassis. (10-97) Page 9-A-3 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Cards (8920 and 8921) The 8920 and 8921 Interface Cards must be installed in slot IF on all units. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Pinouts-6. The 8920 has a DB9 (DTE Male) serial port. The 8921 is similar to the 8920 in all aspects except there is not modem jack. RJ11 Modem Port RS485 Node Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port WAN Link Connector Figure Pinouts-6. Interface Card Connectors (8920 and 8921) This section describes the interface card connectors from the bottom to the top of the card. WAN Link Connector The WAN link connector allows you to connect the WAN card ports to incoming and outgoing T1/E1 lines. It has the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: 50-pin RJ27X Female Figure Pinouts-7 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-1 lists the pin assignments. Electrical signals comply with T1/E1 specifications. Page 9-A-4 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-7. WAN Link Connector Table Pinouts-1. WAN Link Pin Assignments WAN Link WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 WAN 2-1 WAN 2-1 WAN 2-1 WAN 2-1 WAN 2-2 WAN 2-2 WAN 2-2 WAN 2-2 WAN 3-1 WAN 3-1 WAN 3-1 WAN 3-1 WAN 3-2 WAN 3-2 WAN 3-2 WAN 3-2 WAN 4-1 WAN 4-1 WAN 4-1 WAN 4-1 WAN 4-2 WAN 4-2 WAN 4-2 WAN 4-2 (10-97) Designation Pin # Function TI 47 Rx from Network RI 22 Rx from Network T 48 Tx to Network R 23 Tx to Network TI 44 Rx from Network RI 19 Rx from Network T 45 Tx to Network R 20 Tx to Network TI 41 Rx from Network RI 16 Rx from Network T 42 Tx to Network R 17 Tx to Network TI 38 Rx from Network RI 13 Rx from Network T 39 Tx to Network R 14 Tx to Network TI 35 Rx from Network RI 10 Rx from Network T 36 Tx to Network R 11 Tx to Network TI 32 Rx from Network RI 7 Rx from Network T 33 Tx to Network R 8 Tx to Network TI 29 Rx from Network RI 4 Rx from Network T 30 Tx to Network R 5 Tx to Network TI 26 Rx from Network RI 1 Rx from Network T 27 Tx to Network R 2 Tx to Network All other pins are unconnected. Page 9-A-5 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 1183 Adapter (600 Chassis) The 1183 Adapter may be used to provide convenient coaxial cable connections for 8 E1 lines. The 1183 Adapter interfaces with the WAN Link Connector. It is shown in Figure Pinouts-8. Jumpers should be set for balanced or unbalanced operation prior to installation. For a discussion of balanced/unbalanced jumper settings please see the WAN section of this manual. RX Rx TX TX Rx Rx TX TX Rx Rx TX TX Rx UNBAL BAL Rx TX TX Rx Options on the Rear BAL UNBAL RX 10193 Figure Pinouts-8. 1183 E1 Interface Adapter 1184 Adapter (800 Chassis) The 1184 Adapter may be used to provide convenient coaxial cable connections for 8 E1 lines. The 1184 Adapter interfaces with the WAN Link Connector. It is shown in Figure Pinouts-9. Jumpers should be set for balanced or unbalanced operation prior to installation. For a discussion of balanced/unbalanced jumper settings please see the WAN section of this manual. Rx TX TX Rx RX BAL UNBAL Rx TX TX Rx RX Rx TX TX Rx Rx TX TX Rx UNBAL BAL Options on the Rear Figure Pinouts-9. 1184 E1 Interface Adapter Page 9-A-6 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts RS232 Management Port The RS232 computer port is used for direct reporting of alarms to an outside device and connecting to the network management system has the characteristics shown in Table Pinouts-2 Table Pinouts-2. RS232 Management Port Characteristics Connector: Gender: Standard: Electrical: Card 9-pin D-connector male EIA 574 RS232 DTE 8920 9-pin D-connector Male EIA 574 RS232 DTE 8921 The pinouts for the computer port connector are shown at right, while Table Pinouts-3 lists the pin assignments. In the table, “Input” means that data is flowing from the computer to the system. Table Pinouts-3. Management Port Pin Assignments (DB-9) Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (10-97) Pin Name RLSD RxD TxD DTR S Gnd DSR RTS CTS RI Pin Function Receive Line Signal Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send Ring Indicator DTE Direction IN IN OUT OUT N/A IN OUT IN IN Page 9-A-7 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 RJ11C Modem Port The modem port is used to connect the Interface card's internal dial modem to a standard telephone line. This port may be used either to log into the unit from a remote VT100 terminal or to send system alarms to a remote device. The modem port presents an RJ11C female connector. Table Pinouts-5 lists the pin assignments. The modem port has the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standard: Electrical: RJ11C receptacle Female RJ11C 600 ohm, 2-wire Table Pinouts-5. Modem Port Pin Assignments Pin # Function 3 Tip 4 Ring Pins 1, 2, 5, and 6 are unconnected. RS485 Node Port The RS485 node port has the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Electrical: RJ48 receptacle Female RS485 Table Pinouts-6 lists the pin assignments. Table Pinouts-6. Node Port Pin Assignments Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 9-A-8 Designation +n -n ANO ANC ACOM +F -f GND Function Internodal Communications Internodal Communications Alarm on Open Condition Alarm on Closed Condition Alarm Common Lead (Source) Frame Synchronization Frame Synchronization Chassis Ground (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port The RS232 control terminal interface port allows you to connect the system to a VT100 compatible terminal, with which you can send commands to the system. The control terminal interface port characteristics are shown below: Connector: Gender: Standard: Electrical: RJ48 receptacle Female EIA 561 RS232 DCE Table Pinouts-7 lists the pin assignments. Table Pinouts-7. Control Terminal Interface Port Pin Assignment Pin # 4 5 6 (10-97) Function Signal Ground Receive Data Transmit Data All other pins are unconnected. Direction N/A Output Input Page 9-A-9 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card (8925) The 8925 Interface Card uses RJ48 jacks to terminate two T1 and four Bantam jacks to monitor WAN links and an RS232 control terminal interface port. The computer port, modem port and node port are not available on this interface card. Like the 8920, this card must be installed in slot IF on all units. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Pinouts-10. The pinouts for the RJ48 connectors for T1 links are shown in Table Pinouts-8. RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port TX RX WAN 1-2 Bantam Jack T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) RX TX WAN 1-1 Bantam Jack Figure Pinouts-10. 8925 Interface Card Ports RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port The RS232 control terminal interface port allows you to connect the system to a VT100 compatible terminal, which you can use to send commands to the system. The port uses a standard RJ48 jack as described for the 8920. Page 9-A-10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts WAN Link Connectors The WAN connectors allows you to connect the system to two WAN links The terminals are standard RJ48 or Bantam jacks. Table Pinouts-8 lists the pin assignments for each RJ48 and Bantam jack with which it is associated. Table Pinouts-8. WAN Link and Monitoring Pin Assignments WAN Link WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-1 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 WAN 1-2 (10-97) Designation Function RJ-48 Pin TI Rx from Network 2 RI Rx from Network 1 T Tx to Network 5 R Tx to Network 4 TI Rx from Network 2 RI Rx from Network 1 T Tx to Network 5 R Tx to Network 4 All other pins are unconnected. Bantam Pin RX 1 RX 2 TX 1 TX 2 RX 1 RX 2 TX 1 TX 2 Page 9-A-11 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Interface Card (8926) The 8926 Interface card is similar to the 8925 Interface card with the addition of the computer port, node port and modem port. Like the 8920, this card must be installed in slot IF on all units. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Pinouts-11. The pinouts for the RJ48 connectors for T1 links are the same as those shown for the 8925 Interface card (see Table Pinouts-9). The pinouts for the DB9, RJ48 and RJ11 connectors are the same as those shown for the 8920 Interface card. RJ11 Modem Port RS485 Nodal Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port TX RX WAN 1-2 Bantam Jack T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) T1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) RX TX WAN 1-1 Bantam Jack Figure Pinouts-11. 8926 Interface Card Port Page 9-A-12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Interface Card (8927) The 8927 Interface Card uses BNC connectors to terminate two E1 WAN links, a DB9 management port, an RJ48 control terminal interface port and an RJ48 node port. Like the 8920 and 8925, it must be installed in slot IF on all units. The interface card connectors are arranged as shown in Figure Pinouts-12. The pinouts for the DB9 and RJ48 connectors are the same as those shown for the 8920 Interface card. RS485 Nodal Port RS232 Control Terminal Interface Port RS232 (Male) Management Port TX E1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-2) RX RX E1 WAN Connector (WAN 1-1) TX Figure Pinouts-12. 8927 Interface Card Port (10-97) Page 9-A-13 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 External Alarm Card (8401 and 8402) External Alarm cards can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 twosided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 frontloading chassis. These cards enable the integrated access system to respond to four external alarms (three alarms for the 8402) for control of environmental and security conditions, and four internal alarms (three alarms for the 8402) to outside alarm indicators (for example, a critical alarm lights a red light). Each inbound alarm sensor has the capability of responding to one external condition. The alarms appear on the screen in the alarm section, showing the alarm as a SENSOR alarm and includes the slot number and sensor number of the condition (i.e., SENSOR U7-4). The inbound alarm sensors may be optioned to accept either 12 or 48v. Both JP1 and JP2 jumpers should be set to the proper inbound voltage. The inbound sensors are isolated from ground. Each outbound "floating" relay (normally open contacts and normally closed contacts) responds to system alarm categories (major [major and critical] and minor [minor and informational]) and activates an external device. There are two relays for each of the four Alarm Card ports. The relays are dual-pole, double-throw. The External Alarm Card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-13 shows the pinouts for the connector and Table Pinouts-9 shows the pin assignments for both inbound sensor alarms and outbound internal alarm indicators. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-13. External Alarm Card Connector Pinouts Table Pinouts-9. External Alarm Card Pin Assignments Inward Alarms Sensor Designation Pin 1 R1 1 T1 26 2 R2 2 T2 27 3 R3 3 T3 28 4 R4 4 T4 29 Page 9-A-14 Relay R1(A) R1(B) R2(A) R2(B) R3(A) R3(B) R4(A) R4(B) Outward Alarms Source Norm Close 7 6 32 31 11 10 36 35 15 14 40 39 19 18 44 43 Norm Open 8 33 12 37 16 41 20 45 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts External Alarm Card (8403) The 8403 External Alarm Card has two Amphenol connectors, J3 (lower) and J4 (upper), located on the card front to interface the sensors and switches (see Figure Pinouts-14). The pin positions are displayed in Figure Pinouts-15. Pin assignments for sensors are documented in Table Pinouts-10, while the pin assignments for switches are displayed in Table Pinouts-11. J4 R J 1 1 J3 Figure Pinouts-14. External Alarm Card (8403) Connectors. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-15. External Alarm Card (8403) J3/J4 Pinouts (10-97) Page 9-A-15 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Table Pinouts-10. External Alarm Card (8403) Sensor Pin Assignments Sensor Desig. 1 sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Page 9-A-16 J3 J4 Connector Pin # 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50 Connector Pin # 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50 Sensor Desig. 15 sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + sense sense + 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Table Pinouts-11. External Alarm Card (8403) Switch Pin Assignments Switch # 1 Contact Type Form C 2 C 3 A 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C Desig. Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm J3 Connector Pin # 2 1 3 27 26 28 --4 29 6 5 7 31 30 32 9 8 10 34 33 35 Switch # 8 Contact Type Form C 9 C 10 B 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C Desig. Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm Open Close Comm J4 Connector Pin # 27 26 28 2 1 3 4 --29 6 5 7 31 30 32 9 8 10 34 33 35 The jumper pairs that correspond to each sensor are numbered accordingly. For example, the jumper pairs for sensor #12 are those in row SI12 of the lower jumper group (columns JP1 and JP2). The jumper pairs that correspond to sensor #25 are those in row SI25 of the upper jumper group (columns JP3 and JP4). The outside pin of each jumper pair carries voltage, while the inside pins are passive, as shown in Figure Pinouts-15. The outside (left) pins for the jumper pairs in columns JP1 and JP3 carry positive (+) voltage, while the outside (right) pins for the jumper pairs in columns JP2 and JP4 carry negative (-) voltage. SI 15 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Negative ( -) Voltag e JP3 JP4 Positive ( +) Voltag e PASV ACTV Figure Pinouts-16. Jumper Pair Assignments. (10-97) Page 9-A-17 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Between the Amphenol connectors is a standard RJ11 connector to interface the voice port. The pin positions for this connector are shown in Figure Pinouts-17, while its pin assignments are shown in Table Pinouts-12. The RJ11 port, which may be used to send system alarms to a remote device, has the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standard: Electrical: RJ11 receptacle Female RJ11 600Ω 2-wire Pin11 Pin Pin 6 Pin 8 Figure Pinouts-17. RJ11 Port Table Pinouts-12. RJ11 Port Pin Assignments Pin # Function 3 Ring 4 Tip All other pins are unconnected. Page 9-A-18 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts E&M Card (8108) The 2-wire, eight-port 8108 E&M Card can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. This card allows you to connect the integrated access system to 2-wire analog voice equipment with E&M signaling. The 8108 E&M Card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-18 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-13 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-18. 8108 E&M Card Connector (10-97) Page 9-A-19 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 Table Pinouts-13. 8108 E&M Card Connector Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 All channels All channels Page 9-A-20 Designation T R E M T R E M T R E M T R E M T R E M T R E M T R E M T R E M SG SB All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 28 3 29 4 31 6 32 7 34 9 35 10 37 12 38 13 40 15 41 16 43 18 44 19 46 21 47 22 49 24 25 50 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts E&M Card (8115) The 4-wire, four-port 8115 E&M Card can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. This card allows you to connect the integrated access system to 4-wire analog voice equipment with E&M signaling. The 8115 E&M Card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-19 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-14 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-19. 8115 E&M Card Connector Table Pinouts-14. 8115 E&M Card Connector Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 All channels All channels (10-97) Designation T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M SG SB All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 25 50 Page 9-A-21 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card (8118) The 4-wire, eight-port 8118 E&M card can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8918 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. This card allows you to connect the system to four-wire analog voice equipment with E&M signaling. The 8118 E&M card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-20 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-15 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-20. 8118 Card Connector Table Pinouts-15. 8118 Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 Page 9-A-22 Designation T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M Pin # 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Table Pinouts-15. 8118 Pin Assignments (cont.) 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 All channels All channels (10-97) T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M SG SB 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 25 50 Page 9-A-23 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 E&M Card (8119) The 4-wire, eight-port 8119 E&M card can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. This card allows you to connect the system to four-wire analog voice equipment with E&M signaling. The 8119 E&M card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-21 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-16 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-21. 8119 E&M Card Connector Table Pinouts-16. 8119 Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 Page 9-A-24 Designation T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M Pin # 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Table Pinouts-16. 8119 Pin Assignments (cont.) 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 All channels All channels (10-97) T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M T R T1 R1 E M SG SB 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 25 50 Page 9-A-25 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Card (8124 and 8125) The 2-wire, four-port 8124 and 8125 FXS cards can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. These cards allow you to connect the integrated access system to 2-wire analog voice equipment. The 8124 and 8125 FXS cards have an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-22 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-17 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-22. 8124 and 8125 FXS Card Connector Table Pinouts-17. 8124 and 8125 FXS Card Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Page 9-A-26 Designation T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 29 4 32 7 35 10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts FXS Card (8128 and 8129) The 2-wire, eight-port 8128 and 8129 FXS cards can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. These cards allow you to connect the integrated access system to 2-wire analog voice equipment. The 8128 and 8129 FXS cards have an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-23 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-18 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-23. 8128 and 8129 FXS Card Connector Table Pinouts-18. 8128 and 8129 FXS Card Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 (10-97) Designation T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 29 4 32 7 35 10 38 13 41 16 44 19 47 22 Page 9-A-27 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 FXO Card (8134 and 8135) The 2-wire, four-port 8134 and 8135 FXO cards can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. These cards allow you to connect the integrated access system to 2-wire analog voice equipment. The 8134 and 8135 FXO cards have an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-24 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-19 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-24. 8134 and 8135 FXO Card Connectors Table Pinouts-19. 8134 and 8135 FXO Card Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Page 9-A-28 Designation T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 29 4 32 7 35 10 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts FXO Card (8138 and 8139) The 2-wire, eight-port 8138 and 8139 FXO cards can be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. These cards allow you to connect the integrated access system to 2-wire analog voice equipment. The 8138 and 8139 FXO cards have an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-25 shows the pinouts for this connector, while Table Pinouts-20 lists the pin assignments. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-25. 8138 and 8139 FXO Card Connector Table Pinouts-20. 8138 and 8139 FXO Card Pin Assignments Port # 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 (10-97) Designation T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 29 4 32 7 35 10 38 13 41 16 44 19 47 22 Page 9-A-29 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 FXS Coin Card (8149) The FXS Coin Card has a 50-pin Amphenol jack located on its faceplate. Figure Pinouts-26 shows this jack, and Table Pinout-21 list the signal pinouts. Figure Pinouts-26. FXS Coin Card Jack Table Pinouts-21. FXS Coin Card Jack Pinouts Port 1 Designation T1 Pin 26 1 R1 1 2 T2 29 2 R2 4 3 T3 32 3 R3 7 4 T4 35 4 R4 10 5 R5 13 5 T5 38 6 R6 16 6 T6 41 All other pins are unconnected. Page 9-A-30 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts FXO Coin Card (8159) The FXO Coin Card has a 50-pin Amphenol jack on its faceplate. Figure Pinouts-27 shows this jack, and Table Pinouts-22 lists the signal pinouts. Figure Pinouts-27. FXO Coin Card Jack Table Pinouts-22. FXO Coin Card Jack Pinouts Port # 1 Designation T1 Pin # 26 1 R1 1 2 T2 29 2 R2 4 3 T3 32 3 R3 7 4 T4 35 4 R4 10 5 T5 38 5 R5 13 6 T6 41 6 R6 16 7 T7 44 7 R7 19 8 T8 47 8 R8 22 All other pins are unconnected. (10-97) Page 9-A-31 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card (8202) RS530 The 8202 HSU Card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 twosided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 frontloading chassis. Each card has two DB-25 connectors. Figure Pinouts-28 shows the card. Port #1 Connector Port #2 Connector Figure Pinouts-28. 8202 HSU Card Connectors RS530 Channel Connectors The RS530 connectors on the 8202 HSU card allow you to connect the system to external data devices. The connectors have the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standards: Electrical: 25-pin D-connectors Female 8202—Proprietary pinout 8202—RS530 Figure Pinouts-29 shows the connector Pinouts and Table Pinouts-23 lists the pin assignments. Page 9-A-32 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Pin 25 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 1 DB-25 Figure Pinouts-29. Channels 1 and 2 Connectors on 8202 HSU Card Table Pinouts-23. 8202 HSU Card Channel Connectors Pin Assignments Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 (10-97) Function Cable Shield Send Data A Receive Data A RTS A CTS A DCE Ready Signal Common RR/RLSD A Receive Timing B RR/RLSD B Terminal Timing B Send Timing B CTS B Send Data B Send Timing A Receive Data B Receive Timing A Local Loopback RTS B DTE Ready Remote Loopback Incoming Call Receive Common Terminal Timing A Test Mode All other pins are unconnected. Direction -Input Output Input Output Output -Output Output Output Input Output Output Input Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Output -Input Output Page 9-A-33 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card (8203) The 8203 High-Speed data Unit (HSU) card allows users to connect high-speed data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communications equipment (DCE) to WAN links or other HSU cards. The 8203 HSU Card has two ports supporting ANSI/EIA/TIA-530 or two X.21 data ports (see Figure Pinouts-30). Each of the two ports can be configured to operate as a DCE port or a DTE port, with data speeds ranging from 56/64 Kb/s to 1.544/2.048 Mb/s. The card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. HSU-dte P 1 Port #1 Connectors P 2 Port #2 Connectors Figure Pinouts-30. 8203 HSU Card Connectors DB-25 Channel Connectors The DB-25 connectors on the 8203 HSU card allow you to connect the system to external data devices. The connectors have the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standards: Electrical: 25-pin D-connectors Female 8203—Proprietary pinout 8203—X.21 Figure Pinouts-31 shows the connector Pinouts and Table Pinouts-24 lists the pin assignments. Page 9-A-34 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Pin 25 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 1 DB-25 Figure Pinouts-31. Connectors on an 8203 HSU Card Table Pinouts-24. 8203 HSU Card Pin Assignments Pin # 1 2 3 4 7 8 10 11 14 16 19 24 (10-97) Function Cable Shield RD A TD A RTS A Signal Common (Ground) Control RLSD A Control RLSD B Timing Clock B RD B TD B RTS B Timing Clock A All unlisted pins are unconnected. Direction -Output Input Output -Output Output Input Output Input Input Input Page 9-A-35 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card (8212) V.35 The 8212 HSU Card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 twosided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 frontloading chassis. Each card has two DB-25 connectors. Figure Pinouts-32 shows the card. Port #1 Connector Port #2 Connector Figure Pinouts-32. 8212 HSU Card Connectors V.35 Channel Connectors The V.35 connectors on the 8212 HSU Card allow you to connect the system to external data devices. The connectors have the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standards: Electrical: 25-pin D-connectors Female 8212—Proprietary pinout 8212—V.35 DCE Figure Pinouts-33 shows the connector pinouts and Table Pinouts-25 lists the pin assignments. Page 9-A-36 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Pin 25 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 1 DB-25 Figure Pinouts-33. Connectors on an 8212 HSU Card Table Pinouts-25. 8212 HSU Card Pin Assignments Pin # 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 17 18 24 25 (10-97) Function Cable Shield RTS CTS DSR Signal Ground RLSD SD B SD A SCTE B SCTE A RD B RD A SCR B SCR A SCT B SCT A All other pins are unconnected. Direction --Input Output Output --Output Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Page 9-A-37 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card (8214) V.35 The 8214 High-Speed data Unit (HSU) card allows users to connect high-speed data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communications equipment (DCE) to WAN links or other HSU cards. The 8214 HSU Card supports two V.35 data ports. Each of the two ports can be configured to operate as a DCE port or a DTE port, with data speeds ranging from 56/64 Kb/s to 1.544/2.048 Mb/s. The card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. Figure Pinouts-34 shows the card. HSU-trunk P 1 Port #1 Connector P 2 Port #2 Connector Figure Pinouts-34. 8214 HSU Card Connectors Homologation Notification The equipment was tested against NET2 for connection to V.35 interfaces to Digital Data Networks. Testing was carried out using a Premisys 1260M cable for DTE connections. If any other cable is used, its capacitance must not exceed 2060 picofarads (pF). Page 9-A-38 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts DB-25/V.35 Channel Connectors The DB-25/V.35 connectors on the 8214 HSU card allow you to connect the system to external data devices or trunks. The connectors have the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standards: Electrical: 25-pin D-connectors Female 8214—Proprietary pinout 8214—V.35 Figure Pinouts-35 shows the connector Pinouts and Table Pinouts-26 lists the pin assignments. Pin 25 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 1 DB-25 Figure Pinouts-35. Connectors on an 8214 HSU Card Table Pinouts-26 8214 HSU Card Pin Assignments Pin # 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 (10-97) Function Cable Shield RTS CTS DSR Signal Ground RLSD TD B TD A TT B TT A RD B RD A RC A RC B RT B RT A TM DTR RLB LLB ST B ST A All other pins are unconnected. Direction --Input Output Output --Output Input Input Input Input Output Output Input Input Output Output Output Output Input Input Output Output Page 9-A-39 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 HSU Card (8215) RS530 / V.35 The 8215 HSU card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 twosided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 frontloading chassis. Each card has four DB-26 connectors. Figure Pinouts-36 shows the card. Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Figure Pinouts-36. 8215 HSU Card Connectors RS530/V.35 Channel Connectors The RS530/V.35 connectors on the 8215 HSU card allow you to connect the system to external data devices. The connectors have the following characteristics: Connector: Gender: Standards: Electrical: 26-pin D-connectors Female 8215—Proprietary pinout 8215—RS530 or V.35 (switch selectable) Figure Pinouts-37 shows the connector Pinouts and Table Pinouts-27 lists the pin assignments. Page 9-A-40 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Pin 26 Pin 9 Pin 19 Pin 1 DB-26 Figure Pinouts-37. Connectors on 8215 HSU Card Table Pinouts-27. 8215 HSU Card Pin Assignments Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 (10-97) Function Cable Shield Send Data A Receive Data A RTS A CTS A DCE Ready Signal Common RR/RLSD A Receive Timing B RR/RLSD B Terminal Timing B Send Timing B CTS B Send Data B Send Timing A Receive Data B Receive Timing A Local Loopback RTS B DTE Ready Remote Loopback Incoming Call Ext Rcv Clock Terminal Timing A Test Mode Ext Rcv Clock All other pins are unconnected. Direction -Input Output Input Output Output -Output Output Output Input Output Output Input Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Output Input Input Output Input Page 9-A-41 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 SRU Card (8220) The SRU card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. Each card has ten standard RJ48C connectors that correspond with the ten subrate time slots assignable from each card. Figure Pinouts-38 shows the card and Table Pinouts-28 shows the pinouts for the RJ48C connections on the SRU Card. SRU TS #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 RJ-48C #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 Figure Pinouts-38. SRU Card Connectors Table Pinouts-28. SRU Connector Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 9-A-42 Signal Name RCLK RLSD TCLK GND RD TD CTS RTS Direction output output output output input output input (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts OCU-DP Card (8247) The 8247 OCU-DP card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. The card has ten standard RJ48C connectors, five of which are assignable from the card. The other five connectors on the 8247 OCU-DP card are activated with the 845 Child Card. Figure Pinouts-39 shows the card and Table Pinouts29 shows the pin assignments for the RJ48C connections on the OCU-DP Card. OCU-DP #1 #2 RJ-48C #3 #4 #5 Activated with 845 Child Figure Pinouts-39. 8247 OCU-DP Card Connectors Table Pinouts-29. 8247 OCU-DP Card Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (10-97) Signal Name R1 T1 ----T R Direction input input ----output output Page 9-A-43 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 OCU-DP Card (8248) The 8248 OCU-DP card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. The card has ten standard RJ48C connectors, five of which are assignable from the card. The other five connectors on the 8248 OCU-DP card are activated with the 845 Child Card. Figure Pinouts-40 shows the card and Table Pinouts30 shows the pin assignments for the RJ48C connections on the OCU-DP Card. OCU-DP #1 #2 RJ-48C #3 #4 #5 Activated with 845 Child Figure Pinouts-40. 8248 OCU-DP Card Connectors Table Pinouts-30. 8248 OCU-DP Card Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 9-A-44 Signal Name R1 T1 ----T R Direction input input ----output output (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts OCU-DP Card (8249) The OCU-DP card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. Each card has two standard RJ48C connectors that correspond with the two OCU-DP Ports assignable from each card. Figure Pinouts-41 shows the card and Table Pinouts-31 shows the pin assignments for the RJ48C connections on the OCU-DP Card. OCU-DP Port #1 RJ-48C #2 Figure Pinouts-41. 8249 OCU-DP Card Connectors Table Pinouts-31. 8249 OCU-DP Card Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (10-97) Signal Name R1 T1 ----T R Direction input input ----output output Page 9-A-45 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 DS0-DP Card (8254) The DS0-DP card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. Each card has four standard (female) DB-15 connectors that are labeled to correspond with the four DS0-DP Ports assignable from each card. Figure Pinouts-42 shows the card and Table Pinouts-32 shows the pin assignments for the DB-15(F) connections on the DS0-DP Card. Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Figure Pinouts-42. DS0-DP Card Connectors Page 9-A-46 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Table Pinouts-32. DS0-DP Card Pin Assignments DB-15(F) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (10-97) Signal Name GND N/A CR CK A CX CK A DTAR A DTAX A BYTECLK A BITCLK A N/A CR CK A CX CK A DTAR A DTAX A BYTECLK A BITCLK A Direction ----output output output input both both --output output output input both both Modes Used In all n/a contra-directional contra-directional all all DS0-DP DS0-DP n/a contra-directional contra-directional all all DS0-DP DS0-DP Page 9-A-47 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 FRAD Card (8231) The 8231 FRAD card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 twosided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 frontloading chassis. Each card has ten standard RJ48C connectors that correspond with the ten user ports assignable from each card. Figure Pinouts-43 shows the card and Table Pinouts-33 shows the pin assignments for the RJ48C connections on the 8231 FRAD Card. Top Handle FRAD User #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 RJ-48C #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 Bottom Handle Figure Pinouts-43. FRAD Card Connectors Table Pinouts-33. FRAD Card Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 9-A-48 Signal Name RCLK RLSD TCLK GND RD TD CTS RTS Direction output output output output input output input (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts B7R Card (8228) The B7R card may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. Each card has ten standard RJ48C connectors (8 of which are unused). The two usable port connectors are for the Aggregate Port and the Debug Port. Figure Pinouts-44 shows the card and Table Pinouts-34 shows the pin assignments for the RJ48C connections on the B7R Card. B7R User Top Handle Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused RJ-48C Unused Unused Unused Debug Port #9 Aggregate Port Bottom Handle Figure Pinouts-44. B7R Card Connectors Table Pinouts-34. B7R Card Pin Assignments Male RJ-48 Pin # Signal Name Direction 1 * RCLK output 2 RLSD output 3 * TCLK output 4 GND 5 RD output 6 TD input 7 CTS output 8 RTS input * Clocking unnecessary for Asynch Transmission (10-97) Page 9-A-49 Pinouts Reference Guide v3.6 BRI Card (8260, 8261, and 8262) The eight-port BRI cards may be installed in any user card slot, U1-U-8 on the 8918 two-sided chassis or 8919 front-loading chassis, and P1-P4 or W1-W4 on the 8916 front-loading chassis. These cards allow you to connect the integrated access system to leased BRI services from service providers. The BRI card has an RJ27X (female) 50-pin Amphenol connector located on the faceplate of the card. Figure Pinouts-45 shows the pinouts for this connector. Table Pinouts-35 lists the pin assignments for the 8260 and 8261, while Table Pinouts-36 lists the pin assignments for the 8262. Pin 50 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 1 Figure Pinouts-45. BRI Card Connector Table Pinouts-35. BRI Card Pin Assignments (8260 / 8261) Port # 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Page 9-A-50 Designation T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 All other pins are unconnected. Pin # 26 1 29 4 32 7 35 10 38 13 41 16 44 19 47 22 (10-97) Reference Guide v3.6 Pinouts Table Pinouts-36 BRI Card Pin Assignments (8262) Port 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 External Power External Power Designation Xmt–T0 Xmt–R0 Rcv–T0 Rcv–R0 Xmt–T1 Xmt–R1 Rcv–T1 Rcv–R1 Xmt–T2 Xmt–R2 Rcv–T2 Rcv–R2 Xmt–T3 Xmt–R3 Rcv–T3 Rcv–R3 Xmt–T4 Xmt–R4 Rcv–T4 Rcv–R4 Xmt–T5 Xmt–R5 Rcv–T5 Rcv–R5 Xmt–T6 Xmt–R6 Rcv–T6 Rcv–R6 Xmt–T7 Xmt–R7 Rcv–T7 Rcv–R7 +48v -48v Pin # 26 1 27 2 29 4 30 5 32 7 33 8 35 10 36 11 38 13 39 14 41 16 42 17 44 19 45 20 47 22 48 23 50 25 If external power is used, jumpers JP5 and JP6 must be set to EXTERNAL mode. Failure to do so could damage or destroy the card or integrated access system. (10-97) Page 9-A-51 Pinouts Page 9-A-52 Reference Guide v3.6 (10-97)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No Creator : Microsoft Word Create Date : Tuesday, February 17, 1998 2:46:48 PM Title : 00Cover.PDF Author : Unknown Producer : Acrobat PDFWriter 3.02 for Windows Subject : Modify Date : 2001:06:22 12:35:16-07:00 Page Count : 454EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools